E5EN - Temperature Controller OMRON - Free user manual and instructions

★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 5.0/10 📄 355 pages EN 💬 AI Question

USER MANUAL E5EN OMRON

Preface The E5CN, ESCN-U, E5AN, E5EN, and E5GN are Digital Temperature Controllers. The E5CN and E5CN-U are both compact temperature controllers, with the ESCN featuring screw terminal connec- tions, and the ESCN-U featuring socket pin connections. The E5GN can be connected using screw ter- minals or screwless clamp terminals. The main functions and characteristics of these Digital Temperature Controllers are as follows: + Any of the following types of input can be used: thermocouple, platinum resistance thermometer, infrared sensor, analog voltage, or analog cur- rent. - Either standard or heating/cooling control can be performed. + Both auto-tuning and self-tuning are supported. + Event inputs can be used to switch set points (multi-SP function), switch between RUN and STOP status, switch between automatic and manual operation, start/reset the simple program function, and perform other operations. (Event inputs are not applicable to the E5SCN-U.) + Heater burnout detection, heater short (HS) alarms, and heater overcur- rent (OC) functions are supported. (Applicable to E5CN, ESAN, E5EN, and E5GN models with heater burnout detection function.) + Communications are supported. (Applicable to ESCN, E5AN, E5EN, and E5GN models with communications.) + User calibration of the sensor input is supported. - The structure is waterproof (IP66). (Not applicable to the E5SCN-U.) + Conforms to UL, CSA, and IEC safety standards and EMC Directive. + The PV display color can be switched to make process status easy to understand at a glance. This manual describes the E5CN, ESCN-U, E5AN, E5EN, and ESGN. Read this manual thoroughly and be sure you understand it before attempting to use the Digital Temperature Controller and use the Digital Temperature Controller correctly according to the information provided. Keep this manual in a safe place for easy reference. Refer to the following manual for further information on communications: ESCN/E5AN/E5EN/E5SGN Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual Basic Type (Cat. No. H158). Refer to the following manual for information on the Advanced Type Controllers: E5CN/ESAN/E5EN-H Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual Advanced Type (Cat. No. H157). Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information. Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera- tion of the product. 1,2,3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.

© OMRON, 2008 AI rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is con- stantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.

Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the products. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments. ETS Limitations of Liab ity WARRANTY OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON- INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY

OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT LIABILITY. In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted. IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WEÈRE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR. Application Considerations

OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of the products in the customer's application or use of the products. At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products: + Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this manual. < Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations. + Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products. NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS À WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM. PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any consequence thereof. vii

Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown. PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. lt may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability.

ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions. viii

Safety Precautions H Definition of Precautionary Information HE Symbols The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of the product. The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety. Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions. The following notation is used. À CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, is likely to result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage. Symbol Meaning Caution General Caution Indicates non-specific general cautions, warnings, and dangers. Electrical Shock Caution Indicates possibility of electric shock under specific conditions. Prohibition Indicates non-specific general prohibitions. Mandatory Caution e0b&E General Caution Indicates non-specific general cautions, warnings, and dangers.

H Safety Precautions AUTI Do not touch the terminals while power is being supplied. Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric VAN shock. Do not allow pieces of metal, wire clippings, or fine metallic shav- ings or filings from installation to enter the product. Doing so may occasionally result in electric shock, fire, or malfunction. Do not use the product where subject to flammable or explosive gas. Otherwise, minor injury from explosion may occasionally occur. Never disassemble, modify, or repair the product or touch any of the internal parts. Minor electric shock, fire, or malfunction may occasionally occur. CAUTION - Risk of Fire and Electric Shock a) This product is UL listed as Open Type Process Control Equip- ment. lt must be mounted in an enclosure that does not allow fire to escape externally. b) More than one disconnect switch may be required to de- energize the equipment before servicing the product. c) Signal inputs are SELV, limited energy. d) Caution: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not inter- connect the outputs of different Class 2 circuits."2 If the output relays are used past their life expectancy, contact fusing or burning may occasionally occur. Always consider the application conditions and use the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy. The life expectancy of output relays varies considerably with the output load and switching conditions. *1 A SELV circuit is one separated from the power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation, that does not exceed 30 V r.m.s. and 42.4 V peak or 60 VDC. *2 A class 2 power supply is one tested and certified by UL as having the current and voltage of the secondary output restricted to specific levels.

CAUTION Tighiten the terminal screws to between 0.74 and 0.90 N-m. Loose screws may occasionally result in fire. 3 Set the parameters of the product so that they are suitable for the system being controlled. If they are not suitable, unexpected operation may occasionally result in property damage or accidents. A malfunction in the Temperature Controller may occasionally make control operations impossible or prevent alarm outputs, resulting in property damage. To maintain safety in the event of malfunction of the Temperature Controller, take appropriate safety measures, such as installing a monitoring device on a separate line. A semiconductor is used in the output section of long-life relays. If excessive noise or surge is impressed on the output terminals, a short-circuit failure is likely to occur. If the output remains shorted, fire will occur due to overheating of the heater or other cause. Take measures in the overall system to prevent excessive temper- ature increase and to prevent fire from spreading. When inserting the body of the Temperature Controller into the case, confirm that the hooks on the top and bottom are securely engaged with the case. If the body of the Temperature Controller is not inserted properly, faulty contact in the terminal section or reduced water resistance may occasionally result in fire or mal- function. *3 The tightening torque is 0.5 N:m for the E5CN-U and 0.43 to 0.58 N:m for the E5GN. The terminal torque is 0.5 to 0.6 N-m for auxiliary output 2 on the E5GN.

Precautions for Safe Use Be sure to observe the following precautions to prevent operation failure, malfunction, or adverse affects on the performance and functions of the product. Not doing so may occasionally result in unexpected events. Use the product within the specifications.

xii The product is designed for indoor use only. Do not use the product outdoors or in any of the following locations. Do not use or store the product in any of the following locations. - Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment. - Places subject to splashing liquid or oil atmosphere. - Places subject to direct sunlight. - Places subject to dust or corrosive gas (in particular, sulfide gas and ammonia gas). - Places subject to intense temperature change. - Places subject to icing and condensation. - Places subject to vibration and large shocks. Use and store the Digital Temperature Controller within the rated ambient temperature and humidity. Gang-mounting two or more temperature controllers, or mounting temperature controllers above each other may cause heat to build up inside the temperature controllers, which will shorten their service life. In such a case, use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Digital Temperature Controllers. To allow heat to escape, do not block the area around the product. Do not block the ventilation holes on the product. Be sure to wire properly with correct polarity of terminals. Use the specified size of crimp terminals for the ESCN, E5AN, or E5EN (M3.5, width of 7.2 mm or less). For open-wired connections to the E5SCN, E5SAN, or E5EN, use stranded or solid copper wires with a gauge of AWG24 to AWG14 (equal to a cross-sectional area of 0.205 to 2.081 mm2). (The stripping length is 5 to 6 mm.) Up to two wires of the same size and type or two crimp terminals can be connected to one terminal. Do not connect more than two wires or more than two crimp terminals to the same terminal. Use the specified size of crimp terminals for the E5GN (M3.0, width of 5.8 mm or less). For open-wired connections to the E5GN, use stranded or solid copper wires with a gauge of AWG24 to AWG18 (equal to a cross-sectional area of 0.205 to 0.8231 mm2). (The stripping length for screw terminals is 6 to 8 mm. The stripping length for screwless clamp terminals is 10 mm. The stripping length for auxiliary output 2 is 6 mm.) Up to two wires of the same size and type or two crimp terminals can be connected to one terminal. Do not connect more than two wires or more than two crimp terminals to the same terminal. Ferrules for screwless clamp terminals must be 0.8 to 1.4 mm in diameter and the exposed conductor must be 8 to 12 mm in length. Ferrules for auxiliary output 2 must be 0.8 to 1.4 mm in diameter and the exposed conductor must be 6 mm in length. Do not wire the terminals which are not used. To avoid inductive noise, keep the wiring for the Digital Temperature Controller's terminal block away from power cables carry high voltages or large currents. Also, do not wire power lines together with or parallel to Digital Temperature Controller wiring. Using shielded cables and using separate conduits or ducts is recommended. Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids, magnetic coils or other equipment that have an inductance component). When a noise filter is used at the power supply, first check the voltage or current, and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the temperature controller. Allow as much space as possible between the Digital Temperature Controller and devices that generate powerful high frequencies (high-frequency welders, high-frequency sewing machines, etc.) or surge. Use this product within the rated load and power supply. Make sure that the rated voltage is attained within two seconds of turning ON the power using a switch or relay contact. If the voltage is applied gradually, the power may not be reset or output malfunctions may occur.

10) Make sure that the Temperature Controller has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power

before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature display.

11) When executing self-tuning, turn ON power for the load (e.g., heater) at the same time as or before

supplying power to the Digital Temperature Controller. If power is turned ON for the Digital Temperature Controller before turning ON power for the load, self-tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved.

12) A switch or circuit breaker should be provided close to this unit. The switch or circuit breaker should be

Within easy reach of the operator, and must be marked as a disconnecting means for this unit.

13) Always turn OFF the power supply before removing the body of the E5SCN, ESAN, or E5SEN from the case,

and never touch nor apply shock to the terminals or electronic components. When inserting the interior of the product, do not allow the electronic components to touch the case. Always turn OFF the power supply before removing the terminal block from the ESGN, and never touch nor apply shock to the terminals or electronic components.

14) Do not use paint thinner or similar chemical to clean with. Use standard grade alcohol.

15) Design system (control panel, etc.) considering the 2 second of delay that the controller's output to be set

16) The output may turn OFF when shifting to certain levels. Take this into consideration when performing

17) The number of EEPROM write operations is limited. Therefore, use RAM write mode when frequently

overwriting data during communications or other operations.

18) Always touch a grounded piece of metal before touching the Digital Temperature Controller to discharge

static electricity from your body.

19) Do not remove the terminal block from the ESCN, E5SAN, or E5EN. Doing so may result in failure or

malfunction. Control outpuis that are voltage outputs are not isolated from the internal circuits. When using a grounded thermocouple, do not connect any of the control output terminals to ground. (Doing so may result in an unwanted circuit path, causing error in the measured temperature.) When replacing the body of the E5CN, E5SAN, or E5EN, check the condition of the terminals. If corroded terminals are used, contact failure in the terminals may cause the temperature inside the E5SCN, E5AN, or E5EN to increase, possibly resulting in fire. If the terminals are corroded, replace the case as well. When removing the terminal block of the E5GN to replace the Digital Temperature Controller, check the condition of the terminals. If corroded terminals are used, contact failure in the terminals may cause the temperature inside the Digital Temperature Controller to increase, possibly resulting in fire. lf the terminals are corroded, replace the terminal block as well. Use suitable tools when taking the Digital Temperature Controller apart for disposal. Sharp parts inside the Digital Temperature Controller may cause injury.

23) When applying Lloyd's standards, install the Digital Temperature Controller according to the requirements

given in Shipping Standards.

© Service Life Use the Temperature Controller within the following temperature and humidity ranges: Temperature: -10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation), Humidity: 25% to 85% If the Controller is installed inside a control board, the ambient temperature must be kept to under 55°C, including the temperature around the Controller. The service life of electronic devices like Temperature Controllers is determined not only by the num- ber of times the relay is switched but also by the service life of internal electronic components. Compo- nent service life is affected by the ambient temperature: the higher the temperature, the shorter the service life and, the lower the temperature, the longer the service life. Therefore, the service life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the Temperature Controller. xiii

When two or more Temperature Controllers are mounted horizontally close to each other or vertically next to one another, the internal temperature will increase due to heat radiated by the Temperature Controllers and the service life will decrease. In such a case, use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Temperature Controllers. When providing forced cooling, however, be careful not to cool down the terminals sections alone to avoid measurement errors. © Ambient Noise To avoid inductive noise, keep the wiring for the Digital Temperature Controller's terminal block wiring away from power cables carrying high voltages or large currents. Also, do not wire power lines together with or parallel to Digital Temperature Controller wiring. Using shielded cables and using separate con- duits or ducts is recommended. Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids, magnetic coils or other equipment that have an inductance compo- nent). When a noise filter is used at the power supply, first check the voltage or current, and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the Temperature Controller. Allow as much space as possible between the Digital Temperature Controller and devices that gener- ate powerful high frequencies (high-frequency welders, high-frequency sewing machines, etc.) or surge. © Ensuring Measurement Accuracy When extending or connecting the thermocouple lead wire, be sure to use compensating wires that match the thermocouple types. When extending or connecting the lead wire of the platinum resistance thermometer, be sure to use wires that have low resistance and keep the resistance of the three lead wires the same. Mount the Temperature Controller so that it is horizontally level. If the measurement accuracy is low, check to see if input shift has been set correctly. © Waterproofing xiv The degree of protection is as shown below. Sections without any specification on their degree of pro- tection or those with IPL10 are not waterproof. Front panel: IP66 Rear case: IP20, Terminal section: IP00 (ESCN-U: Front panel: IP50, rear case: IP20, terminals: IPOO)

Precautions for Operation

1) It takes approximately two seconds for the outputs to turn ON from after the power supply is turned ON.

Due consideration must be given to this time when incorporating Temperature Controllers into a control panel or similar device.

2) Make sure that the Temperature Controller has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power

before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature display.

3) When executing self-tuning, turn ON power for the load (e.g., heater) at the same time as or before

supplying power to the Temperature Controller. lf power is turned ON for the Temperature Controller before turning ON power for the load, self-tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved. When starting operation after the Temperature Controller has warmed up, turn OFF the power and then turn it ON again at the same time as turning ON power for the load. (Instead of turning the Temperature Controller OFF and ON again, switching from STOP mode to RUN mode can also be used.)

4) Avoid using the Controller in places near a radio, television set, or wireless installing. The Controller may

cause radio disturbance for these devices. Shipping Standards The E5CN, E5SCN-H, E5SAN, ESAN-H, ESEN, and E5SEN-H comply with Lloyd's standards. When applying the standards, the following installation and wiring requirements must be met in the application. H Application Conditions

1) Installation Location

The E5SCN, ESCN-H, ESAN, ESAN-H, ESEN, and E5EN-H comply with installation category ENV1 and ENV2 of Lloyd's standards. Therefore, they must be installed in a location equipped with air condition- ing. They must therefore be installed in a location equipped with air conditioning. They cannot be used on the bridge or decks, or in a location subject to strong vibration.

2) Wiring Conditions

Install the recommended ferrite core and wrap the line around it three turns for the applicable lines (e.g., power supply cable line and signal lines) of the models listed in the following table. (See illustra- tions.) Install the ferrite cores as close to the terminal block of the E5L IN as possible. (As a guideline, the ferrite core should be within 10 cm of the terminal block.) © Lines Requiring Ferrite Cores Model Signal and power lines provided with ferrite cores E5CN, E5CN-U, or ESCN-H | Input power supply E5EN, E5AN, E5EN-H, or Input power supply and 1/0 lines (control outputs (1 and 2), communications, E5AN-H event inputs (1 to 4), transfer output, and external power supply (Advanced Type models do not have an external power supply.) @ Recommended Ferrite Core Manufacturer Seiwa Electric Mfg. Co., Ltd. Model E04RA310190100

@ Ferrite Core Connection Examples

Auxiliary outputs (relay outputs)

Preparations for Use Be sure to thoroughly read and understand the manual provided with the product, and check the fol- lowing points. Timing Check point Details Purchasing the prod- uct Product appearance After purchase, check that the product and packaging are not dented or otherwise damaged. Damaged internal parts may prevent optimum control. Product model and speci- fications Make sure that the purchased product meets the required specifica- tions. Setting the Unit Product installation loca- tion Provide sufficient space around the product for heat dissipation. Do not block the vents on the product. Wiring Terminal wiring Do not subject the terminal screws to excessive stress (force) when tightening them. Make sure that there are no loose screws after tightening terminal screws to the specified torque of 0.74 to 0.90 N-m (see note). Be sure to confirm the polarity for each terminal before wiring the termi- nal block and connectors. Power supply inputs Wire the power supply inputs correctly. Incorrect wiring will result in damage to the internal circuits. Operating environ- ment Ambient temperature The ambient operating temperature for the product is -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing). To extend the service life of the product, install it in a location with an ambient temperature as low as possible. In locations exposed to high temperatures, if necessary, cool the products using a fan or other cooling method. Vibration and shock Check whether the standards related to shock and vibration are satis- fied at the installation environment. (Install the product in locations where the conductors will not be subject to vibration or shock.) Foreign particles Install the product in a location that is not subject to liquid or foreign particles entering the product. Note The tightening torque is 0.5 N-m for the E5CN-U and 0.43 to 0.58 N:m for the E5SGN. The terminal torque is 0.5 to 0.6 N-m for auxiliary output 2 on the E5GN.

HE Upgraded Functions The functionality of the ESCN, ESCN-U, ESAN, and E5SEN was improved starting from December 2007 production. The functionality of the E5SGN was improved starting from August 2009 production. The design of the front panel can be used to differentiate between the previous and upgraded models.

The upgraded Controllers are basically compatible with the previous Controllers. Terminal arrangements, terminal sizes, and panel mounting depth have not been changed.

Although the upgraded Controllers are compatible with the previous Controllers, terminal arrange- ments have been changed. Terminal sizes and panel mounting depth have not been changed. © E5SGN Model numbers have changed accompanying the introduction of universal input capability. The default setting of the input type parameter of the E5GN-LIT IP (models with resistance thermom- eters) has been changed from a Pt100 resistance thermometer to a K thermocouple. Make sure the setting of the input type parameter agrees with the temperature sensor that is being used. The terminal block has also been changed, which means the wiring methods and terminal arrangement are different. Other changes outlined in the following tables. Refer to relevant pages in the manual for details. Previous models Upgraded models E5CN/CN-U mn € Fan hate] (HA) Ne Vo = HUM) | (emosus ALAIN + ALMindicator was changed to SUB indicator. E5AN 5 ‘Huue), S HE =. NNN BRRE Be” FAR + Number of displays: 2 (PV and SV) + Number of displays: 3 (PV, SV, and MV) # + ALMindicator was changed to SUB indicator. xviii

Previous models Upgraded models E5EN [HA AS) Ron Vo uraferon IE Gare A0BB Cou aa |] MEUIEN + Number of displays: 2 (PV and SV) + Number of displays: 3 (PV, SV, and MV) # + ALM indicator was changed to SUB indicator. E5GN

splay Segments : 7 segments, SV: 7 segments + Character Heights PV: 7 mm, SV: 3.5 mm + Display Segments PV: 11 segments, SV: 11 segments + Character Heights PV: 7.5 mm, SV: 3.6 mm + Changes to Display Contents "AL" LED indicator eliminated, LED indicators added, and key indicator added.

• A 2-level display is set when shipped from the factory. A 3-level display is activated if parameters are initialized.

HE Terminal Arrangements Previous models Upgraded models Input terminals: 7 to 9 RS-485 communications terminals: 5 and 6 ) @ © @ © © ©

10010 240VACor 12VDC 21mA — 24 VAGDG (no pal) Le. Belay ouput Alarm output 1 (OUTS) control ouputà or input error Anal alarm t/euiput 1 tord (ALMYOUT) E5AN/EN Terminals 16 through 20 were changed. Terminals 1 through One ct Extemal power 15 were not changed. MOCTS CON! OUPULZ supply Voltage output Long-lfe relay _ External power One CT @ D on Eremai pose output supply for ES18 Two CTs CT1] Control Oupur2 FREE @ ®— @à a © _ 2 PR v06, 20m € — Control duputz + UE GA @ mA @ 5) © ) © _ O—ssaiveoa0 © © Ÿ _ ce & vonor a Ê 1 + © us ® | er x ! ! æ vonor ponor + — ‘8 5 {9 use +2 lus + r D: et $ m @ ! : _ A - eV s LB LV @ < — - (E) é — Y KE ñ ñ 8 DO NOT + + @+— « + de €) TC/Pt universal input Analog input (E) @ nu p gimp a TC/Pt universal input Analog input Previous models Upgraded models E5GN Number of terminals: 9 (1 to 9) Number of terminals: 14 (1 to 14) Input terminals: 10 to 12 RS-485 communications terminals: 7 and 8

E Body Drawout Previous models Upgraded models E5AN/EN + Using Screws + Using Hooks Previous models Upgraded models

+ Models with Screw Terminal Blocks Bezel thickness: 2 mm Depth: 99 mm Shape of slits changed

Bezel thickness: 3 mm Depth: 100 mm

+ Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Bezel thickness: 2 mm Shape of slits changed

H Terminal Block Configuration Previous models Upgraded models E5GN + Models with Screw Terminal Blocks + Models with Screw Terminal Blocks Terminals 1 to 6: M2.6 screw terminals Terminals 1 to 12: M3 screw terminals Terminals 7 to 9: M2 screw terminals + Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Terminals 1 to 12: None xxii

EH Wire Connections Previous models Upgraded models E5GN + Wire connection direction: Perpendicular to back surface + Models with Screw Terminal Blocks Wire connection direction: Horizontal from the top and bottom of back surface + Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Wire connection direction: Perpendicular to back surface

E Wiring Terminals Previous models Upgraded models + Models with Screw Terminal Blocks E5GN + Models with Screw Terminal Blocks Changed from ferrules to crimp terminals for M3 Terminals Wire gauge Ferrules screws. Tightening t : 0.5 N: Terminals 1 to 6 | AWG24 to 2.1 mm dia. 1gnrenng lorque m AWG14 max. ZLUIC E

Terminals 7 to 9 | AWG28 to 1.3 mm dia. . AWG22 max. TO) Fa nm max — D CE + Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Wires: Changed to 10 mm from 5 to 6 mm. 5to6mm 5to06mm Ferrules: Changed to 8 to 12 mm from 5 to 6 mm. Wires Ferrules Ë Terminals Screws Tightening 8 torque = En Terminals 1 t06 | M2.6 | 0.23t00.25 Nm 1. 10 mm 8 to 12mm Terminals 7 to9 | M2 0.12 to 0.14 Nm Wires Ferrules H Removing the Terminal Block Previous models Upgraded models E5GN Press firmly in on both sides of the terminal block to | Insert a tool into the tool holes (one on the top and release the lock and then pull up on the terminal block. one on the bottom) to release the hooks and pull out the terminal block. Terminal hole Note The method for removing the terminal block is the same for both screw termi- nal blocks and screwless clamp terminal blocks. xxiv

H Ratings Previous models Upgraded models Input sensor types for ther- mocouple inputs The following types of thermocouple input were added: W and PLII. Input range for E thermocouple: O0 to 600°C Input range increased for E thermocouple: —200 to 600°C Input accuracy (There are no changes in thermocouple specifications for E5CN-U.) + Thermocouple: (+0.5% PV or +1°C, which- ever is greater) +1 digit

• Platinum resistance thermometer: (+0.5%PV or +1°C, whichever is greater) +1 digit + Analog input: +0.5% FS +1 digit + Thermocouple: (+0.3% PV or +1°C, which- ever is greater) +1 digit + Platinum resistance thermometer: (+0.2% PV or +0.8°C, whichever is greater) 41 digit + Analog input: +0.2% FS +1 digit Influence of signal source resistance + Thermocoup .1°C/Q (except B, R, S), 0.2°C/Q (B, R, S) + Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.4°C/Q + Thermocouple: 0.1°C/Q (for all specifica- tions) + Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1°C/Q Current outputs Current output resolution: Approx. 2,700 Current output resolution: Approx. 10,000 Auxiliary outputs E5CN/E5CN-U/E5GN

(alarm outputs) 250 VAC, 1 A 250 VAC, 3 A 250 VAC, 2 A Input sampling cycle E5GN E5GN 500 ms 250 ms HE Characteristics Previous models Upgraded models Model numbers for the E5CN Models with 24-VAC/VDC power supply specifications Example: E5SCN-R2MT-500 (24 VAC/VDC) A “D” was added to the model numbers for models with 24-VAC/VDC power supply specifications. Example: E5CN-R2MTD-500 (24 VAC/VDC) Model numbers for the E5AN/EN Example: E5AN-R3MT-500 (100 to 240 VAC) Example: E5AN-R3MT-500 (24 VAC/VDC) “-N’ was added to all model numbers A “D” was added to the model numbers for models with 24-VAC/VDC power supply specifications. Example: + E5AN-R3MT-500-N (100 to 240 VAC) + E5AN-R3MTD-500-N (24 VAC/VDC) Model numbers for the E5GN Examples: E5GN-RTC (100 to 240 VAC) E5GN-RP (100 to 240 VAC) 24-VAC/DC Specification Example: E5SGN-RTC (24 VAC/DC) + Model numbers have changed accompa- nying the introduction of universal input capability. + A“D” was added to the model numbers for models with 24-VAC/VDC power supply specifications. Example: E5GN-RT (100 to 240 VAC) E5GN-RTD (24 VAC/VDC) Front panel PV status display and SV status display PF Key added (E5AN/EN only). PV/SP display selection for three-level dis- play (E5AN/EN only) # XXV

Previous models Upgraded models Inputs —— Square root extraction (for models with ana- log inputs) Outputs — Control output ON/OFF count alarm —— MV change rate limiter Controls — 40% AT —— Automatic cooling coefficient adjustment for heating/cooling control Alarms —— PV rate of change alarm —— OC alarm (only for models with heater burn- out detection) Other —— Logic operations Inverting direct/reverse operation using event inputs or communications commands XXvi

A 2-level display is set when shipped from the factory. A 3-level display is activated if parameters are initialized.

EH Communications Characteristics Previous models Upgraded models Communications access size Double word access only Word access and double word access CompoWay/F services Composite Read from Variable Area and Com- posite Write to Variable Area Communications buffer size 40 bytes 217 bytes Baud rate

Setup Tool Cable Communications: 38.4k (fixed) External communica- tions RS-485/RS-232C external communications and Setup Tool communications cannot be used at the same time. RS-485/RS-232C external communications and Setup Tool communications can be used at the same time. H Other Upgrades Previous models Upgraded models Mounting Bracket (ESAN/EN only) Mounting Bracket for previous models Modified section Mounting Bracket for upgraded models Note The Mounting Bracket for the previous models cannot be used for upgraded models. Packing case (E5SAN/EN only) + Previous ID code: N5

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER _ TEMP. (Ro) MULTI-RANGE 7 VOLTS 00-240 VAC LOT Noires QVIT OMRON Corporation MADE IN CHINA Terminal Cover (sold separately) for E5CN + E53-COV17 (for E5CN only) Note The Terminal Cover for the previous models cannot be used for improved models. XXvii

Previous models Upgraded models Terminal Cover (sold separately) for E5AN/EN + E53-COV11 + E53-COV16 Note The Terminal Cover for the previous models cannot be used for improved models. Front Panel Labels (E5GN) + Display area dimensions: 36.1 x 9.8 mm (WxH) omRon E5GN + The design has been changed. + Added characters: MANU, SUB1, SUB2, and

Previous models Upgraded models Body Labels (E5GN)

2. Model number: Refer to the model num-

3. Lot No.: Year of manufacture (last digit of

ear ss) D23066 1,2: Manufacture day: 01 to 31 3: Manufacture month: 1 to 9, X, Y, and Z (January to December) 4: Last digit of year. 5, 6: Manufacturing factory code Top of Controller Bottom of Controller

1. Body labels: AI labels combined into one la-

2. Model number: Refer to the model number

3. Lot No.: Year of manufacture (last two digits

D2S%E6D 1,2: Manufacture day: 01 to 31 3: Manufacture month: 1 to 9, X, Y, and Z (Janu- ary to December) 4, 5: Year of manufacture (last two digits of year) 6, 7: Manufacturing factory code Top of Controller Box Labels (E5GN) No ID number TYPE EGGN-RTC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER x rrance VOLTS 100-240 VAC LOT No.xxxx OYT.1 OMRON Corporat ion MADE IN CHINA “N6” has been added to identify the new mod- els. TYPE_EGGN-RT

Conventions Used in This Manual Model Notation The ESCN- IT, ESCN-CIU TU, ESAN-CTU IT, ESEN-CIT, and ESGN-CT TT are given as the E5CN, E5CN-U, E5SAN, E5SEN, and E5GN when they share functionality. The following notation is used when specifying differences in functionality. Notation Options ESCIN2IITIB Two event inputs ESCIN-CITT03 RS-485 communications E5SOIN-CIUH One of HB, HS, and heater overcurrent detection E5SON-CIUHH Two of HB, HS, and heater overcurrent detection (See note 1.) E5CIN-CIQ Control output 2 (voltage output) (See note 1.) ESLIN-CTCIP External power supply to ES1B (See note 1.) ESLIN-ITIT 01 RS-232C communications (See note 2.) ESLINTCIF Transfer output (See note 3.) Note: (1) Excluding the E5GN. (2) Excluding the E5SCN. (3) The E5AN and E5EN only. Meanings of Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in parameter names, figures and in text explanations. These abbreviations mean the following: Symbol Term pv Process value SP Set point sv Set value AT Auto-tuning ST Self-tuning HB Heater burnout HS Heater short (See note 1.) OC Heater overcurrent LBA Loop burnout alarm EU Engineering unit (See note 2.) Note: (1) À heater short indicates that the heater remains ON even when the control output from the Tempera- ture Controller is OFF because the SSR has failed or for any other reason. (2) “EU” stands for Engineering Unit. EU is used as the minimum unit for engineering units such as °C, m, and g. The size of EU varies according to the input type. For example, when the input temperature setting range is -200 to +1300°C, 1 EU is 1°C, and when the input temperature setting range is -20.0 to +500.0°C, 1 EU is 0.1°C. For analog inputs, the size of EU varies according to the decimal point position of the scaling setting, and 1 EU becomes the minimum scaling unit. XXX

How to Read Display Symbols The following tables show the correspondence between the symbols displayed on the displays and alphabet characters. The default is for 11-segment displays.

About this Manual: This manual describes the ESCN/CN-U/AN/EN Digital Temperature Controllers and includes the sec- tions described below. Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to set up or operate an E5SCN/CN-U/AN/EN Digital Temperature Controller. -Overview

Section 1 introduces the features, components, and main specifications of the E5CN/CN-U/AN/EN/

GN Digital Temperature Controllers. eSetup

Section 2 describes the work required to prepare the E5CN/CN-U/AN/EN/GN Digital Temperature

Controllers for operation, including installation and wiring. -Basic Operations

Section 3 describes the basic operation of the E5SCN/CN-U/AN/EN/GN Digital Temperature Control-

lers, including key operations to set parameters and descriptions of display elements based on specific control examples.

Section 5 describes the individual parameters used to setup, control, and monitor operation.

*Operations for Applications

Section 4 describes scaling, the SP ramp function, and other special functions that can be used to

make the most of the functionality of the ESCN/CN-U/AN/EN/GN Digital Temperature Controllers.

Section 5 describes the individual parameters used to setup, control, and monitor operation.

Section 6 describes how the user can calibrate the E5SCN/CN-U/AN/EN/GN Digital Temperature Con-

trollers. ° Appendix The Appendix provides information for easy reference, including lists of parameters and settings. \ WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per- sonal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given. XXXV

Names of Parts Section 1-1 1-1 Names of Parts 1-1-1 Front Panel E5CN/CN-U The front panel is the same for the E5CN and E5CN-U. Temperature unit ‘OMRON \ Operation indicators L = PV] No. { display TT No2 display HOOOE 7 \s Mode Key Down Key

Temperature | fs = Tr £ ( Operation \ SUB2 indicators TT HA Operation indicators

( Mode Key ( Down Z (

1-1-2 Explanation of Indicators No. 1 Display No. 2 Display No. 3 Display (ESAN/EN Only) Operation Indicators 1,2,3.. Temperature Unit Displays the process value or parameter name. Lights for approximately one second during startup. Displays the set point, parameter operation read value, or the variable input value. Lights for approximately one second during startup. The set point will flash during autotuning. Displays MV, soak time remaining, or multi SP. Lights for approximately one second during startup. A 2-level display is set when shipped from the factory. A 3-level display is activated if parameters are initialized.

Lights when the function set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment param- eter is ON. SUB2 (Sub 2) Lights when the function set for the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment param- eter is ON. SUB3 (Sub 3) (E5AN/EN Oniy) Lights when the function set for the Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment param- eter is ON.

2. HA (Heater Burnout, Heater Short Alarm, Heater Overcurrent Detection

Output Display) Lights when a heater burnout, heater short alarm, or heater overcurrent occurs.

8. OUT1 (Control Output 1)

Lights when the control output function assigned to control output 1 turns ON. For a current output, however, OFF for a 0% output only. OUT2 (Control Output 2) (Excluding the E5GN) Lights when the control output function assigned to control output 2 turns ON. For a current output, however, OFF for a 0% output only.

Lights when operation is stopped. During operation, this indicator lights when operation is stopped by an event or by key input using the RUN/STOP function.

5. CMW (Communications Writing)

Lights when communications writing is enabled and is not lit when it is dis- abled.

6. MANU (Manual Mode)

Lights when settings change protect is ON (i.e., when the A] and F1 Keys are disabled by protected status.) The temperature unit is displayed when parameters are set to display a tem- perature. The display is determined by the currently set value of the Tempera- ture Unit parameter. °£ indicates °C and °F indicates °F. This indicator flashes during ST operation. lt is OFF on models with linear inputs.

1-1-3 Using the Keys PF (Function (Auto/ Manual)) Key (ESAN/EN Only) [OI Key F9 Key Æ Key M1 Key [O] + El Keys [OI += Keys [©] + M Keys This section describes the basic functions of the front panel keys. This is a function key. When it is pressed for at least 1 second, the function set in the PF Setting parameter will operate. Example: When A-M (auto/manual) is selected in the PF Setting parameter (initial value: A-M), the key operates as an auto/manual switch, switching between Auto Mode and Manual Mode. If the key is pressed for more than 1 second (regardiess of key release timing), the mode will switch. Press this key to move between setting levels. The setting level is selected in the following order: operation level: adjustment level, initial setting level, com- munications setting level. Press this key to change parameters within a setting level. The parameters can be reversed by holding down the key (moving one per second in reverse order). Each press of this key increments the value displayed on the No. 2 display or advances the setting. Holding the key down speeds up the incrementation. Each press of this key decrements values displayed on the No. 2 display or reverses the setting. Holding the key down speeds up the incrementation. Press these keys to change to the protect level. For details on operations involving holding these keys down simultaneously, refer to 1-3 Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations. For details on the protect level, refer to

SECTION 5 Parameters.

To restrict set value changes (in order to prevent accidental or incorrect oper- ations), these key operations require simultaneously pressing the [0] key along with =] or F1 key. This applies only to the parameter for the password to move to protect level. (Refer to page 162.)

Note Functions can be assigned individually for each output by changing the set values for the Control Output 1 Assignment, the Control Output 2 Assignment, the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment, and the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameters in the advanced function setting level.

1/0 Configuration and Main Functions

Control Control output 0 ! section (heating) + at

Note Control output 1 Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary output 1 ORIRI Functions can be assigned individually for each output by changing the set values for the Control Output 1 Assignment, the Auxiliary Output 1 Assign- ment, and the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameters in the advanced function setting level.

1/0 Configuration and Main Functions

M: Option Unit can be mounted.

5. Power Supply Voltage

-500: With terminal cover ESCN-IIU

Blank: None Q: Control output 2 (voltage for driv- ing SSR) P: Power supply for sensor

Blank: None H: Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection (CT1) HH: Heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection (CT2) B: Two event inputs 03: RS-485 communications H03: Heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection (CT1) + RS-485 communica- tions HB: Heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection (CT1) + Two event inputs HHO3: Heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection (CT2) + RS-485 communications

N2: Applicable only to models released after January 2008 Not all combinations of function 1 and function 2 specifications are possible for Option Units (E53-LILIL1L 1). *1 Always connect an AC load to a long-life relay output. The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected because a triac is used for switching the circuit. For details, check the conditions in Ratings. *2 Auxiliary outputs are contact outputs that can be used to output alarms or resulis of logic operations.

1/0 Configuration and Main Functions

Functions can be assigned individually to each output by changing the set val- ues for the Control Output 1 Assignment, Control Output 2 Assignment, Auxil- iary Output 1 Assignment, Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment, and Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameters in the advanced function setting level.

1/0 Configuration and Main Functions

or External Power Supply for ES1B Blank: None Q: Control output 2 (voltage output for driving SSR) Y: Long-life relay output (hybrid) H: Heater burnout/Heater short/Heater overcurrent detection (CT1) HH: Heater burnout/Heater short/Heater overcurrent detection (CT2) P: Power supply for sensor

M: Option Unit can be mounted.

T: Universal thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer input L: Analog current/voltage input

6. Power Supply Voltage

500: With terminal cover

N: Available only to models released after January

1/0 Configuration and Main Functions Section 1-2 E5GN

Event inputs | 2 channels l | PE Auxiliary output 2]

Communications function Note Functions can be assigned individually for each output by changing the set values for the Control Output 1 Assignment, the Auxiliary Output 1 Assign- ment, and the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameters in the advanced function setting level.

Blank: None 01: RS-232C communications 03: RS-485 communications B: Two event inputs H: Heater burnout/Heater short/Heater overcurrent detection (CT1)

5. Power Supply Voltage

Blank: Models with Screw Terminal Blocks C: Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks

Blank: Black W!: Silver

Blank: None FLK: CompoWay/F communications Silver is available by special order only. 1-2-2 Main Functions Input Sensor Types

This section introduces the main EBCN/CN-U/AN/EN/GN functions. For details on particular functions and how to use them, refer to SECTION 3 Basic Operation and following sections. + The following input sensors can be connected for temperature input (Le., E5_N-LIOICIOIT): Thermocouple: K, J,T, E, L, U, N,R,S, B, W, PLII Infrared temperature sensor: ES1B 10 to 70°C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165°C, 140 to 260°C Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100, JPt100 Analog input: © to 50 mV

1/0 Configuration and Main Functions Section 1-2 Control Outputs Note Alarms Control Adjustment Event Inputs Heater Burnout, HS Alarm, and Heater Overcurrent + Inputs with the following specifications can be connected for analog input (.e., E5_N-CITICIOIL): Current input: 4 to 20 mA DC, 0 to 20 mA DC Voltage input: 1 to 5 VDC, O to 5 V DC, 0 to 10 V DC + A control output can be a relay, voltage (for driving SSR), or current out- put, depending on the model. + Long-life relay outputs (see note) use semiconductors for switching when closing and opening the circuit, thereby reducing chattering and arcing and improving durability. However, if high levels of noise or surge are imposed between the output terminals, short-circuit faults may occasion- ally occur. If the output becomes permanenily shorted, there is the danger of fire due to overheating of the heater. Design safety into the system, including measures to prevent excessive temperature rise and spreading of fire. Take countermeasures such as installing a surge absorber. As an additional safety measure, provide error detection in the control loop. (Use the Loop Burnout Alarm (LBA) and HS alarm that are provided for the ESCIN.) Long-lfe Varistor relay output —p# — X Varistor © Select a surge absorber that satisfies the following conditions. Voltage used Varistor voltage Surge resistance 100 to 120 VAC 240 to 270 V 1,000 A min. 200 to 240 VAC 440 to 470 V + Always connect an AC load to a long-life relay output (see note). The out- put will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected. Long-life relay outputs are not supported for the ESGN. + Set the alarm type and alarm value or the alarm value upper and lower limits. + If necessary, a more comprehensive alarm function can be achieved by setting a standby sequence, alarm hysteresis, auxiliary output close in alarm/open in alarm, alarm latch, alarm ON delay, and alarm OFF delay. + Ifthe Input Error Output parameter is set to ON, the output assigned to alarm 1 function will turn ON when an input error occurs. + Optimum PID constants can be set easily by performing AT (auto-tuning) or ST (self-tuning). + With the E53-CNCIBLIN2 for the E5CN or the ESAN/EN-CIML]-500-N with the E53-AKB for the E5SAN/EN, the following functions can be executed using event inputs: switching set points (multi-SP, 4 points max.), switch- ing RUN/STOP, switching between automatic and manual operation, start- ing/resetting the program, inverting direct/reverse operation, 100% AT execute/cancel, 40% AT execute/cancel, setting change enable/disable, and canceling the alarm latch. + With the E53-CNCIHEIN2 or E53-CNLIHHEIN2 for the ESCN, or the E5AN/EN-CIUHU1-500-N or E5SAN/EN-UITIHHIU1-500-N, the heater burnout detection function, HS alarm function, and heater overcurrent detection function can be used.

1/0 Configuration and Main Functions Section 1-2 Communications Functions Note External Power Supply for ES1B Note Transfer Output

+ Communications functions utilizing CompoWay/F (See note 1.), SYSWAY (See note 2.), or Modbus (See note 3.) can be used. RS-485 Interface Use the E53-CNLI03N2 for the E5CN or the E53-ENO3 for the E5AN/ EN. RS-232C Interface Use the E53-ENO1 for the ESAN/EN. (1) CompoWay/F is an integrated general-purpose serial communications protocol developed by OMRON. It uses commands compliant with the well-established FINS, together with a consistent frame format on OMRON Programmable Controllers to facilitate communications be- tween personal computers and components. (2) SYSWAY communications do not support alarm 3. (3) Modbus is a communications control method conforming to the RTU Mode of Modbus Protocol. Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric. (4) The E5CN and E5SCN-U do not support the RS-232C interface. The ESAN- IPCI-N or EGEN- IPC I-N with the E53-CNL IPC IN2 can be used as the power supply for ES1B Infrared Temperature Sensors. The E5GN does not provide a power supply for an ES1B Infrared Tempera- ture Sensor. A transfer output for 4 to 20 mA can be used with the ESAN/E5SEN- IL IF. For E5LIN-C! 11] models (models without “F” in the model number), the cur- rent output can be used as a simple transfer output.

Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations Section 1-3 1-3 Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations Parameters are divided into groups, each called a level. Each of the set val- ues (setting items) in these levels is called a parameter. The parameters on the ESCN/CN-U/AN/EN/GN are divided into the following 9 levels. When the power is turned ON, all of the display lights for approximately one second.

Power ON | Start in manual mode. / Start in automatic mode. Press the [OI Key or the PF Key for at least 1 $. f (See note 4.) Press the Operation Adjustment OH £a Level Level Press the Keys for at 4 il least 1 s. Press the Keys for at C least3s. Key less than 1 s. ) Ba Et will iash atertst À (Best s) 9 Second) Manual este s) mode Monitor/Setting Item Level

1st second) (See note 4) Press the [0] Key for at Press the PF Key least 3 s. (Displèy will flash Manual for atleast 1 s, (See after 1st second.) Control Level Presse note 1.) ©) Key for Protect Level at least 1 s. Note The time taken to move to the protect level can be adjusted by chang- ing the "Move to pro- tect level time" setting. Key or less Inan 1 s (Refer to page 228.) Control stops. Input password while AMF is displayed. (Set value -169) Press the [O] Key for at least 1 s. Advanced Function Setting Level Input password. C2 conti in progress C2 controi stopped Caïibration Level 2) (M Not displayed for some models Love change Note (1) You can return to the operation level by executing a software reset. (2) You cannot move to other levels by operating the keys on the front panel from the calibration level. You must turn OFF the power supply. (3) From the manual control level, key operations can be used to move to the operation level only. Level Control in progress | Control stopped Protect level Can be set. Operation level Can be set. — Adjustment level Can be set. — Manual control level Can be set. — Monitor/setting item level Can be set. — Initial setting level — Can be set.

Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations Section 1-3 Protect Level Operation Level Adjustment Level Monitor/Setting Item Level Manual Control Level

Level Control in progress | Control stopped Advanced function setting level Can be set. Calibration level — Can be set. Communications setting level — Can be set. Of these levels, the initial setting level, communications setting level, advanced function setting level, and calibration level can be used only when control is stopped. Control outputs are stopped when any of these four levels is selected. (4) When the PF Setting is set to A-M in models with a PF Key (E5AN/EN) (5) When the PF Setting is set to PFDP in models with a PF Key (E5AN/EN) + To switch to the protect level from the operation level, the adjustment level, or the monitor/setting item level, simultaneously hold down the [0] and © Keys for at least 3 seconds. (See note.) This level is for preventing unwanted or accidental modification of parameters. Protected levels will not be displayed, and so the parameters in that level cannot be modified. Note The key pressing time can be changed in Move to Protect Level pa- rameter (advanced function setting level). The operation level is displayed when the power is turned ON. You can move to the protect level, initial setting level, or adjustment level from this level. Normally, select this level during operation. While operation is in progress, items such as the PV and manipulated variable (MV) can be monitored, and the set points, alarm values, and alarm upper and lower limits can be monitored and changed. To move to the adjustment level, press th Key once (for less than 1 s). This level is for entering set values and offset values for control. In addi- tion to AT (auto-tuning), communications write enable/disable switching, hysteresis settings, multi-SP settings, and input offset parameters, it includes HB alarm, HS alarm, OC alarm, and PID constants. From the adjustment level, it is possible to move to the top parameter of the initial setting level, protect level, or operation level. To switch to the monitor/setting item level, press the PF Key from the operation level or adjustment level. The contents set for monitor/setting items 1 to 5 can be displayed. You can move from the monitor/setting item level to the operation level or initial setting level. (This level is supported by the E5AN and E5EN only.) When the Key is pressed for at least 3 seconds from the operation level's auto/manual switching display, the manual control level will be dis- played. (The MANU indicator will light.) When the PF Setting is set to A-M (auto/manual) and the PF Key is pressed for more than one second from the operation level or adjustment level, the manual control level will be displayed (E5AN and E5EN only.) This is the level for changing the MV in manual mode. To return to the operation level, press the Key for at least one second. lt is also possible to return to the operation level by pressing the PF Key for more than one second when the PF Setting is set to A-M.

Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations Section 1-3 Initial Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level Communications Setting Level Calibration Level + To move to the initial setting level from the operation level or the adjust- ment level, press the [O] Key for at least 3 seconds. The PV display flashes after one second. This level is for specifying the input type and selecting the control method, control period, setting direct/reverse opera- tion, setting the alarm types, etc. You can move to the advanced function setting level or communications setting level from this level. To return to the operation level, press the Key for at least one second. To move to the communications setting level, press the [0] Key for less than one sec- ond. (When moving from the initial setting level to the operation level, all the indicators will light.) Note Pressing the [0] Key for at least 8 seconds in the operation level's auto/manual switching display will move to the manual control level, and not the initial setting level. + To move to the advanced function setting level, set the Initial Setting/Com- munications Protect parameter in the protect level to 0 and then, in the ini- tial setting level, input the password (—-169). + From the advanced function setting level, it is possible to move to the cali- bration level or to the initial setting level. + This level is for setting the automatic display return time and standby sequence, and it is the level for moving to the user calibration and other functions. + To move to the communications setting level from the initial setting level, press the Key once (for less than 1 s). When using the communica- tions function, set the communications conditions in this level. Communi- cating with a personal computer (host computer) allows set points to be read and written, and manipulated variables (MV) to be monitored. + To move to the calibration level, input the password (1201) from the advanced function setting level. The calibration level is for offsetting error in the input circuit. + You cannot move to other levels from the calibration level by operating the keys on the front panel. To cancel this level, turn the power OFF then back ON again. 1-3-1 Selecting Parameters + Within each level, the parameter is changed in order (or in reverse order) each time the Le] Key is pressed. (In the calibration level, however, param- eters cannot be changed in reverse order.) For details, refer to SECTION 5 Parameters.

Communications Function

1 Moves in order after F2 key While the Eal key is being held À ! is pressed (if key is down, the parameter will move « 1 released within 1 s). each second in reverse order. ! Parameter 1

If you press the Key at the final parameter, the display returns to the top parameter for the current level. To change parameter settings, specify the setting using the A] or F1 Key, and either leave the setting for at least two seconds or press the Fe Key. This saves the setting. When another level is selected after a setting has been changed, the con- tenits of the parameter prior to the change is saved. When you turn the power OFF, you must first save the settings (by press- ing the F2 Key). The settings are sometimes not changed by merely pressing the [A] or F1 Keys. Communications Function The E5CN/AN/EN/GN are provided with a communications function that enables parameters to be checked and set from a host computer. If the com- munications function is required, use the E53-CNLI0O3N2 with the ESCN, or the E53-ENO0S or E53-ENO1 with the ESAN/EN/GN. For details on the com- munications function, see the separate Communications Manual Basic Type. Use the following procedure to move to the communications setting level. 1,23... 1. Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation lev- el to the initial setting level. Press the [O] Key for less than one second to move from the initial setting level to the communications setting level. Select the parameters as shown below by pressing the €] Key. Press the [] or F1 Key to change the parameter setting.

Communications Function

Note Setting Communications Data PGEL] Protocol Setting L!-Nal Communications Unit No.

6] 5P5) Communications Baud Rate LEN Communications Data Length = a] (See note)

Communications Stop Bits = à] (Seenote) PRE] Communications Parity Ê] GgwE] Send Data Wait Time The Protocol Setting parameter is displayed only when CompoWay/F commu- nications are being used. Match the communications specifications of the E5CN/AN/EN/GN and the host computer. If a 1:N connection is being used, ensure that the communica- tions specifications for all devices in the system (except the communications Unit No.) are the same. Parameter name Symbol Setting (monitor) value Selection symbols Default Unit Protocol Setting PSEL CompoWay/F (SYSWAY), | LHF, Mad CompoWay/F | None Modbus (SYSWAY) Communications U-Na 0 to 99 1 None Unit No. Communications bPS 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 192, Le,84,48,96, 190,384 [96 kbps Baud Rate 38.4, 57.6 676 Communications LEN 7,8 7 Bits Data Length Communications SbcE 1,2 2 Bits Stop Bits Communications PREY None, Even, Odd NaNE, EVEN, add Even None Parity Send Data Wait SdWE 0 to 99 20 ms Time

Insulation Block Diagrams Section 1-5 1-5 Insulation Block Diagrams The insulation block diagrams for the E5SCN, E5SAN, E5EN, and E5GN are pro- vided in this section. E5CN Input, CT input, Q outputs (outputs 1 and 2) Communications and events External power supply Power C output supply R output Y output Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 | : Reinforced insulation : Functional insulation E5CN-U Input and Q output (output 1) C output Power supply R output Y output Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 | : Reinforced insulation : Functional insulation E5AN/EN Input, CT input, and Q output (output 1) Communications and events External power supply and Q output (output 2) C output and transfer output Power supply R output Y output Auxiliary output 1 Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary output 3 | : Reinforced insulation : Functional insulation E5GN Input, CT input, Q output (output 1) Communications and events Power C output supply R output Auxiliary output 1 Auxiliary output 2 | : Reinforced insulation : Functional insulation

• Preparations This section describes the work required to prepare the ESCN, ESAN, and ESEN Digital Temperature Controllers for operation, including installation and wiring. 2-1 Installation : 22 2-1-1 Dimensions 22 2-1-2 Panel Cutout p. 24
• 2-1-3 Mounting p. 25
• 2-1-4 Removing the Temperature Controller from the Case . 28 2-2 Wiring Terminals p. 31
• 2-2-1 Terminal Arrangement p. 31
• 2-2-2 Precautions when Wiring 2-2-3 Wiring 35 2-3 Using the Support Software Port. 45 p. 33

Installation Section 2-1 E5GN + Models with Screw Terminal Blocks

E5AN Individual Mounting Group Mounting (86 x number of Units — 3.5) +19 E5EN Individual Mounting Group Mounting (48 x number of Units — 2.5) *1° l 1

E5GN Individual Mounting Group Mounting {48 x number of units — 2.5)*!-° 40 min. 2-1-3 Mounting ESCN/CN-U E53-COV17 Terminal Cover

+ Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers. + The recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm for the E5CN, E5CN-U, and E5GN, and 1 to 8 mm for E5SAN and E5EN. + Units must not be closely mounted vertically. (Observe the recommended mounting space limits.) + When group mounting several Controllers, ensure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the ambient operating temperature listed in the specifications. Adapter DOSIIT (A DLLLIT) Waterproof packing Panel

For the Wiring Socket for the ESCN-U, order the P2CF-11 or P3GA-11 sepa- rately. Mounting to the Panel

For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on the Controller. Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers. Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the waterproofing function. There is no waterproof packing included with the E5SCN-U. Insert the ESCN/E5CN-U into the mounting hole in the panel. Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel, and temporarily fasten the ESCN/E5CN-U. Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter. Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N-m.

Terminal Cover (E53-COV16) Waterproof 1,2,3.. Mounting the Terminal Cover For the E5SCN, make sure that the “UP” mark is facing up, and then attach the E53-COV17 Terminal Cover to the holes on the top and bottom of the Temper- ature Controller. Mounting Mounting Bracket Panel Bracket Terminal Cover packing (E53-COV16) TT Waterproof packing E5AN E5EN Mounting to the Panel

1. For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on the

Controller. Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers. Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the waterproofing function.

2. Insert the ESAN/ESEN into the square mounting hole in the panel (thick-

ness: 1 to 8 mm). Attach the Mounting Brackets provided with the product to the mounting grooves on the top and bottom surfaces of the rear case.

3. Use a ratchet to alternately tighten the screws on the top and bottom

Mounting Brackets little by little to maintain balance, until the ratchet turns freely. Mounting the Terminal Cover Slightly bend the E53-COV16 Terminal Cover to attach it to the terminal block as shown in the following diagram. The Terminal Cover cannot be attached in the opposite direction.

E5GN 1,2,3.. Slightiy bend the E53-COV16 Terminal Cover in the direction shown by the arrows to aïtach it to the terminal block. Enlarged Illustration of Terminal Section Mounting to the Panel

For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on the Controller. Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers. Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the water- proofing function. Insert the E5SGN into the mounting hole in the panel. Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel, and temporarily fasten the E5SGN. Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter. Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance.Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N-m. Panel Waterproof packing E5GN

Installation Section 2-1 2-1-4 Removing the Temperature Controller from the Case The Temperature Controller can be removed from the case to perform mainte- nance without removing the terminal leads. This is possible for only the E5SCN, E5SAN, and E5EN, and not for the E5SCN-U or E5GN. Check the specifications of the case and Temperature Controller before removing the Temperature Controller from the case. E5CN Tool insertion hole Flat-blade screwdriver Unit: mm) 1,2,3... 1. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the two tool insertion holes (one on the top and one on the bottom) to release the hooks.

2. Insert the flat-blade screwdriver in the gap between the front panel and

rear case, and pull out the front panel slighily. Hold the top and bottom of the front panel and carefully pull it out toward you, without applying unnec- essary force.

8. Wheninserting the body of the Temperature Controller into the case, make

sure the PCBs are parallel to each other, make sure that the sealing rubber is in place, and press the E5CN toward the rear case into position. While pushing the E5CN into place, push down on the hooks on the top and bot- tom surfaces of the rear case so that the hooks are securely locked in place. Be sure that electronic components do not come into contact with the case. | f Î Make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other, and then press the body of the Temperature Controller toward the rear case into position Bottom View of the ESCN

Installation Section 2-1 ESAN/EN Tool insertion hole Tool insertion hole Flat-blade screwdriver (Unit: mm) ] 50

1. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the two tool insertion holes (one on the

top and one on the bottom) to release the hooks.

2. Insert the flat-blade screwdriver in the gap between the front panel and

rear case (two on the top and two on the bottom), and use it to pry and pull out the front panel slightly. Then, pull out on the front panel gripping both sides. Be sure not to impose excessive force on the panel. Gap between the Front Panel and Rear Case Four gaps, two on the top and two on the bottom Gap between the Front Panel and Rear Case Four gaps, two on the top and two on the bottom MIND OÙ) dl: Top View of ESAN Top View of ESEN

Installation Section 2-1

8. Wheninserting the body of the Temperature Controller into the case, make

sure the PCBs are parallel to each other, make sure that the sealing rubber is in place, and press the ESAN/EN toward the rear case until it snaps into position. While pressing the ESAN/EN into place, press down on the hooks on the top and bottom surfaces of the rear case so that the hooks securely lock in place. Make sure that electronic components do not come into con- tact with the case. Make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other, and then press the body of the Temperature Controller toward the rear case until it snaps into position. Make sure the PCES are parallel to each other, and then press the body of the Temperature Controller toward the rear case until it snaps into position. Bottom View of the ESAN Removing the Terminal The terminal block can be removed from the E5GN. It is not possible for the Block E5CN, E5AN, E5EN, and E5CN-U. E5GN The body of the Controller can be replaced by removing the terminal block from the E5GN. 1,2,3... 1. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the tool holes (one on the top and one on the bottom) to release the hooks. Do not apply excessive force. Terminal hole Flat-blade screwdriver (Unit: mm) 20 min. Note The method for removing the terminal block is the same for both screw termi- nal blocks and screwless clamp terminal blocks.

Wiring Terminals Section 2-2 Do not connect a different type of terminal block to a Controller. For example, do not replace a screw terminal block with a screwless clamp terminal block. The temperature indication accuracy will decrease. 2-2 Wiring Terminals Confirm the location of the terminals (terminals 1 to 15 for the E5CN, 1 to 30 for the E5AN and E5EN, and terminals 1 to 14 for the E5GN) using the prod- uct labels and case markings. 2-2-1 Terminal Arrangement E5CN Controllers TS The ESCIN- TI ITL Ii set for a K inermocouple {input ype of 5) by defaut. a diference sensor is OA SA este ac) used, an input error (S.£RF) wi oceur. Check the 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) seting of the input type parameter. Voltage output (for driving SR} 12 VDC, 21 mA Current output Auilary aupus (ray opus) 00 20 mA DC 250 VAC, 34 4 io 20 ma DC (esistve load) | Load: 600 12 max ) - Auxilary outputs (relay outputs) Control ouputi N (Voltage output (or drving SSR) D NOT} por > (12 vc,21ma J USE | ® e, 1 @ ® © pre Fhesier bumout alarm, heater shot alarm, 1 k heater overcurrent alarm, or input error is DONOT ee © ® ent to the output to which the alarm 1 rep +100 t 240 VAC function is assigned Analog input al input +24 VACIVDC (no polarity) Option Units 53 CNHHON2 chHan2 ss cuoun2 Es3 cuean2 s3.cueun2 caposn2 Communkanrs Eventinputs Communications Event ngut and Extemal Power ommunicaions (RS -485) (RS-488) and CT2 andCT (RS-485) and Extemai Poner Sup Supoh and CT and Exemal Power Sup Conroi Output 2 | res | m® | o nor de & Br. use © use —@ Since the voltage output (control output) is not electrically insulated from the internal wiring, one or other of the control output terminals must be left unearthed when using an earthed thermocouple thermometer. (Con- nection makes measurements unreliable due to sneak currents.) To comply with EMC standards, the length of the cable connecting the analog input or universal TC/Pt input sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable is longer than 30 m, the EMC standards will not be satisfied.

{resistive load) ! ; BY: j* \ | — @ # le Auxiliary output 1 Lov Gi jen uen] @ sl; oonor FR heatE Burnout alarm, Rester Short alarm, AuTETY QUIPUE … = — + heater overcurrent alarm, or input error is L TC/Ptuniversal input Analog input sent to the output to which the alarm 1 Re, 15 | function is assigned. 250 VAC, 3A fresise load) Since the voltage output (control output) is not electrically insulated from the internal wiring, one or other of the control output terminals must be left unearthed when using an earthed thermocouple thermometer. (Con- nection makes measurements unreliable due to sneak currents.) To comply with EMC standards, the length of the cable connecting the analog input or universal TC/Pt input sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable is longer than 30 m, the EMC standards will not be satisfied.

Voltage output RS-232C communications |. L n 00 nor Eu + Cor dving SSR) gonor 12 VC. 21 mA GT input ae FETE Current output iiversal TC/Pt input rent ouput Universal TG/Pt input 1 28 ma BE Event nput ET eV? donor {_ Load: 500 € max. ) l use Z + D © © © @ «@ 2] &@ @) Go) qn KE nn np À À A À PS Rey oupus. O) @)] ©) O) O) © | Lé— 330 VAC 2 a L 1 EE Audi LE Trou ponerf L convoi J L auiiary] ouput2 supply #— outputi — output 1 100 to 240 VAC 222 VAGNOC (no polarty) A heater bumout alarm, heater short alarm, heater overcurrent alarm, or input error is sent to the output ta which the alarm 1 function is assigned. Auxiliary output 2 connection screws Lane] Since the voltage output (control output) is not electrically insulated from the internal wiring, one or other of the control output terminals must be left unearthed when using an earthed thermocouple thermometer. (Con- nection makes measurements unreliable due to sneak currents.) To comply with EMC standards, the length of the cable connecting the analog input or universal TC/Pt input sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable is longer than 30 m, the EMC standards will not be satisfied. 2-2-2 Precautions when Wiring + Separate input leads and power lines in order to prevent external noise. + Use a shielded, AWG24 to AWG14 (cross-sectional area of 0.205 to

2.081 mm) twisted-pair cable for the E5CN, E5SEN, or ESAN. Use a

shielded, AWG24 to AWG18 (cross-sectional area of 0.205 to 0.823 mm) twisted-pair cable for the E5GN. The stripping length is 5 to 6 mm for the E5CN, E5AN, or E5EN, and 6 to 8 mm for the E5GN. + Use crimp terminals when wiring the terminals. + Use the suitable wiring material and crimp tools for crimp terminals. - Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0.5 N:m for the E5CN-U and E5GN and to 0.74 to 0.90 N-m for other models. The terminal torque is

0.5 to 0.6 N-m for auxiliary output 2 on the E5SGN.

+ For the E5SCN, ESAN, or E5EN, use the following types of crimp terminals for M3.5 screws.

Wiring Terminals Section 2-2

+ For the E5GN, use the following types of crimp terminals for M3.0 screws.

+ For E5GN screwless clamp terminal blocks, use wires with a gauge of AWG24 to AWG18 (equal to a cross-sectional area of 0.205 to

0.823 mmè). The length of the conductive portion inserted into the termi-

nal must be 10 mm for wires and 8 to 12 mm for ferrules. Ferrules must be

0.8 to 1.4 mm in diameter.

+ Use wires with a gauge of AWG24 to AWG18 (0.205 to 0.823 mmÿ) for auxiliary output 2 on the E5GN. The exposed conductor length inserted into the terminal for wires or fer- rules must be 6 mm. Ferrules must be 0.8 to 1.5 mm in diameter.

Wiring Terminals Section 2-2

Ë $ a Ê 8 Ë æ o HTTI 2 6 mm 6mm Ferrules Wires + Recommended Ferrules for SUB2 on E5GN Manufacturer Model number Phoenix Contact AI 0,25-6 BU AI 0,34-6 TQ Al 0,5-6 WH AI 0,75-6 GY AI 1-6 RD Note Do not remove the terminal block from the E5SAN, E5EN, or E5SCN. Doing so may cause product malfunction or incorrect operation. 2-2-3 Wiring In the connection diagrams, the left side of the terminal numbers represents the inside of the Controller and the right side represents the outside. Power supply + With the ESCN, connect to terminals 9 and 10; with the E5CN-U, connect to pins 10 and 11; with the ESAN, E5EN, and E5GN, connect pins 1 and

2. The following table shows the specifications.

Input power supply E5CN E5CN-U E5AN/EN E5GN 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz | 7.5 VA 6 VA 10 VA 5.5 VA 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 5 VA 3 VA 5.5 VA 3 VA 24 VDC (no polarity) 3w 2W awW 2W + These models have reinforced insulation between the input power supply, the relay outputs, and other terminals.

Input Thermocouple + Make the connections according to the input type as shown below, using terminals 3 to 5 for the E5SCN, pins 1 to 3 for the E5SCN-U, pins 18 to 20 for the E5AN or E5EN and pins 10 to 12 for the E5SGN. Do not De not Do not Do not use use. use. use. — Do not — Do not use. use. Platinum resistance Platinum resistance inermometer Analog input Thermocouple Fee Analog input Thermocouple

When extending the thermocouple lead wires, be sure to use compensating wires that match the thermocouple type. When extending the lead wires of a platinum resistance thermometer, be sure to use wires that have low resis- tance and keep the resistance of the three lead wires the same.

Control Output 1 + Outputs are sent from terminals 1 and 2 with the E5CN, from pins 4 to 6 With the E5SCN-U, and from pins 3 and 4 with the ESAN/EN/GN. The fol- lowing diagrams show the available outputs and their internal equalizing circuits. + 73 Rela) Voltage (for driving SSR) Current ESCN Fv| LV ©) TT T- # + ® GND O4 ? 6 Relay ___ Voltage (for driving SSR) Current ESCN-U Relay Voltage (for driving SSR) Current ESAN/EN | +V +V Et] + D Oo @ TH 8 1 HT Relay Voltage (for driving SSR) Current E5GN + The following table shows the specifications for each output type. E5CN/CN-U Output type Specifications Relay 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000 operations Long-life relay (using a triac) 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 1,000,000 operations Voltage (for driv- ing SSR) PNP type, 12 VDC +15%, 21 mA (with short-circuit protec- tion) Current DC 4 to 20 mA/DC 0 to 20 mA, resistive load: 600 € max. Resolution: Approx. 10,000

E5AN/EN Output type Specifications Relay 250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000 operations Voltage (for driv- | PNP type, 12 VDC +15%, 40 mA (with short-circuit protec- ing SSR) tion) Current DC 4 to 20 mA/DC 0 to 20 mA, resistive load: 600 € max. Resolution: Approx. 10,000 E5GN Output type Specifications Relay 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000 operations Voltage (for driv- | PNP type, 12 VDC +15%, 21 mA (with short-circuit protec- ing SSR) tion) Current DC 4 to 20 mA/DC 0 to 20 mA, resistive load: 500 Q max. Resolution: Approx. 10,000 + Always connect an AC load to a long-life relay output. The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected. + The voltage output (for driving SSR) is not electrically isolated from the internal circuits. When using a grounding thermocouple, do not connect any of the control output terminals to the ground. If a control output termi- nal is connected to the ground, errors will occur in the measured tempera- ture as a result of leakage current. + Control output 1 (voltage output for driving SSR) and control output 2 (voltage output for driving SSR) are not isolated. For the E5AN/EN, how- ever, the internal circuits are functionally isolated. + Long-life relay outputs use semiconductors for switching when closing and opening the circuit, thereby reducing chattering and arcing and improving durability. However, if high levels of noise or surge are imposed between the output terminals, short-circuit faults may occasionally occur. If the output becomes permanenily shorted, there is the danger of fire due to overheating of the heater. Design safety into the system, including measures to prevent excessive temperature rise and spreading of fire. + Take countermeasures such as installing a surge absorber. As an addi- tional safety measure, provide error detection in the control loop. (Use the Loop Burnout Alarm (LBA) and HS alarm that are provided for the E5L IN.) Long-lfe Varistor relay output A —, X Varistor e Select a surge absorber that satisfies the following conditions. Voltage used Varistor voltage Surge resistance 100 to 120 VAC 240 to 270 V 1,000 A min. 200 to 240 VAC 440 to 470 V

Wiring Terminals Section 2-2 Control Output 2 + Outputs are sent from terminals 11, 12, 14, and 15 with the E5CN, and from pins 14 and 15 with the ESAN/EN. The following diagrams show the available outputs and their internal equalizing circuits.

Voltage (for driving SSR) Voltage (for driving SSR) Relay Voltage (for driving SSR)

+ The following table shows the specifications for each output type. E5CN Output type Specifications Voltage (for driv- | PNP type, 12 VDC +15%, 21 mA (with short-circuit protec- ing SSR) tion) E5AN/EN Output type Specifications Long-life relay 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 1,000,000 (using a triac) operations Voltage (for driv- | PNP type, 12 VDC +15%, 21 mA (with short-circuit protec- ing SSR) tion) + Always connect an AC load to a long-life relay output. The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected. + The voltage output (for driving SSR) is not electrically isolated from the internal circuits. Therefore, when using a grounding thermocouple, do not connect any of the control output terminals to the ground. If a control out- put terminal is connected to the ground, errors will occur in the measured temperature as a result of leakage current. With E5SAN/EN, however, con- trol output 2 (voltage output for driving SSR) is functionally isolated from the internal circuits. + Control output 2 of the ESCN is a voltage output (for driving SSR) only, and outputs across terminals 11(+) and 12(—), or 14(+) and 15(-—). + Control output 1 (voltage output for driving SSR) and control output 2 (voltage output for driving SSR) are not isolated. + Long-life relay outputs use semiconductors for switching when closing and opening the circuit, thereby reducing chattering and arcing and improving durability. However, if high levels of noise or surge are imposed between the output terminals, short-circuit faults may occasionally occur. If the output becomes permanenily shorted, there is the danger of fire due to overheating of the heater. Design safety into the system, including measures to prevent excessive temperature rise and spreading of fire.

Auxiliary Outputs 1, 2, and

+ Take countermeasures such as installing a surge absorber. As an addi- tional safety measure, provide error detection in the control loop. (Use the Loop Burnout Alarm (LBA) and HS alarm that are provided for the E5L IN.) Long-lfe Varistor relay output X Varistor © Select a surge absorber that satisfies the following conditions. Voltage used Varistor voltage Surge resistance 100 to 120 VAC 240 to 270 V 1,000 A min. 200 to 240 VAC 440 to 470 V On the ESCN-LI2L I], auxiliary output 1 (SUB1) is output across termi- nals 7 and 8, and auxiliary output 2 (SUB2) is output across terminals 6 and 8. On the ESCN-LHETIEIU, auxiliary output 1 (SUB1) is output across termi- nals 7 and 8. On the ESCN-LI2L ITU, auxiliary output 1 (SUB1) is output across termi- nals 7 and 8, and auxiliary output 2 (SUB2) is output across terminals 7 and 9. On the ESAN/EN-[IS8L I IL, auxiliary output 1 (SUB1) is output across ter- minals 9 and 10, auxiliary output 2 (SUB2) is output across terminals 7 and 8, and auxiliary output 3 (SUB3) is output across terminals 5 and 6. On the ESGN-L 1221 1], auxiliary output 1 (SUB1) is output across termi- nals 5 and 6, and auxiliary output 2 (SUB2) is output across terminals 13 and 14 on the bottom of the Controller. Wire terminals 13 and 14 and tighten the screws. When the Input Error Output parameter is set to ON, the output assigned to the alarm 1 function turns ON when an input error occurs. When the HB alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is used with the ESCN-CIL HET, ESCN-CICIHHE], or ESGN-CI HD], alarms are output to the output assigned to the alarm 1 function. When the HB alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is used with the ESAN/EN-CTU HOT, alarms are output to the output assigned to the alarm 1 function. On the E5CN and E5CN-U, when heating/cooling control is used, auxil- jary output 2 becomes control output (cooling). On the ESAN and E5EN, when heating/cooling control is used, auxiliary output 3 becomes control output (cooling). On the E5SGN, when heating/cooling control is used, auxiliary output 1 becomes control output (cooling). For models that have a heater burnout alarm, an OR of the alarm 1 func- tion and the HB alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is sent to the output assigned to the alarm 1 function (auxiliary output 1). If the alarm 1 function is to be used for HB alarm only, set the alarm 1 type to O (i.e., do not use alarm 1 function). - The following diagrams show the internal equalizing circuits for auxiliary outputs 1, 2, and 8.

ALMA, 2, 3 can be output to auxiliary output 1, 2, 8, or changed with the advanced function setting level. + The relay specifications are as follows: E5CN/AN/EN SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A

E5GN SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 2 A

+ The ESLIN-[ I 1 ]B supports event inputs. When event inputs 1/2 are to be used, connect to terminals 11 to 13 or terminals 7 to 9. When event inputs 3/4 are to be used, connect to terminals 23 to 25. Œ) à + \+evi —

D Evt a Ev2 de a @— Ev2 _@® Ç Ev2

E53-CNI BL IN2 in the E53-AKB in the ESGN+ TB E5CN-! ML |-500 ESAN/EN-! IM[ 1-500-N (for E5CN) (for ESAN/EN) + Use event inpuis under the following conditions: + The outflow current is approximately 7 mA. Contact input ON: 1 kQ max., OFF: 100 kQ min. No-contact input ON: Residual voltage 1.5 V max.; OFF: Leakage current

Polarities during no-contact input are as follows:

(E) @ [72 EVt & EVi ds EV2 à EV2 is = E53-CNC IBLIN2 in ESS-AKB in the ESGNLI LB the ESCN- IML1-500 (for ESCN)

Wiring Terminals Section 2-2 CT Inputs + When the HB alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is to be used With the ESCN-UIME1-500 with an E53-CNLIH/HHEIN2 Option Unit, con- nect a current transformer (CT) across terminals 14 and 15 or terminals 13 and 15 (no polarity). + When the HB alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is to be used with the E5SAN/EN-IUHU1-500-N or ESAN/EN-[TTIHHI]-500-N, connect a current transformer (CT) across terminals 14 and 15 or terminals 15 and 16 (no polarity). + When using the HB alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm with the E5SGN-LI HE, connect the current transformer (CT) across terminals 7 and 8. (no polarity) 5 je E53-CNUILIHLIN2 E53-CNCIHHLIN2 ESAN/EN-CILIHC-500-N ESAN/EN-C I IHHL-500-N (for ESCN) ESGN-CIIHC Communications RS-485 + When communications are to be used with the ESLIN-L1 1103, connect communications cable across terminals 11 and 12, terminals 21 and 22, or terminals 7 and 8. = 819 De Bx) RS-485 @)— A RS-485 @— AD (D— Do not use.

ESCN- 1 1103 ESAN/EN- 1 1103

D <— B(+) RS-485 @— AC) ESGN- I 1103 Specify both ends of the transmission path including the host computer as end nodes (that is, connect terminators to both ends). The minimum terminal resistance is 54 Q.

Host computer RS-485 Shield

Dar ite LV E5CN (No. 1) FG PURE A <B: [1] Mark A > B: [0] Space D

FG | RS-485 | | | RS485 | 1 [No.[abreviaten] | | No. [atbrevaton| | —j8Tao lt 8 [ AO |! en AE) £l 7]86 | A <B: [1] Mark D a“ A > B: [0] Space NSP Terminator (120 Q, 1/2 W) + The RS-485 connection can be either one-to-one or one-to-N. À maxi- mum of 32 Units (including the host computer) can be connected in one- to-N systems. The maximum total cable length is 500 m. Use a shielded, AWG24 to AWG14 (cross-sectional area of 0.205 to 2.081 mm?) twisted- pair cable for the E5CN, E5SEN, or E5AN. Use a shielded, AWG24 to AWG18 (cross-sectional area of 0.205 to 0.823 mm?) twisted-pair cable for the E5SGN. Cross-sectional area of conductor AWG24: 0.205 mm? AWG14: 2.081 mm?

Wiring Terminals Section 2-2 RS-232C (E5AN/EN/GN Only + When communications are to be used with the ESAN/E5EN/E5GN- UDH0101, connect communications cable across terminals 11 to 13 or terminals 7 to 9. does Des 4 ,r2 RD (D<— RS-232C O—— RS-2320 desc Q<56

RD (RXD)| 3 + 8 | RD | SD (TXD) | 3 > +[8 [RD |

sG 7 ns: RS (RTS) | 7 F1 ER (DTR) | 20 > | cs (Ts) | 8 f<| FG 1 + A 1:1 connection is used. The maximum cable length is 15 m. To extend the transmission path, use the OMRON Z3R RS-232C Optical Interface. + Use a shielded, AWG24 to AWG14 (cross-sectional area of 0.205 to

2.081 mm) twisted-pair cable for the E5CN, E5SEN, or ESAN. Use a

shielded, AWG24 to AWG18 (cross-sectional area of 0.205 to 0.823 mm) twisted-pair cable for the E5GN. Cross-sectional area of conductor AWG24: 0.205 mm? AWG14: 2.081 mm? External Power Supply for + Connect terminals 11 and 12 when using the E53-CNLIIPHEIN2 as the ES1B external power supply for the ES1B.

Using the Support Software Port Section 2-3 + Connect terminals 14 and 15 when using the E53-CNLIIPBN2 as the external power supply for the ES1B. + Connect terminals 14 and 15 when using the ESAN/EN- I IPCI-N as the external power supply for the ES1B. E53-CNÛTIPHIIN2 E53-CNI L IPBN2 ESAN/EN- I IPCI-N E— (4 ED — (+) ED — (+) @— @)— @)— O + The following table provides the specifications of the external power sup- ply for ES1B. Output voltage 12 VDC +10% Output current 20 mA max. Note Contact your OMRON representative for information on using the external power supply for ES1B for other applications. 2-3 Using the Support Software Port Use the communications port for Support Software to connect the personal computer to the Temperature Controller when using EST2-2C-MV4 CX- Thermo or a version of CX-Thermo higher than 4.00, or other Support Soft- ware. The E5GN is supported from CX-Thermo version 4.2. The E58-CIFQ1 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to make the connection. For information concerning the models that can be used with CX-Thermo, contact your OMRON sales representative. Procedure Use the following procedure to connect the Temperature Controller to the per- sonal computer using the USB-Serial Conversion Cable. The USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to communicate with the COM port of the personal computer. To perform communications using USB-Serial Conversion Cable, set the communications port (COM port) number to be used for the software to the COM port assigned to the Cable. 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power to the Temperature Controller. Note lIfthe Cable is connected when the power to the Temperature Con- troller is OFF, power will be supplied from the personal computer and impose a load on the internal circuits of the Temperature Con- troller.

2. Connect the Cable.

Connect the personal computer's USB port with the Support Software port on the Temperature Controller using the Cable.

Using the Support Software Port Section 2-3 + Temperature Controller Connection Method

Personal computers USB port Communications port for Support Software E58-CIFQ1 Communications port Communications port— for Support Software for Support Software Bottom view of E5SAN Setup Tool port Side View of the E5GN Note Hold the connector when inserting or disconnecting the Cable.

8. Install the driver.

Install the driver to enable the Cable to be used with the personal comput- er. + Installation When the Cable is connected with the personal computer, the OS detects the product as a new device. At this time, install the driver using the instal- lation wizard. For details on installation methods, refer to the user's man- ual for the E58-CIFQ1 USB-Serial Conversion Cable.

4. Setting Setup Tool Communications Conditions

Set the communications port (COM port) number to be used for the CX- Thermo Setup Tool to the COM port number assigned to the USB-Serial Conversion Cable. Refer to the E58-CIFQ1 USB-Serial Conversion Cable Instruction Manual

Using the Support Software Port

and Setup Manual for details on how to check the COM port assigned to the USB-Serial Conversion Cable. The communications conditions for Setup Tool COM ports are fixed as shown in the table below. Set the communications conditions for the CX- Thermo Setup Tool according to the following table. Parameter Set value Communications Unit No. o1 Communications baud rate 38.4 (kbps) Communications data length 7 (bits) Communications stop bits 2 (bits) Communications parity Even

Using the Support Software Port

Initial Setting Examples Section 3-1 3-1 Initial Setting Examples Initial hardware setup, including the sensor input type, alarm types, control periods, and other settings, is done using parameter displays. The [©] and Keys are used to switch between parameters, and the amount of time that you press the keys determines which parameter you move to. This section describes two typical examples. Explanation of Examples Changing Parameters = mage means that there are parameters. BLN-E--- Continue pressing the 1 key to change parameters until you reach the intended parameter. Changing Numbers EM Numeric data and selections in each LA screen can be changed by using the [A and M keys. Example 1 Input type: 5 (Kthermocouple, | Setup Procedure —200°C to 1,300°C) Power ON Power ON Control method: ON/OFF control Croweron ] ( ) Alarm type: 2 (upper limit) An 3EFR Operation J Alarm value 1: 20°C (deviation) enr “be Le Set point: 100°C isplayed 1 FE 2 P the power Hd EsjPvsr supply is =_— tumed ON : : before the presse ©] key for Initial Setting | Sensor is Level connected. Initial Setting P Level

(Start operation ) Start operation.

Initial Setting Examples

ST control specifications Set alarm type PVISP. after AT is stopped E oo [sl 158] Adjustment ET Level 5 —/S0+ The set point flaghes dk AT ex Aauto-tuning (AT) execution: Alter AT is (When PID sopped control is # AE selected) Ë SFF During AT execution | 5 AE [el Es 4) Operation Level Set al

Press the LC] key (for less than 1 s) Operation Level-X ) Confim that [FF H Peserpot A. El jPUSP is 1500, 52] Confim that H control is Running running Stopped 5 UseeAand Erfi - À keystoset JE LL 1||Alemm 39 ne alsrm value ha 39] |Vaiue 1

Setting the Input Type Section 3-2 3-2 Setting the Input Type The Controller supports four input types: platinum resistance thermometer, thermocouple, infrared temperature sensor, and analog inputs. Set the input type that matches the sensor that is used. In the product specifications, there are models with thermocouple/resistance thermometer inputs (universal inputs) and models with analog input. The settings differ depending on the model. Check to make sure which model you are using. 3-2-1 Input Type The following example shows how to set a K thermocouple for -20.0 to 500.0°C. Operating Procedure Operation Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation TA level to the initial setting level. ET 20 3 EEE ü Initial Setting Level 2. Press the [A] Key to enter the set value of the desired sensor. BE = 1 | put Type Wen you use a K thermocouple (-20.0 to 500.0°C), enter 6 as the set O LINE value. BEE 5 En Hint: The key operation is saved two seconds after the change, or by press- E: L MN- E ing the [O] or Ce) Key. Or & [es jenm

Selecting the Temperature Unit Section 3-3 3-3 Selecting the Temperature Unit 3-3-1 Temperature Unit - Either °C or °F can be selected as the temperature unit. + Set the temperature unit in the Temperature Unit parameter of the initial setting level. The default is £ (°C). Operating Procedure The following example shows how to select °C as the temperature unit. Operation Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation DIE level to the initial setting level. = [y = î ES ü Initial Setting Level 2. Select the Temperature Unit parameter by pressing the &] Key. Y ither ° ° E hi 1 | Input Type Press the or M Key to select either °C or °F.

[m} F:°F DE 6 : ([esjenm E 1 1] Temperature 8. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for at least one second. E cd T4) Unit [= mc rm (ei jm} Lt 3-4 Selecting PID Control or ON/OFF Control Two control methods are supported: 2-PID control and ON/OFF control. Switching between 2-PID control and ON/OFF control is executed by means of the PID ON/OFF parameter in the initial setting level. When this parameter is set to Pc d, 2-PID control is selected, and when set to aNaF, ON/OFF con- trol, is selected. The default is aNaf. 2-PID Control PID control is set by AT (auto-tuning), ST (self-tuning), or manual setting. For PID control, set the PID constants in the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (1), and Derivative Time (D) parameters. ON/OFF Control In ON/OFF control, the control output is turned ON when the process value is lower than the current set point, and the control output is turned OFF when the process value is higher than the current set point (reverse operation). 3-5 Setting Output Specifications 3-5-1 Control Periods + Set the output periods (control periods). Though a shorter period provides C pal Eng) 0 better control performance, it is recommended that the control period be set to 20 seconds or longer for a relay output to preserve the service life m TE Control Period of the relay. After the settings have been made in the initial setup, readjust LL (Cooling) the control period, as required, by means such as trial operation. + Set the control periods in the Control Period (Heating) and Control Period (Cooling) parameters in the initial setting level. The default is 20 seconds. + The Control Period (Cooling) parameter is used only for heating/cooling control. + When control output 1 is used as a current output, Control Period (Heat- ing) cannot be used.

Setting Output Specifications Section 3-5 3-5-2 Direct and Reverse Operation + Direct operation increases the manipulated variable whenever the pro- cess value increases. Reverse operation decreases the manipulated vari- able whenever the process value increases. Manipulated variable Manipulated variable 100% 100% 0% 0% = AN == AN Low Set Value High Low Set Value High temperature temperature temperature temperature Direct operation Reverse operation For example, when the process value (PV) is lower than the set point (SP) in a heating control system, the manipulated variable increases according to the difference between the PV and SP. Accordingly, reverse operation is used in a heating control system. Direct operation is used in a cooling con- trol system, in which the operation is the opposite of a heating control sys- tem. The Control Output 1 Assignment is set to a (control output (heating)) for either direct or reverse operation. - Direct/reverse operation is set in the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter in the initial setting level. The default is a#-F (reverse operation). Operating Procedure In this example, the input type, temperature unit, direct/reverse operation, and control period (heat) parameters are checked. Input type = 5 (K thermocouple) Temperature unit = £ (°C) Direct/reverse operation = a#-F (reverse operation) Control period (heat) = 20 (seconds) Operation Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level.

EEE ü Initial Setting Level 2. The input type is displayed. When the input type is being set for the first ER Input Type time, 5 (K thermocouple) is set. To select a different sensor, press the E: L N = or F1 Key. BE 5 E 111] Temperature 8. Select the Temperature Unit parameter by pressing the €] Key. The de- E © 7 Li Unit fault is © (°C). To select F (°F), press the [A] Key. Den r (mimi) L E F | Control Period 4. Select the Control Period (Heating) parameter by pressing the Key. E D F\(Heating) The default is 20. DIDIen el (mimi) El

Setting Output Specifications Section 3-5 E -0 DirectReverse ?- Select the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter by pressing the Key. E: aREy Operation The default is a®-F (reverse operation). To select 4®-d (direct opera- ES ä8-R tion), press the Key. Operation Level 6. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for at least one second. ET 211 PV/SP (el 211 Jon [El ER El ES om = ]Move to Ad- 7. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- BE A! 11y |vanced Function ing the Fe Key. EE. n]| Setting Level (mimi) El 3-5-3 Assigned Output Functions + Function assignments can be changed by changing the settings for con- trol and auxiliary output assignments. + The default function assignments for each output are shown below. Parameter name Symbol Initial status Control Output 1 Assignment UE | Control output (heating) Control Output 2 Assignment oÙte Not assigned. Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Süb ! Alarm 1 Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Sübe Alarm 2 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment SUb3 Alarm 3 (ESAN/EN only) + Refer to pages 240 to 242 for the functions that can be assigned to the outputs. + Each output is automatically initialized as shown below by changing the control mode. Example: E5CN Parameter name Symbol Without control output 2 With control output 2 Standard Heating/cooling Standard Heating/cooling Control Output 1 oùt Control output Control output Control output Control output Assignment (heating) (heating) (heating) (heating) Control Output 2 oùte Not assigned. Not assigned. Not assigned. Control output Assignment (See note 1.) (See note 1.) (cooling) Auxiliary Output 1 SÜb ! Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Assignment (See note 2.) (See note 2.) (See note 2.) (See note 2.) Auxiliary Output 2 Sübe Alarm 2 Control output Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Assignment (See note 3.) (cooling) (See note 3.) Example: E5GN Parameter name Symbol Standard Heating/cooling Control Output 1 oùt Control output Control output Assignment (heating) (heating) Auxiliary Output 1 SÜb ! Alarm 1 Control output Assignment (See note 2.) (cooling) Auxiliary Output 2 Sübe Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Assignment

Setting Output Specifications Section 3-5 Note (1) There is no control output 2 and no parameter assignment is displayed for that output. (2) The Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter becomes the program end output unless the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF. (3) For the E5SAN/EN, the Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameter is set as the control output for cooling. (The Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment param- eter is set for alarm 2). HE Alarms lt will be specified in this section when an alarm must be assigned, i.e., when an alarm must be set for the Control Output 1 or 2 Assignment parameters, or for the Auxiliary Output 1 to 3 Assignment parameters. For example, if alarm 1 is set for the Control Output 1 Assignment parameter, then alarm 1 has been assigned. Assigning a work bit to either control output 1 or 2 or to auxiliary output 1 to 3 is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm. For example, if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter, then alarms 1 to 3 have been assigned. Operating Procedure This procedure sets the following control and auxiliary output assignments. Control output 1: Control output (heating); Control output 2: Control output (cooling); Auxiliary output 1: Alarm 1; Auxiliary output 2: Alarm 2 Operation Level 1. Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation ET PVISP level to the initial setting level. F #5 ESS (00 Initial Setting Level

2. Select the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter by pressing the

B —n _ L Input Type Key. BE LIN De 5 (asian Initial Setting Level [=] Standard or Ë a = HE Heating/Cooling BES SENd Initial Setting Level

8. Press the [A] Key to set the parameter to H-£.

A a _ HE Note The following output assignments do not need to be set because they (=) L are set automatically by changing the control mode, but they are BES HE shown here as a reference for checking the assignments for each out- put. [a] =), | Move to Ad- 4. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- (a MAY vanced Function ing the [e] Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving De | Setting Level to the Advanced Function Setting Level.) Advanced Function Setting Level 5. Press the M Key to enterthe password (“-169”), and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level. MT Parameter LINL Initialization

Setting Output Specifications

1 Assignment Advanced Function Setting Level [=] —| Auxiliary Output BE a LE 2 2 Assignment Oce O1 M EDS ALI

LIL 7 E SUbe BEs AL Initial Setting Level D - Input Type NE put Typl B LINE Den G (asian 76 PV/SP Auxiliary Output Opening or Closing in Alarm

(When H-£ is selected for the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter, the setting will be £ -a.)

10. Select the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter by pressing the

(The default is ALM 1.

13. Press the A] or F1 Key to set AL ME.

(The default is AL ME.)

14. Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced

function setting level to the initial setting level.

15. Press the [O] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting

level to the operation level. + When “close in alarm” is set, the status of the auxiliary output is output unchanged. When “open in alarm” is set, the status of the auxiliary output function is reversed before being output. + Each auxiliary output can be set independenily. + These settings are made in the Auxiliary Output 1 to 3 Open in Alarm parameters (advanced function setting level). + The default is N-a: Close in Alarm.

Setting the Set Point (SP) Section 3-6 + When “open in alarm” is set for the alarm 1 output, the open in alarm sta- tus is also applied to heater burnout, HS alarm, heater overcurrent, and input error outputs. Auxiliary output Auxiliary Indicators functions 1 to 3 output (SUB1 to SUB3) Close in Alarm |ON ON Lit OFF OFF Not lit Open in Alarm | ON OFF Lit OFF ON Not lit - The alarm output will turn OFF (i.e., the relay contacts will open) when power is interrupted and for about two seconds after the power is turned ON regardiess of the setting of the Auxiliary Output 1 to 3 Open in Alarm parameter. 3-6 Setting the Set Point (SP) Operation Level The operation level is displayed when the power is turned ON. The process ta F value (PV) is at the top of the display, and the set point (SP) is at the bottom. € Li BEE ü Operation Level For Controllers that support a No. 3 display (E5AN/E5EN), the contents set Bt nn in the PV/SP Display Screen Selection parameter (advanced function setting = CÙ level) are displayed below the PV and SP. ü The MV is displayed as the default. For details, refer to 3-11 Setting the No. ESS 520 8 Display. 3-6-1 Changing the SP + The set point cannot be changed when the Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter is set to 3. For details, refer to 4-9 Using the Key Protect Level. + To change the set point, press the [A] or F1 Key in the Process Value/Set Point parameter (in the operation level), and set the desired set value. The new set point is selected two seconds after you have specified the new value. + Multi-SP is used to switch between two or four set points. For details, refer to 4-5 Using Event Inputs for details. Operating Procedure In this example, the set point is changed from 0°C to 200°C. Operation Level 1. Normally, the Process Value/Set Point parameter is displayed. The set BE point is 0°C. (= 1 #20 BEE ui = ñ 2. Use the ES] and F1 Keys to set the set point to 200°C. E 20 EE _C00

Using ON/OFF Control Section 3-7 3-7 Using ON/OFF Control In ON/OFF control, the control output turns OFF when the temperature being controlled reaches the preset set point. When the manipulated variable turns OFF, the temperature begins to fall and the control turns ON again. This oper- ation is repeated over a certain temperature range. At this time, how much the temperature must fall before control turns ON again is determined by the Hys- teresis (Heating) parameter. Also, what direction the manipulated variable must be adjusted in response to an increase or decrease in the process value is determined by the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter. 3-7-1 ON/OFF Control + Switching between 2-PID control and ON/OFF control is performed using the PID ON/OFF parameter in the initial setting level. When this parame- ter is set to FL d, 2-PID control is selected, and when it is set to aNaF, ON/ OFF control is selected. The default is aNaf. Hysteresis With ON/OFF control, hysteresis is used to stabilize operation when switching between ON and OFF. The control output (heating) and control output (cooling) functions are set in the Hysteresis (Heating) and Hystere- sis (Cooling) parameters, respectively. In standard control (heating or cooling control), the setting of the Hystere- sis (Heating) parameter in the adjustment level is used as the hysteresis regardless of whether the control type is heating control or cooling con- trol. Reverse operation Hysteresis (heating) OFF PV Set point Three-position In heating/cooling control, a dead band (an area where both control out- Control puts are 0) can be set to either the heating or cooling side. This makes it possible to use 3-position control. Reverse operation Dead band Hysteresis (heating) | u Hysteresis (cooling) Heating Cooling side side OFF ——— | > PV Set point

3-7-2 Settings Parameters Symbol Parameter: level Application S-HC Standard or Heating/Cooling: Initial setting level | Specifying control method CNEL PID ON/OFF: Initial setting level Specifying control method GREY Direct/Reverse Operation: Initial setting level Specifying control method C-db Dead Band: Adjustment level Heating/cooling control Hg5 Hysteresis (Heating): Adjustment level ON/OFF control CHyS Hysteresis (Cooling): Adjustment level ON/OFF control To execute ON/OFF control, set the Set Point, PID ON/OFF, and Hysteresis parameters. Setting the PID ON/OFF Parameter Operating Procedure Operation Level OT pv Een 00 Initial Setting Level —h Input Type

Setting the SP Operating Procedure Operation Level OT PV/SP =] 7

= 7 HE 25 Es 200 Confirm that the PID ON/OFF parameter is set to Naf in the initial setting level.

1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation

level to the initial setting level.

4. Check that the set value is 5NF (i.e., the default).

5. To return to the operation level, press the

Key for at least one second. Next, set the set point value. In this example, the set point is set to 200. The set value (ï.e., the SP) is Shown at the bottom of the display.

1. Select the Process Value/Set Point parameter in the operation level.

2. Use the ES and F1 Keys to set the SP. (In this example, it is set to 200.)

The new set value can be saved by pressing the © Key, or it will go into effect after two seconds have elapsed. Next, set the hysteresis.

Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, Manual Setup) Section 3-8 Setting the Hysteresis Operating Procedure Operation Level TOO

25 PV Adjustment Level Adjustment {Adi Level Display Hysteresis (Heating) Set the hysteresis to 2.0°C. Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level.

4. Press the [A] and M1 Keys to set the hysteresis (2.0 in this example). Ei-

ther press the ©e] Key or wait for at least two seconds after setting the hys- teresis value to confirm the setting.

5. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key.

+ When AT is executed, the optimum PID constants for the set point at that time are set automatically. À method (called the limit cycle method) for forcibly changing the manipulated variable and finding the characteristics of the control object is employed. + Either 40% AT or 100% AT can be selected depending on the width of MV variation in the limit cycle. In the AT Execute/Cancel parameter, specify RE -2 (100% AT) or AE - ! (40% AT). To cancel AT, specify aff (AT can- cel). + Only 100% AT can be executed for heating and cooling control. + AT cannot be executed when control has stopped or during ON/OFF con- trol. + The results of AT are reflected in the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (1), and Derivative Time (D) parameters in the adjustment level. Adjustment Level ET pi Proportional Band

Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, Manual Setup) Section 3-8 AT Operations AT is started when either AE -2 (100% AT) or AE - { (40% AT) is specified for the AT Execute/Cancel parameter. During execution, the AT Execute/Cancel parameter on the No. 1 display flashes. When AT ends, the AT Execute/Can- cel parameter turns OFF, and the No. 1 display stops flashing.

AT Execute/Cancel[E [a] (al E — L = BE = AE No. 1 display Es aff Fes #12 100% AT execution in progress If you move to the operation level during AT execution, the No. 2 display flashes to indicate that AT is being executed. PVISP Eü 2 En ET 2 T [=] + E pi) EE (00 BE __—/01]- No. 2 display TTIN AT execution in progress Only the Communications Writing, RUN/STOP, AT Execution/Cancel, and Pro- gram Start parameters can be changed during AT execution. Other parame- ters cannot be changed. AT Calculated Gain The AT Calculated Gain parameter sets the gain for when PID values are cal- culated using AT. When emphasizing response, decrease the set value. When emphasizing stability, increase the set value. AT Hysteresis The AT Hysteresis parameter sets the hysteresis when switching ON and OFF for the limit cycle operation during auto-tuning. Limit Cycle MV Amplitude The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter sets the MV amplitude for limit cycle operation during auto-tuning. Note This setting is disabled for 100% AT. nm 40% AT The width of MV variation in the limit cycle can be changed in the Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter, but the AT execution time may be longer than for 100% AT. The limit cycle timing varies according to whether the deviation (DV) at the start of auto-tuning execution is less than 10% FS. Deviation > 10% FS Deviation < 10% FS Limit Cycle MV PV Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 40% Amplitude 40% Deviation: Deviation: | 1 10%FS

AT started AT ended AT started AT ended

Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, Manual Setup) Section 3-8 Operating Procedure Adjustment Level HAE ES ofF E RE

m100% AT Operation will be as shown in the following diagram, regardiess of the devia- tion (DV) at the start of AT execution. To shorten the AT execution time, select 100% AT. pv Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 100%

AT started AT ended Note The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter is disabled. This procedure executes 40%AT.

1. Press the [0] Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level.

2. Press the AI Key to select AE - {. The No. 1 display for AT Execute/Cancel

will flash during AT execution.

8. afF will be displayed when AT ends.

4. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key.

3-8-2 ST (Self-tuning)

ST (self-tuning) is a function that finds PID constants by using step response tuning (SRT) when Controller operation begins or when the set point is changed. Once the PID constants have been calculated, ST is not executed when the next control operation is started as long as the set point remains unchanged. ST (self-tuning) is enabled when the ST parameter is set to ON in the initial setting level. When the ST function is in operation, be sure to turn the power supply of the load connected to the control output ON simultaneously with or before starting Controller operation. When executing self-tuning, turn ON power for the load (e.g., heater) at the same time as or before supplying power to the Digital Temperature Controller. If power is turned ON for the Digital Temperature Controller before turning ON power for the load, self-tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved.

Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, Manual Setup) Section 3-8 Note Operating Procedure Initial Setting Level D - Input Type NE put Typ B LINE BE 5 [a] ST 5 SE Be 5N EE oN Operation Level ES Ê5 pv = Inn ms] LILI Startup Conditions Note 1,2,3.. ST Stable Range Operating Procedure PID Constants When control characteristics are already known, PID constants can be set directly to adjust control. PID constants are set in the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (l), and Derivative Time (D) parameters in the adjustment level. This procedure executes self-tuning (ST).

1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation

level to the initial setting level.

2. Select the ST parameter by pressing the © Key.

3. Press the [A Key to select aN. ON is the default.

4. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for at least one second.

The temperature display flashes during self-tuning (ST) execution. Self-tuning by step response tuning (SRT) is started when the following condi- tions are met after program execution is started and the set point is changed. At start of operation When set point is changed

1. The set point at the start of operation | 1. The new set point differs from the set

differs from the set point when the pre- point used when the previous SRT was vious SRT was executed. (See note 1.) executed. (See note 1.)

2. The difference between the tempera- |2. The set point change width is greater

ture at the start of operation and the set both of the following: (Present propor- point is greater both of the following: tional band x 1.27 + 4°C) and the ST (Present proportional band x 1.27 + stable range. 4°C) and the ST stable range. 3. During reverse operation, the new set

3. The temperature at the start of opera- point is larger than the set point before

tion is lower than the set point during the change; and during direct opera- reverse operation, and is larger than tion, the new set point is smaller than the set point during direct operation. the set point before the change.

4. There is no reset from input errors. 4. The temperature is stable. (See note

2.) (Equilibrium with the output amount at 0% when the power is turned ON is also all right.) (See note 3.) (1) The previous SRT-implemented set point is the set point that was used for calculating the PID constants for the previous SRT. (2) In this state, the measurement point is within the ST stable range. (3) In this state, the change width of the PV every 60 seconds is within the ST stable range or less. In the following instances, PID constants are not changed by self-tuning (ST) for the present set point.

1. Whenthe PID constants have been changed manually with ST set to ON.

2. When auto-tuning (AT) has been executed.

The ST stable range determines the condition under which ST (self-tuning) functions.

Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, Manual Setup) Section 3-8 This procedure sets the ST stable range to 20.0°C. Advanced Function Setting Level 1. Select the ST Stable Range parameter by pressing the € Key in the ad- = ST Stable vanced function setting level. E GE T h Range Eee 159 F3 2. Use the [A] Key to set the parameter to 20.0°C. PSE -b Ut EEs _cün 3-8-3 RT (Robust Tuning) F + When AT or ST is executed with RT selected, PID constants are automat- E ically set that make it hard for control performance to degenerate even when the characteristics of the controlled object are changed. + RT can be set in the advanced function setting level when PID control has been set. + The RT mode cannot be selected while an analog input is set. + Selecting the RT mode in the following cases will help to prevent hunting from occurring. + When the set temperature is not constant and is changed in a wide range + When there are large variations in ambient temperatures due to factors such as seasonal changes or differences between day and night tem- peratures + When there are large variations in ambient wind conditions and air flow + When heaïer characteristics change depending on the temperature - When an actuator with disproportional 1/0, such as a phase-control- type power regulator, is used + When a rapidly heating heater is used + When the control object or sensor has much loss time + When hunting occurs in normal mode for any reason + PID constants are initialized to the factory settings by switching to RT mode. + When the RT mode is selected, the derivative time setting unit be- comes the second. RT Features + Even when hunting occurs for PID constants when AT or ST is executed in normal mode, it is less likely to occur when AT or ST is executed in RT mode. Temperature Temperature Much hunting occurs. Hunting is reduced Set value |---------.-,{.\.f Set valueL 7 = A Time À Time Start of control Start of control

Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, Manual Setup) Section 3-8 + When the temperature (PV) falls short of the set point for the PID con- stants when using AT or ST in normal mode, executing AT or ST in RT mode tends to improve performance. Temperature Temperature Set value Set value À Time À Time Start of control Start of control + When the manipulated variable (MV) is saturated, the amount of over- shooting may be somewhat higher in comparison to PID control based on AT or ST in normal mode. Operating Procedure This procedure selects RT mode. Operation Level 1. Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation Ca level to the initial setting level. ET 26 PV/SP g E L Fes 10 Initial Setting Level 2. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- En L InputType ing the 2 Key. E LINE

BE 5 Initial Setting Level 3. Usethe Key to enter “-169” (the password). re] — Move to Ad- E EMa y vanced Function EE. n| Setting Level (mimi) El Advanced Function Setting Level It is possible to move to the advanced function setting level by pressing Parameter the ©] Key or leaving the setting for at least two seconds. D 1 G L UE E Initialization Fes _GFF Advanced Function Setting Level 4. Press the FA Key to select FE. (ml RT 5 RE [m _ Es off "a L 5. Press the [A] Key to select aN. aFF is the default. G nE si] où Initial Setting Level 6. To return to the initial setting level, press the [0] Key for at least one sec- E - NL Input Type ond. CO LN EL (al [mm 6 =œie|

Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, Manual Setup) Section 3-8 Operation Level 7. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for at least one second. ÊT PV/SP (= TE E LL Fes 100 3-8-4 Manual Setup Individual PID constants can be manually set in the Proportional Band, Inte- gral Time, and Derivative Time parameters in the adjustment level. Operating Procedure In this example, the Proportional Band parameter is set to 10.0, the Integral Time parameter to 250, and the Derivative Time parameter to 45. Adjustment Level 1. Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level. [=] Adjustment E L Adi Level Display Der (es; ET [y] Proportional 2. Press the 1 Key to select the proportional band” parameter. a] JF |Band

Fes 233 =] = 5. Use the ] and F1 Keys to set 250. = L EE 25 a] Derivative Time 6- Select the Derivative Time operation by pressing the Fe Key.

E Jon ul ER ui =] 7. Use the ES and F1 Keys to set 45.

8. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key.

Note Proportional Action When PID constants | (integral time) and D (derivative time) are set to 0, con- trol is executed according to proportional action. As the default, the center value of the proportional band becomes the set point. Related parameter: Manual reset value (adjustment level)

When P (Proportional Band) Is Adjusted increased The curve rises gradually, and a long set TC stabilization time is created, but over- eue shooting is prevented. Decreased Overshooting and hunting occur, but the set value is quickly reached and the temperature stabilizes. When I (Integral Time) Is Adjusted increased It takes a long time to reach the set point. It takes time to achieve a stable state, but overshooting, undershooting, and hunting are reduced. Decreased Overshooting and undershooting occur. set es = Hunting occurs. eue The Controller starts up faster. When D (Derivative Time) Is Adjusted increased Overshooting, undershooting, and sta- set a 77" [bilization times are reduced, but fine value hunting occurs on changes in the curve itself. Decreased Set Overshooting and undershooting Va increase, and it takes time to return to the set point. 3-9 Alarm Outputs - Alarms can be used by the E5CN-LI2L 110] (2 auxiliary outputs), E5AN/ ESEN-CHEII (1 auxiliary output), ESAN/E5EN-C 1801010] (3 auxiliary out- puts), the ESCN- LI TIU (1 auxiliary output), the ESCN-LI2LIL LIU (2 auxiliary outputs), ESGN-LHCILIT (1 auxiliary output), and E5GN- CI200 (2 auxiliary outputs). Alarms can also be used by setting the Control Output 1 Assignment or Control Output 2 Assignment parameter to any of the alarms from alarm 1 to 3. The alarm output condition is determined by a combination of the alarm type, alarm value, alarm hysteresis, and the standby sequence. For details, refer to 4-2 Alarm Hysteresis. This section describes the Alarm Type, Alarm Value, Upper-limit Alarm and Lower-limit Alarm parameters. 3-9-1 Alarm Types Set value Alarm type Alarm output operation Description of function When alarm value X | When alarm value X is positive is negative 0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm 1 (See note | Upper- and lower-limit Lie See note 2. Set the deviation in the set point by on H : F

1) OFF + setting the alarm upper limit (H)

and alarm lower limit (L). 2 Upper-limit x mixte Set the upward deviation in the set on H on OFF & OFF & point by setting the alarm value C9:

Set value Alarm type Alarm output operation Description of function When alarm value X | When alarm value X is positive is negative 3 Lower-limit Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm value C9: 4 (See note | Upper- and lower-limit Lite See note 3. Set the deviation in the set point by

1) range EE en setting the alarm upper limit (H)

s and alarm lower limit (L). 5 (See note | Upper- and lower-limit See note 4. A standby sequence is added to

1) with standby sequence the upper- and lower-limit alarm

(1). (See note 6.) 6 Upper-limit with standby Xe A standby sequence is added to sequence a the upper-limit alarm (2). (See note 7 Lower-limit with standby mixe A standby sequence is added to sequence rl the lower-limit alarm (3). (See note 8 Absolute-value upper- où ei Lx The alarm will turn ON if the pro- limit OFF ——©= Es b cess value is larger than the alarm ° value (X) regardiess of the set point. 9 Absolute-value lower-limit où The alarm will turn ON if the pro- OFF —+ cess value is smaller than the alarm value (X) regardless of the set point. 10 Absolute-value upper- A standby sequence is added to limit with standby the absolute-value upper-limit sequence alarm (8). (See note 6.) 11 Absolute-value lower-limit A standby sequence is added to with standby sequence the absolute-value lower-limit alarm (9). (See note 6.) 12 LBA (alarm 1 type only) |--- Refer to page 118. (See note 7.) 13 PV change rate alarm — Refer to page 72. (See note 8.)

Note (1) With set values 1, 4, and 5, the upper- and lower-limit values can be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as “L’ and “H” (2) Set value: 1 (Upper- and lower-limit alarm) Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always ON) I II à 1 H<0,L<0

(4) Set value: 5 (Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence) - For the lower-limit alarms in cases 1 and 2 above, the alarm is always OFF if upper- and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. + In case 3, the alarm is always OFF.

Alarm Outputs Section 3-9 (5) Set value: 5 (Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence) - The alarm is always OFF if upper- and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. (6) Refer to 4-2-1 Standby Sequence for information on the operation of the standby sequence. (7) Refer to 4-12-1 Loop Burnout Alarm (LBA). (8) Refer to PV Change Rate Alarm on page 72. + Set the alarm type independently for each alarm in the Alarm 1 to 3 Type parameters in the initial setting level. The default is 2 (Upper-limit alarm). 3-9-2 Alarm Values 1 | Alarm Lower + Alarm values are indicated by “X” in the table on the previous page. When 1L_| Limit Value the upper and lower limits are set independently, “H” is displayed for 5 upper limit values, and “L’ is displayed for lower limit values. pou

+ To set the alarm value upper and lower limits for deviation, set the upper and lower limits in each of the Alarm 1 to 8 Upper Limit, and Alarm 1 to 3 L Lower Limit parameters in the operation level.

AL-3 Operating Procedure This procedure sets alarm 1 as an upper-limit alarm. The related parameters and settings are shown below. The alarm is output when the set point exceeds 10°C. (In this example, the temperature unit is °C.) Alarm 1 type = 2 (Upper-limit alarm) Alarm value 1= 10 pou Initial Setting Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation BE hi 1 linputtype level to the initial setting level. BE LNL ES 5 E 1 DL pjAlarmi Type 2. Select the Alarm 1 Type parameter by pressing the Key. Confirm that E AL L 1! the set value is 2. The default value is 2 (Upper-limit alarm). Der e O0D ET ZE |PVSP 3. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for at least one second. E LL Eee 108

The change width can be found for PV input values in any set period. Differ- ences with previous values in each set period are calculated, and an alarm is output if the result exceeds the alarm value. The PV rate of change calculation period can be set in units of 250 ms. If a positive value is set for the alarm value, the PV will operate as a change rate alarm in the rising direction. If a negative value is set, the PV will operate as a change rate alarm in the falling direction. Precaution If a shorter PV rate of change calculation period is set, outputs set for the PV change rate alarm function may repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time. lt is therefore recommended that the PV change rate alarm be used with the alarm latch turned ON.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 3-10 Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms 3-10-1 Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarm Operations + Heater burnout detection and heater overcurrent detection are executed by measuring heater current while the control output (heating) is ON, and heater short detection is executed by measuring heater current while it is OFF. For details, refer to the following table. (Heater burnout detection, heater short detection, and heater overcurrent detection cannot be used With the control output for cooling.) Control output (heating) status Power to heater HB alarm HS alarm Heater overcurrent Control output | Operation output output alarm output (heating) indicator ON Lit Yes (Normal) (See note 1.) |OFF _— = No (Heater burnout) ON = OFF Not lit Yes (HS alarm) —— ON No (Normal) (See note 2.) |--- OFF — ON Lit Normal — _— OFF Heater overcurrent status |- — ON (See note 3.) ‘ Ton ‘ Toff ‘ ! (See note 4.) ! (See note 5.) ! ON l ; Control output (heating) OFF Note (1) In the above diagram, power is considered to be ON (normal) if the heater current is greater than the heater burnout detection current during the Ton interval. If the heater is burned out, the measured current decreases and falls below the heater burnout detection value. The output is then activat- ed as the heater burnout alarm. (2) In the above diagram, power is considered to be OFF (normal) if the leak- age current is less than the HS alarm current during the Toff interval. lf the SSR output is short-circuited, the measured current increases be- yond the HS alarm value. The output is then activated as the HS alarm. (3) In the above diagram, it is regarded as normal when the heater current is less than the heater overcurrent detection current during the Ton period. Current is increased when excessive current flows to the heater, causing the heater overcurrent detection value to be exceeded and an OC (heater overcurrent) alarm to be output. (4) Heater burnout and heater overcurrent are not detected if the control out- put (heating) ON time (Ton) is 100 ms or less. (5) HS alarms are not detected if the control output (heating) OFF time (Toff) is 100 ms or less.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 - For Controllers with heater burnout, HS, and heater overcurrent alarms, an OR output is established between the ALM 1 function and the alarms. Ifthe ALM1 function is to be used for the heater burnout, HS, and heater overcurrent alarms only, set 0 as the alarm 1 type (i.e., do not use ALM1). + Turn the heater power ON simultaneously or before turning ON the ESC IN power. If the heater power is turned ON after turning ON the E5AN power, the HB alarm will be activated. + Control is continued even when the heater burnout, HS, or heater over- current alarm is active. + The rated current value may sometimes differ slightly from the actual cur- rent flowing to the heater. Use the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor, Heater Current 2 Value Monitor, Leakage Current 1 Monitor, and Leakage Current 2 Monitor parameters to check the actual current being used.

• If there is little difference between the current in normal and abnormal states, detection may become unstable. To stabilize detection, set a cur- rent value difference of at least 1.0 A for heaters of less than 10.0 À, and at least 2.5 A for heaters of 10.0 A or more. If the heater current is too low, loop the load line several times through a CT, as shown in the diagram below. Looping it through once will double the detection current. 3-10-2 Installing Current Transformers (CT) Single-phase Heaters - This function can be used with E5SLIN models that have the HB alarm, HS alarm, and OC alarm. For the E5CN, connect the CT in advance to terminals 14 and 15 (CT1), or 13 and 15 (CT2). For the ESAN/ESEN, connect the CT in advance to terminals 14 and 15 (CT1) or 15 and 16 (CT2). For the E5GN, connect the CT in advance to terminals 7 and 8 (CT1). Then pass the heater power line through the CT's hole. For specifications, models and dimensions of current transformers that can be used with this Controller, refer to Appen- dix Current Transformer (CT) on page 279. For single-phase heaters, install the CT in the position shown in the following diagram. Load (such as a heater) AC line S

Product To CT input Three-phase Heaters (E5AN-!IHHEI-N, ESEN-CIUIHHE-N, and E53-CNL I IHHN2 (for E5CN) 3-phase Heater Detection Models)

1,2,3.. When a 3-phase power supply is used, regardless of the types of connecting lines, two current transformers (CTs) are required to detect heater burnout, HS, and OC.

Delta connecting lines: Refer to the following diagram for CT installation positions. Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here, so be take that into account when setting the detection current.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 Load (such as a heater) AC line Product To CT input AC line Product To CT input

2. Star connecting lines: Refer to the following diagram for CT installation po-

sitions. Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here, so be take that into account when setting the detection current. AC line Product To CT input Product To CT input

8. V connecting lines: Refer to the following diagram for CT installation posi-

tions. Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here, so be take that into account when setting the detection current. Product To CT input AC line Product To CT input 3-10-3 Calculating Detection Current Values + Calculate the set value using the following equation: Normal current value + Burnout current value

Heater Burnout Detection 1/2 set value = HS Alarm 1/2 set value = Leakage current value Joueur OFF) + HS current value Normal current value + Overcurrent value + To set the current for heater burnout when two or more heaters are con- nected through the CT, use the value from when the heater with the small- est current burns out. If all of the heaters have the same current, use the value from when any one of them burns out. Heater overcurrent 1/2 set value =

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 + Make sure that the following conditions are satisfied: Heater with a current of less than 10.0 A: (Current value at normal operation) — (Current value at heater burnout) > When the difference is less than 1 A, detection is unstable. Heater with a current of 10.0 A or more: (Current value at normal operation) — (Current value at heater burnout) > 2.5A When the difference is less than 2.5 A, detection is unstable. The setting range is 0.1 to 49.9 A. Heater burnout, HS, and heater over- current are not detected when the set value is 0.0 or 50.0. When the set value is 0.0, the heater burnout alarm is always OFF, the HS alarm is always ON, and the heater overcurrent alarm is always ON. When the set value is 50.0, the heater burnout alarm is always ON, the HS alarm is always OFF, and the heater overcurrent alarm is always OFF. Set the total current value for normal heater operation to 50 A or less. When a current value of 55.0 A is exceeded, FFFF is displayed in the Heater Current 1 (or 2) Value Monitor and Leakage Current 1 (or 2) Moni- tor parameters. 3-10-4 Application Examples Single-phase Heaters Example: Using a 200-VAC, 1-kW Heater Normal Burnout 5 A AC line AC line 200 V 200V Burnout Load (such as a heater) Ÿ A JA Ÿ 0A EN CT CT Product] Product _____T To CT input | To CT input ——] The heater power supply provides 5 À when the current is normal, and 0 A when there is a burnout, so the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows: . (Normal current) + (Heater burnout current) Heater burnout detection current = 3 5+0 = = 2.6 [AI : (Al Example: Using Three 200-VAC, 1-KW Heaters Normal Burnout 15 A 10 A 200v zo0v Pt urn- Ÿ 54 A ÿ 104 out Product TT CT produet T7 CT To CT input | To CT input The heater power supply provides 15 A when the current is normal, and 10 A when there is a burnout, so the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows:

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 (Normal current) + (Heater burnout current)

Heater burnout detection current = _ 15+10

=125[A] Three-phase Heaters Delta Connecting Lines Example: Using Three 200-VAC, 2-kW Heaters Normal

| 17.3 A — 200 V À Load 200 V Product — } 17,3 A+ To CT input

Product] To CT input The current when each phase is normal is 17.3 A (= V3 x 10 A). Burnout Burnout Burnout 10 A Burnout

200V Product — 200V Product To CT input To CT input Ÿ LS Y 15 A CT 10 À CT Product —T Product —T To CT input | To CT input Current when there is a burnout = 10 À x V3 x Current when there is a burnout = 10 À x V3 x (3/2) = 15 A (1/43) = 10 À The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load line is as fol- lows: (Heater burnout detection current) = (17.3 + 15) / 2 = 16.1 [A] The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows: (Heater burnout detection current) = (17.3 + 10) / 2 = 13.65 [A] To enable detection in either case, use 16.1 À as the heater burnout detection current.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 Star Connecting Lines Example: Using Three 200-VAC, 2-kW Heaters Normal

200 V Load (such as a heater) 200 V

200 V Product I To CT input 5BÀ— CT Product ____] To CT input The current when each phase is normal is 5.8 A (= 10 À x (1 /V3)) Burnout Burnout SA

Load (such as a heater) | 9 200 V 200 V 200 V 200 V D 5A— 5A— NZ 200 V Product _T 200 V Product _T Ÿ To CT input V To CT input | Burnout 5A> CT CT Product Product —T To CT input To CT input Current when there is a burnout = 10 A x (1/3) Current when there is a burnout = 10 À x (1/\3) x (V3/2) = 5 À x (3/2) = 5 À The heater burnout detection current for this connecting line is 5.4 A (= (5.8 +

200 V 200 V 10A AN) Product TI To CT input Bumout 5 A 10 A AN 7 CT 7 CT 200V Product __T Co 200V Product __T To CT input To CT input 200V à 20ov Ÿ0A> 200 V 200 V QN Bumout ee CT CT Product Product To CT input | To CT input Current when there is a burnout = 10 À x (1/2) Current when there is a burnout = 0 À =5A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the common is as fol- lows: Heater burnout detection current = (10 + 5)/2=7.5 [A] The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows: Heater burnout detection current = (10 + 0)/2 = 5 [A] To enable detection in either case, use 7.5 A as the heater burnout detection current.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 3-10-5 Settings: HB Alarm To activate the heater burnout alarm, set the HB ON/OFF parameter to ON in the advanced function setting level and set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 and Heater Burnout Detection 2 parameters in the adjustment level. Operating Procedure Operation Level Initial Setting Level ED —

Initial Setting Level Dior (mime)

[a] 1 É Hal BRE oN Operation Level

E 25 Es in Adjustment Level

Move to the advanced function setting level. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Select Move to Advanced Function Setting Level by pressing the ©) Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving to the Ad- vanced Function Setting Level.) Press the F1 Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level. The top parameter in the advanced function setting level is displayed. Select the Heater Burnout Detection parameter by pressing the F2 Key. Check that this parameter is set to ON (the default). Next, set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter. # Setting Heater Burnout Detection PV/SP Adjustment Level Display Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Heater Burnout Detection 1

Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level. Press the at least one second to move to the operation level. Press the Key for less than one second to move from the operation level to the adjustment level. Select the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor parameter by pressing the Key. Check the current value. Next, set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter. Select the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter by pressing the Le Key. Refer to Calculating Detection Current Values on page 75 on when mak- ing the settings.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10

9. For this example, set 2.5. To return to the operation level, press th

Key for less than one second. 3-10-6 Settings: Heater Short Alarm To activate the HS alarm, set the HS Alarm Use parameter to ON in the advanced function setting level and set the HS Alarm 1 and HS Alarm 2 parameters in the adjustment level. Operating Procedure This procedure sets the HS Alarm 1 parameter to 2.5. # Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level The HS Alarm Use parameter setting is already ON by default, so set the HS Alarm 1 parameter. Operation Level ÊT PV/SP [a] JE = L 2 Es 100 Initial Setting Level D - Input Type NE put Typi E LN-É Initial Setting Level MI, E AMar Es 169 Advanced Function Setting Level = = Move to the NI L |Advanced L NL E Function EH aff ]Seting Level HS Alarm HS LI use

Move to the advanced function setting level. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Select Move to Advanced Function Setting Level by pressing the ©) Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving to the Ad- vanced Function Setting Level.) Press the F1 Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level. The top parameter in the advanced function setting level is displayed. Select the HS Alarm Use parameter by pressing the E Key. Check that this parameter is set to ON (the default). Next, set the HS Alarm 1 parameter.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 HS Alarm Settings Operation Level 5. Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced = PVISP function setting level to the initial setting level. Press the 5 un at least one second to move to the operation level. E 2 Es ion Adjustment Level 6. Press the Key for less than one second to move from the operation BE; 1] Adiustment Level level to the adjustment level. EL cl ui |Display (mm

3-10-7 Settings: Heater Overcurrent Alarm To activate heater overcurrent alarm, set the Heater Overcurrent Use parame- ter to ON in the advanced function setting level and set the Heater Overcur- rent Detection 1 and Heater Overcurrent Detection 2 parameters in the adjustment level. Operating Procedure This procedure sets the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter to 20.0. # Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level The default setting for the Heater Overcurrent Use parameter is ON, so set the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter. Operation Level 1. Move to the advanced function setting level. = ZE |PvsP ptet er or el as three seconds to move from the operation Ë L2 g level. BE (00 Initial Setting Level 2. Press the Fe Key to select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level CT Input Type parameter. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving to E LIN — E the Advanced Function Setting Level.) En 5 Initial Setting Level 8. Press the F1 Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 Advanced Function Setting Level The top parameter in the advanced function setting level is displayed. = = Move to the N1 7 L | Advanced EL NL E Function EE _offF]|Settng Level [=] = jiHeater 4. Press the Key to select the Heater Overcurrent Use parameter. G OL L Overcurrent Check that this parameter is set to ON (the default), and then set the Don ôN Use Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter. ODD W # Setting Heater Overcurrent Detection Operation Level 5. Press the Key for at least one second to move from DE PVISP function setting level to the initial setting level. Press the = un at least one second to move to the operation level. E 2 Es in Adjustment Level 6. Press the Key for less than one second to move from the operation en 1] Adiustment Level level to the adjustment level. EL Ac ui |Dispiay [mm [=] F 1 | Heater Current 7. Press the € Key to select the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor parameter. G L E { | 1 Value Monitor Check the current value, and then set the Heater Overcurrent Detection ER C0 parameter. — 8. Press the ce] Key to select the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter. [=] Heater (al rm! Overcurrent Refer to Calculating Detection Current Values on page 75 when settin ÛL 1! 1g g g Dies CH Detection 1 the values. (mimi) Ut =] =r 9. For this example, set 20.0. To return to the operation level, press the E OL 1! Key for less than one second. ESS cn

Setting the No. 3 Display

3-11 Setting the No. 3 Display This section describes how to set the No. 3 Display (E5AN/EN). The Multi-SP, MV, or soak time remain can be displayed on the No. 3 display. 3-11-1 PV/SP Display Selection Note MV Display for Heating and Cooling Control

The following table shows the set values and display contents for the PV/SP Display selection. Set value Display contents Only PV/SP is displayed (with no No. 3 display.) PV/SP/Multi-SP and PV/SP/MV are displayed in order. (See note.) PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Multi-SP are displayed in order. (See note.) Only PV/SP/Multi-SP is displayed. Only PV/SP/MV is displayed. (See note.) PV/SP/Multi-SP and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order. ofuls[wln]-le PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order. (See note.) 7 Only PV/SP/Soak time remain is displayed. + A 2-level display is set when shipped from the factory. (set value: 0) A 3-level display is activated if parameters are initialized. (set value: 4) For details on setting the MV for heating and cooling control, refer to MV Dis- play for Heating and Cooling Control below. When 1, 2, 5, or 6 is selected, press the &] Key to display the next value set for the PV/SP display (display 2). Example: When the PV/SP Display Screen Parameter Is Set to 2 Operation Level PV/SP (Display 1) press the PV/SP (Display 2) UE © DT bi] ET CS Edky EŸ 25 Inn —+ Inn LE LH Doom cnn! BE 6p9 Ben 500 =) G

PVISP/MV PVISPMUII-SP

Select either the manipulated variable (heating) or manipulated variable (cool- ing) as the MV to be displayed for PV/SP/MV during heating and cooling con- trol. The MV Display Selection parameter is displayed only when heating/ cooling control is being performed and PV/SP/MV is selected in the PV/SP Display Screen parameter or a Monitor/Setting ltem Display parameter. Parameter name Set value Symbol Display contents MV Display Selection |O a Manipulated variable (heating) [ee] £-û Manipulated variable (cooling)

Setting the No. 3 Display

Operating Procedure Operation Level Se PV/SP 3° 25

Initial Setting Level Input Type Initial Setting Level =] = Move to = Ma] Advanced En - 169 Function Setting on Level Advanced Function Setting Level

(= = Initialization aff Don SES Advanced Function Setting Level =] PV/SP Display = SPdF Screen Selection

Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Press the E Key to select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter. Use the M Key to enter the password (“-169”). It is possible to move to the advanced function setting level by either pressing the €] Key or waiting two seconds without pressing any key. Press the E Key to select the PV/SP Display Screen Selection parame- ter. Use the A] and M Keys to set 2. Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level. The MV will be displayed on the No. 3 display. Press the [# Key to confirm that the Multi-SP is displayed on the No. 3 display.

Setting the No. 3 Display Section 3-11

Shifting Input Values Section 4-1 4-1 Shifting Input Values 4-1-1 Shifting Inputs The input shift matched to the sensor currently selected in the Input Type parameter is displayed. + A 2-point shift is applied for infrared temperature sensors. À 2-point shift can also be used if the Input Shift Type parameter (advanced function set- ting level) is set to INS2 for a thermocouple or platinum resistance ther- mometer. There is no shift for analog inputs. Use scaling for fine adjustments. int shift With a 1-point shift, the value set for the Temperature Input Shift parame- MG our Sa ter (adjustment level) is applied to each point in the entire temperature input range. For example, if the input shift value is set to 1.2°C, the pro- cess value is treated as 201.2°C after the input shift is applied when the measured process value is 200°C. Temperature Upper limit L-------------- After shifting Before shifting Input shift value

Lower limit 5 Input Operating Procedure In this example, the input from a K sensor is shifted by 1°C using a 1-point input shift. Operation Level Operation Level ET nm En 200 BE cu Adjustment Level 1. Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level. =] Adjustment E: L Adi Level Display [= mc) [es jenm Temperature 2. Select the Temperature Input Shift parameter by pressing the €] Key. OT — Ë L NS Input Shift Es 00 Dr = 3. Press the [A] or M1 Key to set 1.0. mi nt £ E LIN] BES 18 Operation Level 4. To return to the operation level, press the Key. The process value is BE 1°C larger than before the shift was applied. (= nl !

1,2,3.. When an ES1B Infrared Temperature Sensor is connected to the E5CN, an offset of several degrees to several tens of a degree can occur. For this reason, offset the readout value using a 1-point or 2-point shift as described in this section. This offset occurs because a bias current for detect- ing a Controller sensor error flows to the output impedance of the infrared temperature sensor.

1. Set a temperature range matching the input specifications of the infrared

temperature sensor. (The ES1B can be used with the ESC IN only for a ther- mocouple/resistance thermometer universal input.)

2. Prepare a thermometer capable of measuring the temperature of the con-

trol target as shown in Figure 1 so that a 1-point shift or 2-point shift can be carried out.

8. The E53-CNL I IPUIN2 (for ESCN), ESAN-CIIPCI-N, or ESEN- TI IPCI-N

has a built-in external power supply for ES1B Infrared Temperature Sen- sors. These E5CN models can be used as the power supply when using ES1B. When ES1B are used with other E5SCN models, provide a separate power supply for the Infrared Temperature Sensors.

Output SA ! (B) Thermometer Figure 1 Offset Configuration for an Infrared Temperature Sensor Method for a 1-point Shift 1,2,3... 1. _Inthe configuration shown in Figure 1, bring the set point to near the value at which the temperature of the control target is to be controlled. Assume that the control target temperature (C) and the thermometer temperature (B) are the same.

2. Check the thermometer temperature (B) and the Controller readout (A).

• Shifting Input Values Section 4-1 Method for a 2-point Use a 2-point input shift if you want to increase the accuracy of the readout Shift values across the range of the Sensor. 1,2,3 p. 1
• . Shiftthe Controller readout at two points, near room temperature and near the value at which the temperature of the control target is to be controlled. For this reason, check the thermometer temperature (B) and Controller readout (A) with the thermometer temperature near room temperature and near the set point. + Ytis the Controller readout at room temperature before shifting and X1 is the Controller readout at room temperature after shifting. + Y2is the Controller readout at the set temperature before shifting and X2 is the Controller readout at the set temperature after shifting. + Set the upper-limit temperature input shift and the lower-limit temper- ature input shift using the following formulas based on the tempera- tures before shifting (Y1 and Y2), the temperatures after shifting (X1 and X2), the set temperature upper limit (YH), and the set temperature lower limit (YL). The shift is illustrated in Figure 3. After shifting Upper-limit temperature input [7 shift value (e.g., 52.7°C) LNSH ‘Before shifting Controller readout (A) YH: Set temperature upper limit {e.g., 260°C) DE X2: Controller readout after shifting (eg. 110°C) Y2: Controller readout before shiftng - (e.g p. 105
• °C) Ÿ1: Controller readout before shiting e.g p. 40
• °C) X1: Controller readout after shifting - (e.9 °C) Lower-limit temperature input,” k4: Room temper 260°C shift value (e.g., -27.3°C) ASE ."0 aturo (09. 29.0) X2: Near set point (e.g., 110°C) YL: Set temperature lower limit (e.g., 0°C) Control target temperature (B) Figure 3 Illustration of 2-Point Shift a. Lower-limit temperature input shift value X {0x2 — V2) — (X1 — Y1)}+ (KA — V1) b. Upper-limit temperature input shift value _ YH=Y1 | Y2-Y1 X {0x2 — V2) — (X1 — Y1)}+ (KA — V1) p. 25

3. After setting the calculated values to &#SL and &: N5H, check the Controller

readout (A) and thermometer temperature (B).

4. Here, offsets are set at two points, near room temperature and near the set

point. To improve accuracy within the measurement temperature range, another point in the measurement temperature range other than the set point should be set instead of room temperature.

Alarm Hysteresis Section 4-2 Example of a 2-point In this example, we use the ES1B K 0 to 260°C specification. In equations 1 Temperature Input and 2, the set temperature lower limit YL is 0°C and the set temperature upper Shift limit YH is 260°C. Check the temperature of the control target. The temperature input offset values can be calculated as shown below when the Controller readout Y1 is 40°C for a room temperature X1 of 25°C and when the Controller readout Y2 is 105°C for a set point temperature X2 of 110°C. Lower-limit Temperature Input Shift Value ET — np |Lowerlimit : . R LANGE Temperature cnst = 0-40, {110 - 105) - (25 — 40)} + (25 — 40) = 27.3 (0) =) Zn | Input Shift 105 — 40 PES -211.1]Value Upper-limit Temperature Input Shift Value OT — Upper-limit _, 260 — 40 EL MG HIempgraure CASH = DT x (110 — 105) — (25 — 40)} + (25 — 40) = 52.7 (°C) = C: Input Shift 5 DIDIes Ge. nm (mimi) : Value 4-2 Alarm Hysteresis - The hysteresis of alarm outputs when alarms are switched ON/OFF can be set as follows: alarm Low: it alarm Alarm hysteresis Alarm hysteresis ON ------- ON OFF OFF nt À Alarm value Alarm value + Alarm hysteresis is set independently for each alarm in the Alarm Hyster- esis 1 to Alarm Hysteresis 3 parameters (initial setting level). - The default is 0.2 (°C/°F) for Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs and 0.02% FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs. 4-2-1 Standby Sequence + The standby sequence can be used so that an alarm will not be output until the process value leaves the alarm range once and then enters it again. + For example, with a lower limit alarm, the process value will normally be below the set point, i.e., within the alarm range, when the power supply is turned ON, causing an alarm to be output. If the lower limit alarm with a standby sequence is selected, an alarm will not be output until the process value increases above the alarm set value, i.e., until it leaves the alarm range, and then falls back below the alarm set value. Restart - The standby sequence is canceled when an alarm is output. It is, how- ever, restarted later by the Standby Sequence Reset parameter (advanced function setting level). For details, refer to the Standby Sequence Reset parameter in SECTION 5 Parameters.

Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs Section 4-3 4-2-2 Alarm Latch - The alarm latch can be used to keep the alarm output ON until the latch is canceled regardless of the temperature once the alarm output has turned ON. Any of the following methods can be used to clear the alarm latch. - Turn OFF the power supply. (The alarm latch is also cleared by switching to the initial setting level, communications setting level, advanced function setting level, or calibration level.) + Use the PF Key. + Use an event input. For details on setting the PF Key, refer to 4-19 Setting the PF Key. For details on setting events, refer to 4-5 Using Event Inputs. Summary of Alarm The following figure summarizes the operation of alarms when the Alarm Type Operation parameter is set to “lower-limit alarm with standby sequence” and “close in alarm” is set. Alarm type: Lower-limit alarm with standby sequence

PV. Alarm value » | -- Alarm hysteresis 3 > Time Standby sequence canceled == ON Alarm OFF pee ON (closed) Output OFF (open) Parameters Symbol Parameter: level Description ALH% Alarm 1 to 3 Hysteresis: Initial setting level Alarm RESE Standby Sequence: Advanced function setting level Alarm Note *= !to 7 4-3 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs 4-3-1 Analog Input + When an analog input is selected, scaling can be performed as needed by the control application. Scalino L Limit” Scaling is set in the Scaling Upper Limit, Scaling Lower Limit, and Deci- L N - carng ower Lim mal Point parameters (initial setting level). These parameters cannot be used when a temperature input is selected. + The Scaling Upper Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the upper limit value of input, and the Scaling Lower Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the lower-limit value of input. The Decimal Point parameter specifies the number of digits below the decimal point. NI J _ H Scaling Upper Limit 10 Decimal Point

Executing Heating/Cooling Control Section 4-4 + The following figure shows a scaling example for a 4 to 20 mV input. After scaling, the humidity can be directly read. Here, one place below the decimal point is set. Display (humidity) [Upper limit (95.0%) Lower limit (10.0%) a + Input (mA)

Operating Procedure In this example scaling is set to display 4 to 20 mA as 10.0% to 95.0%. Initial Setting Level 1. Press the [O] Key for three seconds to move from the operation level to BE ni L lnputType the initial setting level. EE LN EL E JOm rl Sa ui BE nr m Scaling Upper 2. Select Scaling Upper Limit parameter by pressing the € Key. E LIN TT] Limit FSs (0

8. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for one second.

4-4 Executing Heating/Cooling Control 4-4-1 Heating/Cooling Control Heating/cooling control can be used on the E5CN- MI ]-500 (with an E53- CNQUIIN2), ESCN-12M01-500, ESAN-[I3LIMC1-500-N or ESEN-18L IMC I- 500-N. Heating/cooling control operates when H-£f (heating/cooling) is selected for the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter.

Executing Heating/Cooling Control Section 4-4 Example: E5CN The following functions are assigned to outputs in the initial status. Parameter name Symbol Initial status Control Output 1 Assignment out ! Control output for heating Control Output 2 Assignment aùte Not assigned. Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Süb ! Alarm 1 Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment SUB Alarm 2 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment SUb3 Alarm 3 (E5AN/EN only) Each output assignment is automatically initialized as shown below when the control mode is changed.

Parameter name Symbol Without control output 2 With control output 2 Standard Heating/cooling Standard Heating/cooling Control Output 1 oùt Control output Control output Control output Control output Assignment (heating) (heating) (heating) (heating) Control Output 2 oùte Not assigned. (See | Not assigned. (See | Not assigned. Control output (coo- Assignment note 1.) note 1.) ing) Auxiliary Output 1 Süb! Alarm 1 (See note |Alarm 1 (See note |Alarm 1 (See note | Alarm 1 (See note Assignment 2.) 2.) 2.) 2.) Auxiliary Output 2 Sübe Alarm 2 (See note | Control output (coo- | Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Assignment 3.) ing) (See note 3.) Example: E5GN Parameter name Symbol Standard Heating/cooling Control Output 1 oùt Control output Control output Assignment (heating) (heating) Auxiliary Output 1 Süb! Alarm 1 (See note | Control output (coo- Assignment 2.) ing) Auxiliary Output 2 Sübe Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Assignment Note (1) No parameter assignment is displayed because there is no control output (2) The output set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter becomes the program END output unless the program pattern is OFF. (3) For the ESAN/EN, the Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameter is set for control output (cooling) (the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter is set for alarm 2). + The heating/cooling operation of the control outputs will switch when the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter is set to “direct.” + When DRS (Invert Direct/Reverse Operation) is assigned for an Event Input Assignment (1 or 2), control will start with the contents set for the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter inverted when the event input turns ON, and with the contents left according to the setting when the event input turns OFF. For details on event inputs and control combined with the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter, refer to Control by Inverting Direct/ Reverse Operation on page 103. + When heating/cooling control is selected, the Dead Band and Cooling Coefficient parameters can be used.

Executing Heating/Cooling Control

Dead Band + For heating/cooling control, the dead band is set with the set point as its center. The dead band width is the set value of the Dead Band parameter (adjustment level). Setting a negative value produces an overlapping band. + If an overlapping band is set, the bumpless function may not operate when switching between manual operation and automatic operation. - The default is 0.0 EU for Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Ther- mometer Universal Inputs and 0.00% FS for Conirollers with Analog Inputs. Dead band: Dead band Overlapping dead band: Dead Output L,Widih = À positive value Output L, band width = À negative value Heating Cooling Heating Cooling side side side side ô PV ô pv

Set point Cooling Coefficient Output P for control output assigned to heating side

Set point P for control output assigned to heating side x 0.8

Set point If the heating characteristics and cooling characteristics of the control object are very different and good control characteristics cannot be achieved with the same PID constants, the cooling coefficient can be used to adjust the propor- tional band (P) for the control output assigned to the cooling side. Use this to achieve balanced control between the heating side and cooling side. The pro- portional bands (P) for the control outputs assigned to the heating/cooling sides can be calculated using the following equations. P for control output assigned to heating side = P P for control output assigned to cooling side = P for control output assigned to heating side x cooling coefficient The cooling coefficient is multiplied by the P for the control output assigned to the heating side to obtain control with characteristics that differ from those of the control output assigned to the heating side. Output P for control output | assigned to heat- ing side x 1.0,” “P for control output assigned to heat- ,#7 ing side x 1.0 P for control output assigned to cooling side

P for control output assigned to cooling side aSsigned to heating side

Set point P for control output assigned to heating side x 1.5 By executing AT during heating/cooling control, the cooling coefficient can be automatically calculated along with the PID parameters. Parameter name Default Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjust- ment Setting rage OFF: Disabled, ON: Enabled OFF If there is strong non-linear gain for the cooling characteristics, such as when cooling water boils for cooling control, it may not be possible to obtain the opti- mum cooling coefficient at the Controller, and control may take the form of

Executing Heating/Cooling Control Section 4-4 oscillating waves. If that occurs, increase the proportional band or the cooling coefficient to improve control. 4-4-2 Settings To set heating/cooling control, set the Standard or Heating/Cooling, Dead Band, and Cooling Coefficient parameters. Setting Heating/Cooling Control Operating Procedure Standard or heating/cooling = Heating/cooling Initial Setting Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. [=] Standard or Ë a - HE Heating/

Cooling = CENT Be SENd

2. Select “heating/cooling control” in the initial setting level.

Using Event Inputs Section 4-5 4-5 Using Event Inputs 4-5-1 Event Input Settings + Event inputs can be used for Multi-SP, RUN/STOP, Auto/Manual Switch, Program Start, Invert Direct/Reverse Operation, 100% AT Execute/Can- cel, 40% AT Execute/Cancel, Setting Change Enable/Disable, and Alarm Latch Cancel. + Of these, only the number of event inputs (0 to 2) set in the Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter (initial setting level) are used for the multi-SP function. + Of these, only the number of event inputs (0 to 2) set in the Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter (initial setting level) are automatically assigned by the multi-SP function. Displays for event input assignments will not be displayed for inputs that are automatically assigned by the multi-SP func- tion. Event inputs 1 and 2 are used for the multi-SP function by models with four event inputs. + Event inputs can be used on the following models: E5CN-UIML1-500 with the E53-CNCIBLIN2 for the E5SCN ESAN/EN-CIME1-500-N with the E53-AKB for the E5SAN/EN + When using event inputs to switch the multi-SP, the event input assign- ment display will not appear. Whether the set value and event input assignments 1 and 2 will be displayed or hidden is shown in the tables below. + Do not connect the contacts from the same switch to more than one ES IN Controllers. Models with Two Event Inputs, 1 and 2 Description of EV1 and EV2 operation EV1 and EV2 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign- ment 1 and 2 parameters. Event input assignment 1 Event input assignment 2 Number of Multi- 0 SP Uses Displayed (Multi-SP not used). Not displayed (Operation per- formed with two Multi-SP points.) Displayed (Event input 2 not used as multi-SP switch). EV1 will be used for the Multi- SP function to switch between set points 0 and 1. EV2 will perform the operation com- mand assigned using the Event Input Assignment 2 parameter. Not displayed (Operation performed with four Multi-SP points.) EV1 and EV2 will be used for the Multi-SP function to switch between set points O, 1,2, and 3.

Models Two Event Inputs, 3 and 4 Event input assignment 3 Event input assignment 4 Description of EV3 and EV4 operation Displayed (Multi-SP not used). EV3 and EV4 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign- ment 3 and 4 parameters. Not displayed (Operation per- formed with two Multi-SP points.) Displayed (Event input 4 not used as multi-SP switch). EV3 will be used for the Multi- SP function to switch between set points 0 and 1. EV4 will perform the operation com- mand assigned using the Event Input Assignment 2 parameter. Not displayed (Operation performed with four Multi-SP points.) EV3 and EV4 will be used for the Multi-SP function to switch between set points O, 1,2, and 3. Models with Four Event Inputs, 1 to 4 Event input | Event input assignment 1 | assignment 2 Event input assignment 3 Event input assignment 4 Description of EV1, EV2, EV3, and EVA4 operation Displayed (Muiti-SP not used). EV1, EV2, EV3, and EVA will perform the operation com- mand assigned using the Event Input Assignment 1, 2, 3, and 4 parameters. Not displayed (Operation performed with two Muiti- SP points.) Displayed (Event inputs 2, 3, and 4 cannot be used for multi-SP switching.) EV1 will be used for the Multi- SP function to switch between set points 0 and 1. EV2, EVS, and EV4 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign- ment 2, 3, and parameters. Using Event Inputs Number of Multi- 0 SP Uses

Number of Multi- 0 SP Uses

Not displayed (Operation per- formed with four Multi-SP points.) Displayed (Event inputs 3 and 4 cannot be used for multi-SP switching.) EV1 and EV2 will be used for the Multi-SP function to switch between set points O, 1, 2, and 3. EV3 and EVA will per- form the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assignment 3 and 4 parameters.

Using Event Inputs Section 4-5 Two set points are set externally by using the Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter. + Switching is possible between two set points (0 and 1) by setting the Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter to 1. The default setting is 1 and does not need to be changed to switch between two set points. Set points 0 and 1 are specified by the status of event input 1. ESAN/EN EV1 ® + EVi © EV2 + a © 4 E53-CNL BL IN2 in the E53-AKB in the ESAN/EN-£ JM 1-500-N ESCN- ML -500 (for ESCN) (for ESAN/EN) 4-5-2 How to Use the Multi-SP Function The multi-SP function allows you to set up to four set points (SP 0 to 3) in the adjustment level. The set point can be switched by operating the keys on the front panel or by using external input signals (event inputs). Using Event Inputs = Two Event Inputs: Event Inputs 1 and 2 The following tables show the relationship between the ON/OFF combinations of event inputs 1 and 2 and the selected set points. Number of Multi-SP Uses = 1 Event input 1 Selected set point OFF Set point O ON Set point 1 Number of Multi-SP Uses = 2 Event input 1 Event input 2 Selected set point OFF OFF Set point O ON OFF Set point 1 OFF ON Set point 2 ON ON Set point 3 Using Key Operations You can select any of the set points O to 3 by changing the set value of the Multi-SP Uses parameter. The Multi-SP Uses parameter display conditions are as follows: + Ifthe Controller does not support event inputs, the Multi-SP Uses param- eter must be set to ON. + If the Controller supports event inputs, the Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter must be set to 0 and the Multi-SP Uses parameter must be set to ON.

Using Event Inputs Section 4-5 The following table shows the relationship between the Multi-SP Uses param- eter set value and the selected set point. Multi-SP Selected set point 0 Set point O 1 Set point 1 2 Set point 2 3 Set point 3 Note The set point can also be switched using communications. 4-5-3 Settings Switching between Set Points 0, 1, 2, and 3 Operating Procedure The following example sets the Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter to 2. Operation Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation ET ZE |PVSP level to the initial setting level. El L 2 Es (00 Number of Multi-SP Uses Setting 2. Select the Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter by pressing the €] Key. Er Number of E: E } — M Multi-SP Uses One ! (ein) ! CE 3. Usethe Key to set the parameter to 2. B Cr -M BE Ly Il [= mc) [es jenm| Set points 0, 1, 2 and 3 will be set according to the ON/OFF states of event inputs 1 and 2.

4-5-4 Operation Commands Other than Multi-SP The following table shows the functions assigned when an Event Input Assignment (1 or 2) is displayed. Setting Function NanE None SkoP RUN/STOP MANU Auto/Manual PRSE Program Start (See note 1.) dRS Invert Direct/Reverse Operation AE-e 100% AT Execute/Cancel RE- 1 40% AT Execute/Cancel (See note 2.) HEPE Setting Change Enable/Disable LAE Alarm Latch Cancel

Note Executing Run/Stop Control Switching between Auto and Manual Control Controlling the Start of the Simple Program Function Control by Inverting Direct/Reverse Operation (1) PRST (Program Start) can be set even when the Program Pattern param- eter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled. (2) This function can be set for heating/cooling control, but the function will be disabled. When any of the following functions is set for an Event Input Assignment parameter, the same function cannot be set for another Event Input Assign- ment parameter: STOP (RUN/STOP), MANU (Auto/Manual Switch), PRST (Program Start), DRS (Invert Direct/Reverse Operation), AT-2 (100% AT Exe- cute/Cancel), AT-1 (40% AT Execute/Cancel), WTPT (Setting Change Enable/ Disable), or LAT (Alarm Latch Cancel). Turn event inputs ON and OFF while the power is being supplied. Event input ON/OFF changes are detected for inputs of 50 ms or longer. (However, inputs of 250 ms or longer is determined using logic operations.) The functions are described in detail below. Event inputs 1 and 2 are taken as examples. When the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter is set to STOP (RUN/STOP), control is started when event input 1 or 2 turns OFF. Control is stopped when the input turns ON. Alarm outputs, however, will be according to the process value. The STOP indicator will light while control is stopped. Setting Input contact Status Event input 1 or 2 ON STOP Event input 1 or 2 OFF RUN When the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter is set to MANU (auto/manual), manual control will start when event input 1 or 2 turns ON. Auto control will start when the input turns OFF. The MANU indicator will light during manual control. Setting Input contact Status Event input 1 or 2 OFF Automatic Event input 1 or 2 ON Manual When the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter is set to PRST (program start), the program will start when event input 1 or 2 turns ON. The program will be reset when the input turns OFF and the RUN/ STOP status will automatically switch to STOP mode. If the program END out- put is ON, the program END output will turn OFF. Setting Input contact Status Event input 1 or 2 OFF Reset Event input 1 or 2 ON Start When DRS (Invert Direct/Reverse Operation) is set for the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter and the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter is set for reverse operation, control starts with direct operation (cooling control) when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and control starts with reverse operation (heating control) when the event input turns OFF. Setting Input Direct/Reverse Operation Status contact parameter Event input |OFF Direct operation (cooling) Direct operation (cooling) 1or2 Reverse operation (heating) | Reverse operation (heating)

Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values

Switching 100% AT Execute/Cancel Switching 40% AT Execute/Cancel Switching Setting Change Enable/ Disable Switching Alarm Latch Cancel Parameters Setting Input Direct/Reverse Operation Status contact parameter Event input |ON Direct operation (cooling) Reverse operation (heating) Tor2 Reverse operation (heating) | Direct operation (cooling) When AT-2 (100% AT Execute/Cancel) is set for either the Event Input Assign- ment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter, 100% AT will be executed when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be cancelled when the input turns OFF. Setting Input contact Status Event input 1 or 2 OFF 100% AT cancelled Event input 1 or 2 ON 100% AT executed When AT-1 (40% AT Execute/Cancel) is set for either the Event Input Assign- ment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter, 40% AT will be executed when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be cancelled when the input turns OFF. Setting Input contact Status Event input 1 or 2 OFF 40% AT cancelled Event input 1 or 2 ON 40% AT executed When WTPT (Setting Change Enable/Disable) is set for either the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter, the setting change will be disabled when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be enabled when the input turns OFF. Setting Input contact Status Event input 1 or 2 OFF Enabled Event input 1 or 2 ON Disabled When LAT (Alarm Latch Cancel) is set for either the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter, all alarm latches (alarms 1 to 8, heater burnout, HS alarm, and heater overcurrent latch) will be cancelled when event input 1 or 2 turns ON. Setting Input contact Status Event input 1 or 2 OFF —— Event input 1 or 2 ON Cancelled Symbol Parameter: level Description Er-1 Event Input Assignment 1: Initial setting level Function of Er -2 Event Input Assignment 2: Initial setting level event input func- EY-M Number of Multi-SP Uses: Initial setting level 4-6 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values 4-6-1 Set Point Limiter

The setting range of the set point is limited by the set point limiter. This func- tion can be used to prevent setting incorrect process values. The set point lim- iter is used to prevent the control target from reaching abnormal temperatures. |f the set point is not within the range set for the set point limiter as the result of changes to the Set Point Upper Limit or Set Point Lower Limit parameter, the set point will automatically be change to a value within the set

Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values Section 4-6 range. The upper- and lower-limit values of the set point limiter are set using the Set Point Upper Limit and Set Point Lower Limit parameters in the initial setting level. When the set point limiter is reset, the set point is forcibly changed to the upper- or lower-limit value of the set point limiter if the set point is out of the limiter range. Also, when the input type and the temperature unit, scaling upper-limit value, or lower-limit value are changed, the set point limiter is forcibly reset to the input setting range or the scaling upper- or lower-limit value. [ Input setting range ] Set point limiter : Setting range Ÿ Y 37 + Ÿ Set point ! à B :

! Upper limit | value changed X (Cannot be set.) Upper limit value changed —W Y__p Set point Input type changed : Y Set point A Set value Y Upper/lower limit values B Y Sensor upper/lower limit values © (Can be set.) Parameters Symbol Parameter: level Description SE-H Set Point Upper Limit: Initial setting level To limit the SP setting SE-L Set Point Lower Limit: Initial setting level To limit the SP setting 4-6-2 Setting Set the set point upper and lower limits in the Set Point Upper Limit and Set Point Lower Limit parameters in the initial setting level. In this example, it is assumed that the input type is set to a K thermocouple with a temperature range of -200 to 1300°C. —200 1300 Input setting range Set point limiter —100 1000 Setting the Set Point Upper-limit Value Operating Procedure Set Point Upper Limit = 1000 E — Input Type 1. Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation Ë M E PER level to the initial setting level SE LIN g level. (= mc) 6 [es jen(m Hi 1|Set Point 2. Select the Set Point Upper Limit parameter. [= ETh — H Upper-limit BE ‘300

Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate Section 4-7

4-7 Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate 4-7-1

SP Ramp The SP ramp function is used to restrict the width of changes in the set point as a rate of change. When the SP ramp function is enabled and the change width exceeds the specified rate of change, an area where the set point is restricted will be created, as shown in the following diagram. During the SP ramp, control will be performed not for the specified set point but rather for the set point restricted by the rate of change set for the SP ramp function.

SP after change | SP ramp set value SP before change - [SP ramp time unit (s/min)} Time Point of change The rate of change during SP ramp is specified using the SP Ramp Set Value and SP Ramp Time Unit parameters. The SP Ramp Set Value parameter is set to OFF by default, i.e., the SP ramp function is disabled. Changes in the ramp set point can be monitored in the Set Point During SP Ramp parameter (operation level). Use this parameter when monitoring SP ramp operation. The SP ramp function operates in the same way when switching the set point using the multi-SP function.

Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate

MV Upper Limit: Adjustment level MV Lower Limit: Adjustment level Set Point Upper Limit: Initial setting level Set Point Lower Limit: Initial setting level SP Ramp Set Value: Adjustment level To limit the manipulated variable To limit the manipulated variable To limit the SP setting To limit the SP setting To limit the SP rate of change SP Ramp Time Unit: Advanced function setting level Alarm SP Selection: Advanced function setting level Unit for setting the SP Alarm SP selection Operation at Startup Restrictions during SP Ramp Operation If the SP ramp function is enabled when the Controller is turned ON or when switching from STOP to RUN mode, the process value reaches the set point using the SP ramp function in the same way as when the set point is changed. In this case, operation is carried out with the process value treated as the set point before the change was made. The direction of the SP ramp changes according to the relationship between the process value and the set point. PV<SP PV > SP

SP ramp Set point PV Same rate of change Set point PV 4 ! Time : Time A A Power ON Power ON + Execution of auto-tuning starts after the end of the SP ramp. + When control is stopped or an error occurs, the SP ramp function is dis- abled.

Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level Section 4-8 Alarms during SP The operation of alarms during SP ramp operation depends on whether Ramp Operation alarms are set to be based on the ramp set point or the target set point (refer to the following diagrams). The set point to be used is set in the Alarm SP Selection parameter. (Refer to page 244.) Alarm SP Selection = Ramp SP (Alarm Type: 1 (Upper/Lower Limits)) Temperature Alarm output ON Alarm output ON Time Alarm SP Selection = Target SP (Alarm Type: 1 (Upper/Lower Limits)) Temperature Alarm output ON Alarm output ON Time 4-8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level To move to the advanced function setting level, you must first cancel the pro- tection applied by the Initial Setting/Communications Protect parameter. In the default setting, the advanced function setting level is protected and you cannot move to this setting level. 1,2,3... 1. Press the [O] and Keys simultaneously for at least three seconds in op- eration level. Note The key pressing time can be changed in the Move to Protect Level Time parameter (advanced function setting level). Protect Level 2. The Controller moves to the protect level, and the Operation/Adjustment

Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level Section 4-8 Operation Level

= TE 5 ca BES (08 D — E: L NE OC 6 (asian

10. To return to the operation level, press the

Press the [0] and ©) Keys simultaneously for at least one second to re- turn to the operation level. Move to the advanced function setting level. Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- ing the 2 Key. Press the Key, enter the password (-169), and then either press the E Key or leave the setting for at least two seconds to move to the ad- vanced function setting level from the initial setting level. To return to the initial setting level, press the ond. Key for at least one sec- Key for at least one second.

Using the Key Protect Level Section 4-9 4-9 Using the Key Protect Level 4-9-1 Protection + To move to the protect level, press the [O] and) Keys simultaneously for at least three seconds in operation level or adjustment level. (See note.) Note The key pressing time can be changed in the Move to Protect Level Time parameter (advanced function setting level). + The protect level protects parameters that are not changed during Con- troller operation until operation is started to prevent them from being mod- ified unintentionally. There are four types of protection: operation/adjustment protect, initial setting/communications protect, setting change protect, and PF Key pro- tect. + The protect level settings restrict the range of parameters that can be used. Operation/Adjustment The following table shows the relationship between set values and the range Protect of protection. Da] L Level Set value E ; 0 1 2 3 = ü Operation [PV [Canbediss [Canbedis |Canbedis- |Canbe dis- level played played played played PV/SP |Can be dis- |Canbe dis- |Canbe dis- |Can be dis- played and played and played and played changed changed changed Others | Can be dis- |Can be dis- |Cannot be Cannot be played and played and displayed and | displayed and changed changed moving to moving to other levels is | other levels is not possible … | not possible Adjustment level Can be dis- Cannot be Cannot be Cannot be played and displayed and | displayed and | displayed and changed moving to moving to moving to other levels is | other levels is | other levels is not possible | not possible | not possible + Parameters are not protected when the set value is set to O. + The default is O. Initial Setting/ This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting level, communica- Communications tions setting level, and advanced function setting level. TOC et Initial setting level ommunications ivanced function Protect E Initial setting level c icati Advanced functi E - LE mr L value setting level setting level L 0 Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach _- ! 1 Possible to reach Possible to reach Not possible to reach 2 Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Setting Change Protect

E MEPE oFF Der (asian

+ The default is 1. This protect level restricts key operations. Set value Description OFF Settings can be changed using key operations. ON Settings cannot be changed using key operations. (The protect level settings, however, can be changed.)

Using the Key Protect Level Section 4-9 + The default is OFF. + The all protect indication (Om) will light when setting change protect is set. PF Key Protect This protect level enables or disables PF Key operations. BE OCOL Set value Description E ! Dr E OFF PF Key enabled. ED 0’ F ON PF Key disabled (Operation as function key prohibited). + The default is OFF. 4-9-2 Entering the Password to Move to the Protect Level + Protect level can be moved to only by display the password display and entering the correct password. (The user can set any password in the Protect Level Password parameter. If no password is set (i.e., if the pass- word is set to O in the Protect Level Password parameter), the password input display to move to protect level will not be displayed and the protect level can be moved to directly. Operating Procedure Use the following procedure to move to protect level. EH Example with a Password of 1234 Operation Level OT PV/SP js L 2 Fes 100 Protect Level 1. Press the [O] and Keys simultaneously for at least the time set in the E cm = 17 [Move to Protect Move to Protect Level Time parameter to move from the operation level BE 11 1[1Y |Level to the protect level. BE th E omM=1r 2. Press the [A Key to set the parameter to 1234 (password input). e It Es 234 Protect Level 3. Move to the Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter by pressing th: E = ox | Operation/Adjust- or Fe] Key or leaving the setting for at least two seconds. E On] A! L | ment Protect Or nm (een) El M Example with No Password Set OT PV/SP (al TE (a: LL Eee 00 Protect Level Press the and Keys simultaneously for at least the time set in the E =ooL Operation/Adjust- Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter to move from the operation level to SO O1 L |ment Protect the protect level. Bon 0 When a password is not set, the Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter [jee will be displayed.

Using the Key Protect Level Section 4-9 Setting the Password Operating Procedure Use the following procedure to set the password to move to the protect level. M Example To set the Password to 1234 Operation Level OT PV/SP E L2 B=s 100 Protect Level 1. Press the [O] and Keys simultaneously for at least the time set in the E = DL |Operation/Adjust- Move to Protect Level Time parameter to move from the operation level | QI LE |ment Protect to the protect level. DID ul (ei im} u Protect Level 2. Select the Password to Move to Protect Level parameter by pressing the Key. (a Password to (=. PRL PF move to Protect EE. n| Level (mimi) El E om © 3. Press the [0] and A] Keys to set the parameter to 1234. E: PRE EP (To prevent setting the password incorrectly, the Æ and [O] Keys or Eee 1234 and Keys must be pressed simultaneously to set the password.) Note Protection cannot be cleared or changed without the password. Be careful not to forget it. If you forget the password, contact your OMRON sales representative. Communications - The Write Variable operation command can be used via communications Operation Command to write the password to the Move to Protect Level parameter. When the to Move to the Protect correct password is written, the display will change to the Operation/ Level Adjustment Protect parameter and writing the parameters in the protect level will be enabled. Note (1) Ifthe Write Variable operation command is used to write the wrong pass- word to the Move to Protect Level parameter after the correct parameter has been written, the Move to Protect Level parameter will be displayed and any Write Variable operation commandés to write parameters in the protect level will result in operation errors. (2) If a password is not set or if it is set to O, the display will change to the Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter and writing the parameters in the protect level will be enabled immediately.

PV Change Color Section 4-10 4-10 PV Change Color 4-10-1 PV Color Change Function Use the PV color change function to change the color of the PV display (No. 1 display). There are three display colors, orange, red, and green, and you can select from the following three modes and eight functions. F 21 re] PV Change + Constant: This mode displays orange, red, or green all the time. LULIT |Color + Linked to Alarm 1: This mode switches the PV display color from red to green when alarm 1 turns ON or from green to red when alarm 1 turns ON. + Linked to PV stable band: This mode switches the PV display color between red outside the PV stable band and green within PV stable band, or between green outside the PV stable band and red within PV stable band. Set the PV stable band in the PV Stable Band parameter (advanced func- tion setting level). + The default is FEd (red). The following tables shows the display functions that can be set using the PV color change function. Mode Setting Function PV change color Application example Constant |of£ Orange Constant: Orange To match the display color with other Controller models FREd Red Constant: Red To match the display color with other Controller models CRN Green Constant: Green To match the display color with other Controller models Linked to Alarm alarm 1 : value + > ALMA lit > PV

ALM1 not lit ALMA lit Application example R-& Red to Green Red Green To display the PV reached sig- nal G-R Green to Red Green Red To display error signals Linked to PV PV PV stable stable ; stable band ; band : band Low ! Within High i : PV

Low Within PV stable | High Application example band R-CR Red to Green to | Red Green Red To display stable status Red G-af Green to Green Orange Red To display stable status Orange to Red o-0R Orange to Orange Green Red To display stable status Green to Red

When the mode to link to the PV stable band is selected, the PV display color Will change according to whether the present value (PV) is lower than, within, or higher than the PV stable band shown in the following figure. The PV stable band is set with the SP as the center, as shown below. ; PV stable ; PV stable ; j band band

The default is 5.0 (°C/°F) for Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Ther- mometer Universal Inputs and 5.00% FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs. To display the PV in a stable green display when the PV is within +15.0°C of the set point to enable checking the control process at a glance, set the PV Change Color and PV Stable Band parameters. PV change color = F-G8 (Red to Green to Red) PV stable band = 15.0°C Release the protection before setting the PV Change Color and PV Stable Band parameters to enable moving to advanced function setting level. (Refer to steps 1 to 8 on page 108.)

1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation

level to the initial setting level.

2. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press-

3. Usethe Key to enter “-169” (the password).

Move to the advanced function setting level by pressing the 2 Key or leaving the setting for at least two seconds.

M ZI ELoLn Dom fn Con en ARR CL Advanced Function Setting Level 6. Select the PV Stable Band parameter by pressing the ©] Key. ET PV Stable E: py nu b Band FEs 50 C 7. Use the [A] Key to set the parameter to 15.0. ET on b y Le Ery BE 15.0

8. To return to the initial setting level, press the Key for at least one sec-

ond. Operation Level 9. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for at least one second. OT PV/SP

4-11 Alarm Delays 4-11-1 Alarm Delays + Delays can be set for the alarm outputs. ON and OFF delays can be set separately for alarms 1, 2, and 3. The ON and OFF delays for alarm 1 function only for the alarm function. If the alarm 1 function is set to be out- put as an OR with other alarms (i.e., the heater burnout alarm, HS alarm, heater overcurrent alarm, or input error output alarm), delays cannot be set for the other alarms. The ON and OFF delays for alarms 1, 2, and 3 also apply to the individual SUB1, SUB2, and SUB indicators and to communications status. The alarm ON delays will also function when power is turned ON or when moving from the initial setting level to opera- tion level (e.g., to software resets). AIl outputs will turn OFF and the OFF delays will not function when moving to the initial setting level or when an alarm is output for a A/D converter error. Operation of Alarm ON and OFF Delays (for an Upper-limit Alarm) Alarm setting -

Alarm hysteresis ON delay set time OFF delay Alarm status : set time Alarm Latch = OFF ON delay set time , - The alarm will not turn ON if the time that the alarm is ON is equal to or less than the ON delay set time. Also, the alarm will not turn OFF if the time that the alarm is OFF is equal to or less than the OFF delay set time.

• If an alarm turns OFF and then back ON during the ON delay time, the time will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns ON. Also, if an alarm turns ON and then back OFF during the OFF delay time, the time Will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns OFF. Alarm will not turn ON. Parameters Related to Alarm Delays

Initial Setting Level E Z Move to Ad- = Mo} vanced Function

(1) The defaults are 0, i.e., the ON and OFF delays are disabled. (2) The parameters are displayed when alarm functions are assigned and when the alarm type is set to any type but 0 (none), 12: LBA, or 13: PV change rate alarm. Use the following procedure to set ON and OFF delays for the alarm 1. An ON delay of 5 seconds and an OFF delay of 10 s will be set. Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level.

2. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press-

ing the [e] Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level.)

3. Press the F1 Key to enter the password (-169) and move from the initial

setting level to the advanced function setting level.

Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level.

Loop Burnout Alarm Section 4-12 Operation Level 9. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting ET PVISP level to the operation level.

EEs 100 4-12 Loop Burnout Alarm 4-12-1 Loop Burnout Alarm (LBA) + With a loop burnout alarm, there is assumed to be an error in the control loop if the control deviation (SP — PV) is greater than the threshold set in the LBA Level parameter and if the control deviation is not reduced by at least the value set in the LBA Detection Band parameter within the LBA detection time. + Loop burnout alarms are detected at the following times.

} LBA level Set point — D. LBA band} LBA level Ga ban LBA detec- [Tavene | tion time LBA detdction! EPA Jeteclion : < NpU > ï ! ! u (1) (5) (6) À (A

If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 1 and 2 (ï.e., the set point is approached) and the amount the control deviation is reduced is at least equal to the LBA band, the loop burnout alarm will remain OFF. The process value is within the LBA level between 3 and 4, and thus loop burnout alarms will not be detected. (The loop burnout alarm will remain OFF.) If the process value is outside the LBA level between 4 and 5 and the control deviation is not reduced by at least the LBA band within the LBA detection time, the loop burnout alarm will turn ON. If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 5 and 6 (i.e., the set point is approached) and the amount the control deviation is reduced is at least equal to the LBA band, the loop burnout alarm will turn OFF. If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 6 and 7 (i.e., the set point is approached) and the amount the control deviation is reduced is less than the LBA band, the loop burnout alarm will turn ON. - Ifthe LBA detection time, LBA level, LBA detection band, and PID set- tings are not appropriate, alarms may be detected inappropriately or alarms may not be output when necessary. + Loop burnout alarms may be detected if unexpectedly large disturbances occur continuously and a large deviation does not decrease. - If a loop burnout occurs when the set point is near the ambient tempera- ture, the temperature deviation in a steady state may be less than the LBA level, preventing detection of the loop burnout.

Loop Burnout Alarm Section 4-12 - Ifthe set point is so high or low that it cannot be reached even with a sat- urated manipulated variable, a temperature deviation may remain even in a steady state and a loop burnout may be detected. + Detection is not possible if a fault occurs that causes an increase in tem- perature while control is being applied to increase the temperature (e.g., an SSR short-circuit fault). + Detection is not possible if a fault occurs that causes a decrease in tem- perature while control is being applied to decrease the temperature (e.g., a heater burnout fault). Parameters Related to Loop Burnout Alarms Parameter name Symbol Setting range Remarks LBA Detection Time |LbA 0 to 9999 (s) Setting 0 disables the LBA function. LBA Level LbAL Controllers with Thermo- | 0.1 to 999.9 (°C/°F) (See | Default: 8.0 (°C/°F) couple/Resistance Ther- note.) mometer Universal Inputs Controllers with Analog 0.01 to 99.99 (%FS) Default: 10.00% FS Inputs LBA Band LEA Controllers with Thermo- | 0.0 to 999.9 (°C/°F) (See | Default: 3.0 (°C/°F) couple/Resistance Ther- note.) mometer Universal Inputs Controllers with Analog 0.00 to 99.99 (%FS) Default: 0.20% FS Inputs Note Set “None” as the unit for analog inputs. + À loop burnout alarm can be output by setting the alarm 1 type to 12 (LBA).

• A setting of 12 (LBA) can be set for alarm 2 or alarm 3, but the setting will be disabled. + Loop burnouts are not detected during SP ramp operation. + Loop burnouts are not detected during auto-tuning, manual operation, or while stopped. + If the alarm 1 latch is set to ON, the latch will be effective for the loop burnout alarm. Automatically Setting + The LBA detection time is automatically set by auto-tuning. the LBA Detection {Itis not set automatically, however, for heating/cooling control.) Time - Ifthe optimum LBA detection time is not obtained by auto-tuning, set the LBA Detection Time parameter (advanced function setting level).

2. Measure the time required for the width of change in the input to reach the

LBA band. Measurement time Temperature : TM ! Le + | :[: LBA band MV = 100% Time LBA detection time = Tm x 2

3. Setthe LBA Detection Time parameter to two times the measured time.

+ Set the control deviation when the control loop is working properly. - The default is 8.0 (°C/°F) for Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs and 10.00% FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs. - There is assumed to be an error in the control loop if the control deviation is greater than the threshold set in the LBA Level parameter and if the control deviation does not change by at least the value set in the LBA Band parameter. - The default is 8.0 (°C/°F) for Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs and 0.20% FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs. Perform the following procedure to use the loop burnout alarm. In this example, the LBA detection time is set to 10, the LBA level is set to 8.0, and the LBA band is set to 3.0.

1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation

level to the initial setting level.

Initial Setting Level Move to Ad- vanced Function Setting Level Advanced Functi on Setting Level

[anim jen} LE] on Setting Level LBA Level

Fi 1 ELAAL [mm ul (asia Lu on Setting Level ÊT LBA Band ELhAh Den ni (aime) “LU

Press the [=] Key to set the parameter to 12. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- ing the [e] Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level.) Press the F1 Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level. Select the LBA Detection Time parameter by pressing the F2] Key. Press the [=] Key to set the parameter to 10. Select the LBA Level parameter by pressing the € Key. Press the [=] Key to set the parameter to 8.0. (The default is 8.0.) Select the LBA Band parameter by pressing the € Key. . Press the [AI or 1 Key to set the parameter to 3.0. (The default is 3.0.) Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level.

Performing Manual Control Section 4-13 4-13 Performing Manual Control 4-13-1 Manual Operation - The manipulated variable can be set in manual mode if the PV/MV param- eter is displayed in the manual control level. The final MV used in auto- matic mode will be used as the initial manual MV when moving from automatic mode to manual mode. In manual mode, the change value will be saved immediately and reflected in the actual MV. - The automatic display return function will not operate in manual mode. + Balanceless-bumpless operation will be performed for the MV when switching from manual operation to automatic operation. (See note.) - If a power interruption occurs during manual operation, manual operation Will be restarted when power is restored using the same MV as when power was interrupted. + Switching between automatic and manual operation is possible for a max- imum of one million times. + Manual operation can be used only for PID control. Note In balanceless-bumpless operation, the MV before switching is used initially after the switch and then gradually changed to achieve the proper value after switch to prevent radical changes in the MV after switching operation. The overall manual operation is illustrated in the following figure. MV (%) Balanceless-bumpless S Fe ! TL o — Time ! MV switched OFF ON ! CC Manual 7) Power Qutomatic)— ——— Related Displays and Parameters Parameter name Symbol Level Remarks PV/MV (Manual MV) — Manual Control Level —5.0 to 105.0 (heating/cooling control: -105.0 to

Auto/Manual Switch A-" Operation Level Switches between automatic and manual modes. Auto/Manual Select Addi- | AMAd Advanced Function Setting Enables switching between automatic and man- tion Level ual modes. Note (1) Refer to 4-16 Output Adjustment Functions for information on the priority for the MV. (2) For Manual MV Limit Enable, this value will be between the MV upper limit and the MV lower limit.

Performing Manual Control Section 4-13 Using the PF Key to + When the PF Setting parameter is set to A-M (Auto/Manual), pressing the Move to the Manual PF Key for at least one second while in the adjustment or operation level Control Level Will change the mode to manual mode and move to the manual control level. During manual operation it is not possible to move to any displays other than PV/MV (Manual MV). Press the PF Key for at least one second from the PV/MV display in the manual control mode to change the mode to automatic mode, move to the operation level, and display the top parameter in the operation level. + When MANU (Auto/Manual) is selected for an event input, the Auto/Man- ual Switch parameter is not displayed. In that case, switching between auto and manual mode is executed by using an event input. Auto/Manual Select + The Auto/Manual Select Addition parameter must be set to ON in the Addi advanced function setting level before it is possible to move to manual mode. The default is OFF. Note (1) Priority of Manual MV and Other Functions Even when operation is stopped, the manual MV is given priority. Auto-tuning and self-tuning will stop when manual mode is entered. (2) Manual MV and SP Ramp If operating, the SP ramp function will continue even when manual mode is entered. Operating Procedure Use the following procedure to set the manipulated variable in manual mode. Operation Level ÈT PV/SP ET 20 (=. L 2 Es in Initial Setting Level Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. E - NL Input Type BE LNL EEE 5 Œ 2. Press the Key to select PID-ON/OFF and then select PID with the oO MNILI E LNCL Key. FEs Fid Initial Setting Level 3. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- E M = 17] Move to Ad- ing the Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving D 111101Y | vanced Function to the Advanced Function Setting Level.) EE. n| Setting Level (mimi) El Advanced Function Setting Level 4. Press the F1 Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level. E —ny—3) |Parameter E: L Ne E Initialization FES aff Advanced Function Setting Level 5. Select the Auto/Manual Select Addition parameter by pressing the Key. E Auto/Manual E: EMEd Select Addition Es off

Initial Setting Level

Use the [| Key to set the parameter to ON. Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level. Select the Auto/Manual Switch parameter by pressing the 2 Key. Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the manual control level. Press the [A] or F1 Key to set the manual MV. (In this example, the MV is set to 50.0%.) Note The manual MV setting must be saved (see page 18), but values changed with Key operations are reflected in the control output immediately. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the manual control level to the operation level. In this example, A-M (Auto/Manual) is set for the PF Setting parameter (E5SAN/EN only).

E £ £ k— PV/SP Fes 100 Initial Setting Level 1 - Input Type E LIN [n BE 5 E Far E LINCL Es Pid Initial Setting Level 8. [=] — Move to Ad- Ë EMa y vanced Function Ee n| Setting Level (ei) u Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Press the ©?) Key to select PID-ON/OFF and then select PID with the Key. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- ing the [e] Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level.)

Using the Transfer Output

BLNLE EES _ofF E AMAd FES aff

Press the F1 Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level. Select the Auto/Manual Select Addition parameter by pressing the Key. Use the Key to set the parameter to ON. Press the Ce] Key to select the PF Setting parameter and confirm that it is set to “A-M” (‘A-M’ is the default setting.) Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level. Press the PF Key for at least one second to move from the operation level to the manual control level. Press the [A] or F1 Key to set the manual MV. (In this example, the MV is set to 50.0%.) Note The manual MV setting must be saved (see page 18), but values

changed with key operations are reflected in the control output immediately. Press the PF Key to move from the manual control level to the operation level. 4-14 Using the Transfer Output 4-14-1 Transfer Output Function + To use a transfer output, change the setting for the Transfer Type parame-

ter to anything other than OFF. (This will enable the Transfer Output Upper Limit and Transfer Output Lower Limit parameters.)

Using the Transfer Output

Transfer Output Type Note + The operation is shown in the following table. æ Precision and User Calibration Control output 1 Control output 2 Transfer output destination Current output None, relay output, voltage Control output 1 output (for driving SSR) Relay output, voltage out- put (for driving SSR) None, relay output, voltage |None output (for driving SSR) Precision User calibration Simple transfer out- | Not specified. Not supported. put Transfer output type Symbol Setting range OFF (See note 1.) GFF = Set point SP SP lower limit to SP upper limit Set point during SP ramp | 5P-" SP lower limit to SP upper limit PV py Input setting range lower limit to input set- ting range upper limit or Scaling lower limit to scaling upper limit MV monitor (heating) [72 5.0 to 105.0 (heating/cooling control: 0.0 to 105.0) (See note 2.) MV monitor (cooling) EH 0.0 to 105.0 (See note 2.) (1) The default is OFF. (2) The output value will be different between when the Transfer Output Type parameter is set to a heating control output or cooling control output, and when the Control Output 1 Assignment parameter is set to a heating con- trol output or cooling control output. Example: When a Current Output Is Set to 4 to 20 mA and MV Monitor (Heating) ls Selected When used as a transfer output, 4.0 mA will be output for 0% and

20.0 mA will be output for 100%.

When used as a control output, 3.7 mA will be output for 0% and 20.3 mA will be output for 100% so that the actuator is controlled at 0% or 100%. Output current (mA) 203 — Transfer output value —-- Control output

{The above graph is for when the linear current output type is set to 4 to 20 mA.)

Using the Transfer Output

Transfer Scaling Operating Procedure Operation Level

+ Reverse scaling is possible by setting the Transfer Output Lower Limit parameter larger than the Transfer Output Upper Limit parameter. If the Transfer Output Lower Limit and Transfer Output Upper Limit parameters are set to the same value when 4 to 20 mA is set, the transfer output will be output continuously at 0% (4 mA). If the SP, SP during SP ramp, or PV is selected, the Transfer Output Lower Limit and Transfer Output Upper Limit parameters will be forcibly initialized to the respective upper and lower setting limits for changes in the upper and lower limits of the SP limiter and the temperature unit. If the MV for heating or MV for cooling is selected, the Transfer Output Lower Limit and Transfer Output Upper Limit parameters will be initialized to 100.0 and 0.0, respectively, when a switch is made between standard control and heating/cooling control using the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter. The output current when the linear current type is set to 4 to 20 mA, the transfer output upper limit is set to 90.0, and the transfer output lower limit is set to 10.0 is shown in the following graph. For scaling from 0.0% to 100.0%, the output for -5.0 to 0.0 will be the same value as for 0.0%, and the output for 100.0 to 105.0 will be the same value as for 100.0% Output current (mA)

É ! MV (2) Transfer output Transfer output lower limit upper limit {The above graph is for when the linear current output type is set to 4 to 20 mA.) The following procedure sets the transfer output for an SP range of -50 to

Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level.

+ The program will start when the Program Start parameter is changed from RSET to STRT. END will be displayed on the No. 2 display and the output assigned as the program end output will turn ON after the time set in the Soak Time parameter has expired in the wait band. The Program Pattern parameter can be used to select moving to STOP mode or continuing operation in RUN mode after the program ends. Parameters Related to the Simple Program Function Parameter name Symbol Set (monitor) values Unit Display level Program Pattern PERN OFF, STOP, CONT _ Initial setting level Program Start PRSE RSET, STRT _ Operation level Soak Time Safñk 1 to 9999 min orh Adjustment level Soak Time Unit E-ù m (minutes)/h (hours) — Advanced function set- ting level Wait Band WE -b OFF or 0.1 to 999.9 (See note 2.) |°C or °F (See notes 1 | Adjustment level and2.) Soak Time Remain |S#EF 0 to 9999 minorh Operation level Monitor (1) Set for Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Univer- sal Inputs. Set “None” as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs. (2) The setting unit of the Wait Band parameter is %FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs and the setting range is OFF or 0.01 to 99.99. Program Pattern Either of two program patterns can be selected. The simple program opera- tion will not be performed if the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF. H Pattern 1 (STOP) Control will stop and the STOP mode will be entered when the program has ended.

Automatically switches from RUN to STOP mode. H Pattern 2 (CONT) Control will continue in RUN mode when the program has ended.

ne [77 Wait band Set point + Ê Wait band À î * i RSET > STRT : Soak time + END display ‘ END output RUN mode continues.

Using the Simple Program Function Section 4-15 Starting Method Note Any of the following three methods can be used to start the simple program. + Setting the Program Start parameter to STRT. + Turning ON an event input. (The program start must be assigned to an event input. See note.) + Starting with an Operation Command using communications. (When the program start is not assigned to an event input.) When the simple program is started and reset, writing is performed to EEPROM. Be sure to consider the write life (1 million writes) of the EEPROM in the system design. When the program start is assigned to an event input, the Program Start parameter will function as a monitor display, and the RSET/ STRT displays can be used to check when the event input has started or reset the simple program. When this is done, the Program Start parameter func- tions as a monitor display only and cannot be changed using key operations. If the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, the event input assignment setting will be initialized to “None.” Soak Time and Wait Band Note Wait band Set point Wait band A ï not ï ï (1) @ @ CR) RSET — STRT Soak time remain Set point Set point The wait band is the band within which the process value is stable in respect to the set point. The soak time is measured within the wait band. The timer that measures the soak time operates only when the process value is within the wait band around the set point (i.e., SP + wait band). In the following dia- gram, the timer will be stopped between the start and (1), (2) and (3), and (4) and (5) and will measure the time only between (1) and (2), (3) and (4), and (5) and the end. If the wait band is set to OFF, the wait band will be treated as infinity and the timer will measure time continuously after changing from RSET to STRT.

Using the Simple Program Function Section 4-15 4-15-2 Operation at the Program End Note Operating Procedure

Display at the Program End When the program ends, the process value will be displayed on the No. 1 dis- play (see note) and the set point and “end” will be alternately displayed on the No. 2 display at 0.5 s intervals. One of the following displays: PV/SP, PV only, or PV/MV. E In 1! . IL tal el l Displayed altemately. DES —ENdt<—> 00.0 Program End Output The output assignment parameters can be used to assign the program END output to any output. The program END output can also be used in communi- cations status. E5CN/CN-U, E5AN/EN When the Program Pattern parameter is changed from OFF to STOP or CONT for the ESCN, E5CN-U, E5AN, or ESEN, the Auxiliary Output 1 Assign- ment parameter will automatically be set to the END output. When the Pro- gram Pattern parameter is changed from STOP or CONT to OFF, the Alarm 1 Output Assignment parameter will automatically be initialized to ALM1. E5GN When the Program Pattern parameter is changed from OFF to STOP or CONT for the E5GN, the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter will auto- matically be set to the END output. When the Program Pattern parameter is changed from STOP or CONT to OFF, the Alarm 1 Output Assignment param- eter will automatically be initialized to ALM1. When using heating/cooling con- trol and the Program Pattern parameter is changed from OFF to STOP or CONT, the END output will not be assigned to an output. Use the output assignment parameters to assign the program END output to the desired out- put. Clearing the Program End Status The program END output and display will be cleared when the Program Start parameter is changed from STRT to RSET. The setting is changed from STRT to RSET while the Program Start parameter is displayed. The program END status can also be cleared using an event. lf the program start function is assigned to an event, however, the program end status cannot be cleared from the Program Start parameter display, which will function only as a monitor display. Perform the following procedure to use the simple program function. In this example, the program pattern will be set to STOP, the soak time to 10 min, and the wait band to 3.

Using the Simple Program Function Section 4-15 Set point ! Wait band = 3 H 3 RSET”, STRT — Soak time = 10 min —— pie END display ——»> srop END output Operation Level OT PV/SP EF 25 Be 100 Initial Setting Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation D — Input Type level to the initial setting level. [es] Ni L

Initial Setting Level [=] PL 1 ns| Program Pattern TIV ES ofF E PERN Fes SkaP Operation Level 4. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting EF 25 PV/SP level to the operation level. Select the Program Pattern parameter by pressing the €] Key.

3. Use the [| Key to set the parameter to STOP.

es 00 Adjustment Level 5. Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level. (a Adjustment Level ! RS BL Ad ui Display (mm [jee Adjustment Level 6. Select the Soak Time parameter by pressing the E Key. [=] — Soak Time E 5 [a A n DT ! ([esjenm ; 7. Use the I Key to set the parameter to 10. (The soak time unit is set in \ Soak Time Unit parameter in the advanced function setting level. The de- [H fault is (minutes).

Using the Simple Program Function Section 4-15 4-15-3 Application Example Using a Simple Program Set point The program will be started by changing the setting of the Program Start parameter. The following example shows using a simple program with the pro- gram pattern set to STOP. :_ Wait band Soak time END display : END output : RUN/STOP status ! : ! !

+ The Program Start parameter was changed from RSET to STRT using either an event or key operations. + The RUN/STOP status automatically changes to RUN mode when the above operation is performed. (2) + The Program Start parameter was changed from STRT to RSET using either an event or key operations before the soak time expired. + The RUN/STOP status automatically changes to STOP mode when the above operation is performed. + The Program Start parameter is again changed from RSET to STRT using either an event or key opera- tions. + The RUN/STOP status will automatically change to RUN mode when the above operation is performed. + The RUN/STOP status automatically changes to STOP mode when soak time expires. + END flashes on the No. 2 display and the program END output turns ON. + The Program Start parameter is changed from STRT to RSET using either an event or key operations. - The END display is cleared and the program END output turns OFF. - Key operations are used to switch the RUN/STOP status to RUN with the Program Start parameter set to RSET (stopped). + Normal control operation is started. + The Program Start parameter is changed from RSET to STRT after the process value stabilizes. + The RUN/STOP status remains as RUN. - Key operations are used to change the RUN/STOP status to STOP (during program operation). + Measuring the soak time is continued within the wait band. (Measuring the soak time stops when the pro- cess value leaves the wait band.) + Key operations are used to change the RUN/STOP status to RUN. + Measuring the soak time is continued within the wait band (continuing from the time between (7) and (9)). (10) + The RUN/STOP status automatically changes to STOP mode when the measured time reaches the soak time. + END flashes on the No. 2 display and the program END output turns ON.

Output Adjustment Functions Section 4-16 4-16 Output Adjustment Functions 4-16-1 Output Limits + Output limits can be set to control the output using the upper and lower limits to the calculated MV. + The following MV takes priority over the MV limits. Manual MV (See note.) MV at stop MV at PV error Output ---- 100% MV upper limit F----------s MV lower limit E--- ;

770% Note When the manual MV limit is enabled, the manual MV will be re- stricted by the MV limit. For heating/cooling control, upper and lower limits are set of overall heat- ing/cooling control. (They cannot be set separately for heating/cooling.) Output À Heating MV Cooling MV

MV lower limit |-- MV upper limit |---- 4-16-2 MV at Stop The MV when control is stopped can be set. For heating/cooling control, the MV at stop will apply to the cooling side if the MV is negative and to the heating side if the MV is positive. When setting the MV when control is stopped, set the MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter (advanced function setting level) to ON. The default is 0.0, so an MV will not be output for either standard or heat- ing/cooling control. Parameter name Setting range Unit Default MV at STOP —5.0 to 105.0 for standard % 0.00 control —105.0 to 105.0 (heating/cool- ing control) Note The order of priority is as follows: Manual MV > MV at stop > MV at PV error.

Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter Section 4-17 4-16-3 MV at PV Error + The MV to be output for input errors can be set. The MV at stop takes priority when stopped and the manual MV takes pri- ority in manual mode. Parameter name Setting range Unit Default MV at PV ERROR |-5.0 to 105.0 for standard % 0.0 control —105.0 to 105.0 (heating/cool- ing control) Note The order of priority is as follows: Manual MV > MV at stop > MV at PV error. + The order of priority of the MVs is illustrated in the following diagram. MV upper limit MV at PV Error lasebte) Ÿ | RUN/STOP | Manipulated variable ÿ Pa ÿ L TA _ _ oc | © |—> output PID pl] 5 (e) Oo calculations À Input error Auto/manual switch Time EURE MV at Stop MV lower limit Note When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON, the setting range will be the MV lower limit to the MV upper limit. 4-17 Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter Extraction of Square Roots Extraction of Square Root Enable < For analog inputs, the Extraction of Square Root parameter is provided Œ — for inputs so that differential pressure-type flow meter signals can be E co HA directly input. = FF - The default setting for the Extraction of Square Root parameter is OFF. The Extraction of Square Root Enable parameter must be set to ON in order to use this function. Extraction of Square Root Low-cut + Ifthe PV input (i.e., the input before extracting the square root) is higher Point than 0.0% and lower than the low cut point set in the Extraction of = Co Square Root Low-Cut Point parameter, the results of extracting the E GUARP square root will be 0.0%. If the PV input is lower than 0.0% or higher Bees 02 than 100.0%, extraction of the square root will not be executed, so the result will be equal to the PV input. The low-cut point is set as normal- ized data for each input, with 0.0 as the lower limit and 100.0 as the upper limit for the input setting range.

Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter

Extraction of square root 100% FS Extraction of square rl root low-cut point / JS > 0 100% FS Argument 1 (Input Data) Parameter name Setting rage Unit Default Extraction of Square | OFF: Disabled, ON: Enabled |--- OFF Root Enable Extraction of Square |0.0 to 100.0 % 0.0 Root Low-cut Point Operating Procedure Operation Level OT PV/SP E cn Es in Initial Setting Level D - Input Type NE put Typl ELN-E Die nl Em u [el Extraction [nl = DR] of Square = Root Enable Fes GFf E [x] Extraction [es] ZI | of Square EE... -,, | Root Enable Es où et PV/SP E 25 Square Root = fo 0 Extraction of = n |Low-cut Point (al u

This procedure sets the Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point parameter to 10.0%. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Press the [?] Key to select the Extraction of Square Root Enable param- eter. Use the [AI Key to select ON. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level. Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level. Select the Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point parameter by press- ing the 2 Key.

Setting the Width of MV Variation Section 4-18 E cnao Extraction of 7. Usethe Key to set the parameter to 10.0. [on GE j7 | Square Root Eu. mn |Low-cut Point ODS tu Key to return to the operation level. OT PV/SP 7 ei 4-18 Setting the Width of MV Variation MV Change Rate Limit MV Change Rate Limit (Heating) + The MV change rate limit sets the maximum allowable width of change =] = in the MV per second. If the change in the MV exceeds this setting, the E an£ MV will be changed by the MV change rate limit until the calculated Ee nn value is reached. This function is disabled when the setting is 0.0. [en ien) LEE + The MV change rate limit does not function in the following situations: + In manual mode + During ST execution (Cannot be set when ST is ON.) + During AT execution + During ON/OFF control + While stopped (during MV at Stop output) + During MV at PV Error output Parameter name Setting rage Unit Default MV Change Rate 0.0 to 100.0 ls 0.0 Limit Operating Procedure This procedure sets the MV change rate limit to 5.0%/s. The related parame- ters are as follows:

ST = OFF Operation Level ÈT PV/SP ET 20 E L 2 Es in Initial Setting Level

1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation

Setting the Width of MV Variation Section 4-18 PiD.on/oFF 3 Use the [A Key to select 2-PID control. B rnbi BE LINLL FRS Pid E L ST 4. Press the Fe Key to select the ST parameter. 5 SE EEù a CNT ST 5. Press the F1 Key to select OFF. 5 SE Es _ôFr Operation Level 6. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting ET Z PV/SP level to the operation level. El 5 (=) L Een 18 Adjustment Level 7. Press the [0] Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level.

4-19 Setting the PF Key 4-19-1 PF Setting (Function Key) PF Setting + Pressing the PF Key for at least one second executes the operation set Œ — in the PF Setting parameter (E5AN/EN only). (= OC [ma] VF (al Êss A" Set value Symbol Setting Function OFF oFF Disabled Does not operate as a function key. RUN UN RUN Specifies RUN status. STOP ET STOP Specifies STOP status. R-S R-S RUN/STOP reverse Specifies reversing the RUN/STOP operation operation status. AT-2 RE -e 100% AT Specifies reversing the 100% AT Exe- Execute/Cancel cute/Cancel status. (See note 1.) AT-1 RE- 40% AT Specifies reversing the 40% AT Exe- Execute/Cancel cute/Cancel status. (See note 1.) LAT LAE Alarm Latch Cancel Specifies canceling all alarm latches. (See note 2.) A-M AM Auto/Manual Specifies reversing the Auto/Manual status. (See note 3.) PFDP PFdP Monitor/Setting Item Specifies the monitor/setting item dis- play. Select the monitor setting item according to the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters (advanced function setting level). Note (1) When AT cancel is specified, it means that AT is cancelled regardless of Monitor/Setting Item Monitor/Setting Item 1 E Ifem 5 E PFd 1e Es 145 Ie nm (en mn (mn u whether the AT currenily being executed is 100% AT or 40% AT. (2) Alarms 1 to 3, heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent latches are cancelled. (3) For details on auto/manual operations using the PF Key, refer to 4-13 Per- forming Manual Control. (4) Pressing the PF Key for at least one second executes operation accord- ing to the set value. When the Monitor/Setting ltem parameter is selected, however, the display is changed in order from Monitor/Setting ltem 1 to 5 each time the key is pressed. (5) This function is enabled when PF Key Protect is OFF. Setting the PF Setting parameter to the Monitor/Setting ltem makes it possi- ble to display monitor/setting items using the function key. The following table shows the details of the settings. For setting (monitor) ranges, refer to the applicable parameter.

Set Setting Remarks value Monitor/Setting Symbol 0 Disabled _ 1 PV/SP/Muiti-SP Can be set. (SP) - 2 PV/SP/MV (See note.) Can be set. (SP) — 3 PV/SP /Soak time remain Can be set. (SP) —— 4 Proportional band (P) Can be set. P 5 Integral time (l) Can be set. nu 6 Derivative time (D) Can be set. d 7 Alarm value 1 Can be set. A- 1 8 Alarm value upper limit 1 Can be set. AUH 9 Alarm value lower limit 1 Can be set. ALL 10 Alarm value 2 Can be set. fl-e 11 Alarm value upper limit 2 Can be set. ALoH 12 Alarm value lower limit 2 Can be set. Alet 13 Alarm value 3 Can be set. AL -3 14 Alarm value upper limit 3 Can be set. AL3H 15 Alarm value lower limit 3 Can be set. HET Note For details on MV settings for heating and cooling control, refer to MV Display for Heating and Cooling Control on page 84. Setting Monitor/Setting Items Pressing the PF Key in either the operation or adjustment level displays the applicable monitor/setting items. Press the PF Key to display in order Monitor/ Setting ltems 1 to 5. After Monitor/Setting ltem 5 has been displayed, the dis- play will switch to the top parameter in the operation level. Note (1) Items set as disabled in the Monitor/Setting ltems 1 to 5 parameters will Operating Procedure Operation Level ET PV/SP ET 20 [= L 2 Es in Initial Setting Level Input Type vanced Setting

not be displayed, and the display will skip to the next enabled setting. (2) While a monitor/setting item is being displayed, the display will be switched to the top parameter in the operation level if the € Key or the Key is pressed. This procedure sets the PF Setting parameter to PFDP, and the Monitor/Set- ting ltem 1 parameter to 7 (Alarm Value 1).

1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation

level to the initial setting level. 1, | Move to Ad- Function Level

BEù tu Monitor/Setting Item Level Et 4 | Monitor/Setting E IL 7 {|ltem Display 1 Oo nl [on mn} ui Press the Key to enter the password (-169). It is possible to move to the advanced function setting level by either pressing the [e] Key or wait- ing two seconds without pressing any key. Press the € Key to select the PF Setting parameter. Press the [| Key to select PFDP (Monitor/Setting Item). Press the Key to select the Monitor/Setting Item 1 parameter. Press the [=] Key to select 7 (Alarm Value 1). Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level.

10. Press the PF Key to display Alarm Value 1.

4-20 Counting Control Output ON/OFF Operations 4-20-1 Control Output ON/OFF Count Function With Control Output 1 and 2 ON/OFF outputs (relay outputs or voltage outputs for driving SSR), the number of times that a control output turns ON and OFF can be counted. Based on the control output ON/OFF count alarm set value, an alarm can be output and an error can be displayed if the set count value is exceeded. The default setting of the Control Output ON/OFF Alarm Setting parameter is

0. ON/OFF operations are not counted when this parameter is set to 0. To

enable counting ON/OFF operations, change the setting to a value other than

Counting Control Output ON/OFF Operations Section 4-20 Control Output ON/ This function is not displayed when the Control Output 1 ON/OFF Alarm Set- OFF Counter Monitor ting and the Control Output 2 ON/OFF Alarm Setting parameter are set to O, Function or when the control outputs are set for linear outputs. Parameter name Setting range Unit Default Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Monitor |0 to 9999 100times |0 Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Monitor |0 to 9999 100times |0 Display When ON/OFF Count Alarm Occurs When an ON/OFF count alarm occurs, the PV display in the No. 1 display shown below alternates with the FAL display on the No. 2 display.

+ PV/SP (Including the items displayed by setting the “PV/SP” Display Screen Selection parameter.) + PV/Manual MV, PV/SP/Manual MV + PV/SP displayed for the monitor/setting items Normal ON/OFF Count Alarm ET ET ï Psp E 25 E el dngtrs Be ‘00 ESS RALN| —> 100 Control Output ON/ If the ON/OFF counter exceeds the control output ON/OFF count alarm set OFF Count Alarm value, an ON/OFF count alarm will occur. The alarm status can be assigned to a control output or an auxiliary output, or it can be displayed at the Control- ler. The ON/OFF count alarm set value function is disabled by setting the ON/ OFF count alarm set value to O. Parameter name Setting range Unit Default Control Output 1 ON/OFF Alarm Set- | 0 to 9999 100 times 0 ting Control Output 2 ON/OFF Alarm Set- | 0 to 9999 100 times 0 ting ON/OFF Counter Reset Function The ON/OFF counter can be reset for a specific control output. Parameter name Setting range Unit Default ON/OFF Counter Reset 0: Disable the counter reset |-— 0 function. 1: Reset the control output 1 ON/OFF counter. 2: Reset the control output 2 ON/OFF counter. Note After the counter has been reset, the control output ON/OFF count monitor value will be automatically returned to O. If an error occurs in the control output ON/OFF counter data, the ON/OFF count monitor value will be set to 9999 and an ON/OFF count alarm will occur. The alarm can be cleared by resetting the ON/OFF counter.

Operating Procedure This procedure sets the Control Output 1 ON/OFF Alarm Setting parameter to 10 (1,000 times). Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Initial Setting Level 1. Press the BE —n1_ 12 /|Input Type O LNOL (al BE 5 Initial Setting Level 2. [el = Move to Ad- = FEMaY vanced Function Bon 1 Setting Level BE - 63 D = E L NE E Initialization Ees ff E ! (a F pal { | 1 ON/OFF Value parameter. Bon A | Count Alarm (aime) LH | Set Value el Control Output B AA {|rtoNorr Bon 1n | Count Alarm (ini) !U] Set Value Initial Setting Level 6. BE —n1_ 12 /|Iput Type E LNOL BE 5 Operation Level 7

Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- ing the 2 Key. Advanced Function Setting Level 3. Use the Key to enter the password (“169”). It is possible to move to — Parameter the advanced function setting level by either pressing the Le Key or wait- ing two seconds without pressing any key. Control Output 4. Press the Ce Key to select the Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Alarm Set Key for at least one second to move to the initial setting lev- Key for at least one second to move to the operation level. PV Status Display The PV in the PV/SP PV, or PV/Manual MV Display and the control and alarm Function status specified for the PV status display function are alternately displayed in 0.5-s cycles. Set value Symbol Function OFF GFF No PV status display Manual MANU MANU is alternately displayed during manual control. Stop SkaP STOP is alternately displayed while oper- ation is stopped. Alarm 1 AL ALMT is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status. Alarm 2 AL ALM2 is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status.

Displaying PV/SV Status Section 4-21 Set value Symbol Function Alarm 3 ALMA ALMB is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status. Alarm 1 to 3 OR status AL ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1,2, or 3 is set to ON. Heater Alarm (See note) [HA HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm, HS alarm, or heater over- current alarm is ON. + The default is OFF. Note “HA” can be selected for models that do not support heater burnout detection, SV Status Display Function Note

but the function will be disabled. Example: When STOP Is Selected for the PV Status Display Function When RUN/STOP PVISP is STOP ET CL SP] Aiternating En jpg] display PES 100] The SP, Blank, or Manual MV in the PV/SP, PV, or PV/Manual MV Display and the control and alarm status specified for the SV status display function are alternately displayed in 0.5-s cycles. Set value Symbol Function OFF GFF No SV status display Manual MANU MANU is alternately displayed during manual control. Stop SkaP STOP is alternately displayed while oper- ation is stopped. Alarm 1 AL ALMT is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status. Alarm 2 AL ALMP is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status. Alarm 3 AL ALMB3 is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status. Alarm 1 to 3 OR status AL ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1,2, or 3 is set to ON. Heater Alarm (See note) | HA HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm, HS alarm, or heater over- current alarm is ON. + The default is OFF. “HA” can be selected for models that do not support heater burnout detection, but the function will be disabled. Example: When ALM1 Is Selected for the SV Status Display Function Normal When ALM1 Is ON PVISP

Logic Operations Section 4-22 Operating Procedure This procedure sets the PV Status Display Function parameter to ALM1. Initial Setting Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. E NL Input Type

Initial Setting Level [el — Move to Ad- MI, E: AMas Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- ing the 2 Key. vanced Function Setting Level STE Die (mime) Advanced Function Setting Level 3. Use the M1 Key to enter the password (-169). It is possible to move to the BE hi 1 |Parameter advanced tancron seing level by siner pressing the € Key or waiting BE LINL IC |Initialization wo seconds without pressing any key.

5. Press the [I Key to select ALM1.

E PV Status Ë PY GE | vispiay Bes ALM! Function Initial Setting Level 6. Key for at least one second to move to the initial setting lev- E - NL Input Type CO LN EL (al En 5 Operation Level 7. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move to the operation level. DE Ifthe Alarm 1 status is ON, PV and ALMA will be alternately displayed. (a £ £ FALN E u ss (00 4-22 Logic Operations 4-22-1 The Logic Operation Function (CX-Thermo) + The logic operation function logically calculates as 1 or 0 the Controller status (alarms, SP ramp, RUN/STOP, auto/manual, etc.) and the external event input status, and outputs the results to work bits. The work bit status can be output to auxiliary or control outputs, and operating status can be switched according to the work bit status. Work bit logic operation can be set from 1 to 8. Set them to No operation (Always OFF) (the default) when the work bits are not to be used. When logic operations are being used, a dot will be displayed on the No. 2 dis- play of the adjustment level display Adjustment Level =] 4 | Adjustment level display EL.Adu N- Dot displayed.

Example: Selecting Library 1 -inixi LILI ping an alarm output if while operalion is stopped. ] donadn rares brie (1) While operation is stopped, aiary output 1 does not output dlarra 1. 25 de aperatianis manrung, away output À outpnts alarm L = Configuranon content Éne RE RE 11 14 ” EN sites Él Switching Work Bit Operations Select the work bit logic operations from the Operation of Work Bit 1 to Op- eration of Work Bit 8 Tab Pages. Selecting the Operation Type From one to four operations are supported. If work bits are not to be used, set them to No operation (Always OFF) (the default). + No operation (Always OFF) + Operation 1

4. Selecting Input Assignments

Select the input assignment for the work bit logic operation from the follow- ing settings. Parameter name Setting range Work Bit 1 Input Assignment A 0: Always OFF 1: Always ON 2: ON for one cycle when power is turned ON 3: Event input 1 (external input) (See note 1.) 4: Event input 2 (external input) (See note 1.) 5: Event input 3 (external input) (See note 1.) 6: Event input 4 (external input) (See note 1.) 7: Alarm 1 8: Alarm 2 9: Alarm 3 10: Control output ON/OFF count alarm (See note 2.) 11: Control output (heating) 12: Control output (cooling) 13: Input error 14: Disabled 15: HB (heater burnout) alarm 16: HS alarm 17: OC (heater overcurrent) alarm 18: Auto/Manual 19: RUN/STOP 20: Disabled 21: Program start 22: AT Execute/Cancel 23: SP ramp operating 24: Muti-SP (bit 0) 25: Multi-SP (bit 1) 26: Disabled 27: Program end output 28: Work bit 1 29: Work bit 2 30: Work bit 3 31: Work bit 4 32: Work bit 5 33: Work bit 6 34: Work bit 7 35: Work bit 8 Work Bit 1 Input Assignment B Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A Work Bit 1 Input Assignment C Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A Work Bit 1 Input Assignment D Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A

Work Bit 8 Input Assignment D Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A (1) The event inputs that can be used depend on the Controller model.

(2) Turns ON when either the control output 1 or 2 ON/OFF count alarm is ON.

5. Switching between Normally Open and Normally Closed for Inputs A to D

Click the condition to switch between normally open and normally closed inputs A to D. Normally open ++ 4

6. Switching between Normally Open and Normally Closed for Work Bits

Click the condition to switch between normally open and normally closed work bits. Normally closed Normally open Normally closed

7. Setting ON Delay Times

When an input with ON delay turns ON, the output will turn ON after the set delay time has elapsed. The setting range is 0 to 9,999. The default is 0 (disabled).

8. Setting OFF Delay Times

When an input with OFF delay turns OFF, the output will turn OFF after the set delay time has elapsed. The setting range is 0 to 9,999. The default is 0 (disabled).

9. Switching ON/OFF Delay Time Unit

Select either seconds or minutes for the ON/OFF delay time unit. The de- fault is seconds.

10. Selecting the Number of Multi-SP Uses

Select the number of Multi-SP uses from 0 to 2.

11. Changing Event Input Data

Select the event input conditions from the following setting ranges. Parameter name Event Input Data 1 Setting range 0: Not assigned. 1: Event input 1 2: Event input 2 3: Event input 3 4: Event input 4

: Work bit 1 : Work bit 2 : Work bit 3 : Work bit 4 9: Work bit 5 10: Work bit 6 11: Work bit 7 12: Work bit 8 Event Input Data 2 Same as for event input data 1 Event Input Data 3 Same as for event input data 1 Event Input Data 4 Same as for event input data 1

Note The event input data can be changed from the default setting even if there is no event input terminal (external input). By changing the default setting, the event input assignment parameters will be dis- played at the Controller display and can be set from the Controller. Changing the Event Input Assignment Function Select the setting for the event input assignment. When a work bit is selected as event input data, Communications Write Enable/Disable cannot be assigned to an event input. Changing Control Output and Auxiliary Output Settings Control output and auxiliary output assignments can be changed. The items that can be changed depend on the Controller model. For details, re- fer to 3-5-3 Assigned Output Functions. Assigning a work bit to either a control output or to an auxiliary output is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm. For example, if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter, then alarms 1 to 3 have been assigned. Displaying Parameter Guides A description of the parameters can be displayed. Displaying the Work Bit Use Destinations Display a list of destinations where the work bits are used. This procedure uses event input 2 to change to RUN or STOP. Event input 2 ON: RUN Event input 2 OFF: STOP Event 2 Work bit 1 JL Reverse a) 1F operation 7 Always OFF

1. Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX-Thermo

tree, and click the Start Button.

2. The Logic Operation Editor will be displayed. Confirm

that the screen for work bit 1 is displayed, and select Operation 3 from the Operation Type Field.

8. Set the operation by selecting one of the following:

Work bit 1 input assignment A = 4: Event input 2 (ex- ternal input) Work bit 1 input assignment B = 0: Always OFF Work bit 1 input assignment C = 0: Always OFF Work bit 1 input assignment D = 0: Always OFF

4. Invert work bit 1. Click <_- (Normally open) to change

itto {7- (Normally closed).

5. _ Assign RUN/STOP to event input 2. Set “5: Work bit 1”

for the event input data for event input 2, and set “RUN/ STOP” for the assignment function.

6. Closing the Logic Operation Editor Dialog Box

Click the Close Button. This completes the procedure for setting parameters using the CX-Thermo. Transfer the settings to the Control- ler to set the Controller. Refer to CX-Thermo help for the procedure to transfer the settings. This procedure outputs alarm 1 status to auxiliary output 1 during operation (RUN). A library object is used to make the setting. 2 GB) Gp By le 45 Cost] Coass? Re + to ang nano far aotoyoiene fr E te den fr

1. Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX-Thermo

8. Select Library 1 from the library list, and then click the

OK Button. Confirm the following settings, and then click the OK Button. Work bit 1 operation type: Operation 1 Work bit 1 input assignment À = 7: Alarm 1 Work bit 1 input assignment B = 19: Invert for RUN/ STOP Work bit 1 input assignment C = 0: Always OFF Work bit 1 input assignment D = 0: Always OFF Auxiliary output 1 = Work bit 1 Closing the Logic Operation Editor Dialog Box Click the Close Button. This completes the procedure for setting parameters using the CX-Thermo. Transfer the settings to the Control- ler to set the Controller. Refer to CX-Thermo help for the procedure to transfer the settings.

Logic Operations Section 4-22

Conventions Used in this Section Section 5-1 5-1 Conventions Used in this Section 5-1-1 Meanings of Icons Used in this Section

Function Setting L_] Monitor Operation See Describes the functions of the parameter. Describes the setting range and default of the parameter. Used to indicate parameters used only for monitoring. Describes the parameter settings, such as those for Operation Commands, and procedures. Used to indicate information on descriptions in which the parameter is used or the names of related parameters. 5-1-2 About Related Parameter Displays Parameters are displayed only when the conditions for use given on the right of the parameter heading are satisfied. Protected parameters are not dis- played regardless of the conditions for use, but the settings of these parame- ters are still valid. The E5CN must be in operation, and RE AT Execute/Cancel control must be 2-PID control.

Displayed symbol Parameter name Conditions for use 5-1-3 The Order of Parameters in This Section 5-1-4 Alarms

Parameters are described level by level. The first page of each level describes the parameters in the level and the pro- cedure to switch between parameters. It will be specified in this section when alarms are set for the Control Output 1 or 2 Assignment parameters, or for the Auxiliary Output 1 or 3 Assignment parameters. For example, when alarm 1 is set for the Control Output 1 Assign- ment parameter, it will be specified that alarm 1 is assigned. Assigning a work bit to either control output 1 or 2 or to auxiliary output 1 to 3 is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm. For example, if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter, then alarms 1 to 3 have been assigned.

Protect Level Section 5-2 5-2 Protect Level Four levels of protection are provided on the ESLIN, operation/adjustment pro- tecit, initial setting/communications protect, setting change protect, and PF key protect (E5AN/EN only). These protect levels prevent unwanted operation of the keys on the front panel in varying degrees. Operation Adjustment a, Level > Level Press the [0] + F2 keys: ress the — display will flash ©] Key less than 1 s. _ ET 20) Press the [©] + El FES ‘où Keys for at least 1 s. Press the [O] + © Keys for at least 3 s. (See note.) Protect C2) Control in Progress Level To move from the operation level to the protect level, press three seconds (see note) or more. and ©] Keys for Note The time taken to move to the protect level can be adjusted by changing the Move to Protect Level Time parameter setting. Protect Level Page F PMar|Move to Protect Level Een co | is se. 5 aAPE|Operation/Adjustment 160 : ofProtect E L CPE] Initial Setting/ 160 5 [Communications Protect E HE PE) Seting Change Protect TS] Fes af E PFPEPF Key Protect 161 5 ôFF HE Parameter Mask Enabl MG] Parameter Mask Enable SET H61 te P. M L PIPassword to Move to Ë PRE E Protect Level 162 Parameters that are protected will not be displayed and their settings cannot be changed.

Protect Level Section 5-2 The Password to Move to Protect Level password must not be set to O. PhaY Move to Protect Level The password to move to the protect level is entered for this parameter. + The password to move to the protect level (ï.e., the password set for the Password to Move to Protect Level parameter) is entered for this parame-

ter. Function + The Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter will be displayed if the cor- rect password is entered. EH Related Parameters See Password to move to protect level (protect level): Page 162 oRPE Operation/Adjustment Protect CCPE Initial Setting/Communications Protect These parameters specify the range of parameters to be protected. Shaded settings are the defaults. HE Operation/Adjustment Protect The following table shows the relationship between set values and the range

Function of protection. Level Set value

Operation |PV Can be displayed |Can be displayed |Can be displayed |Can be displayed Setting Level PV/SP Can be displayed |Can be displayed |Can be displayed | Can be displayed and changed and changed and changed Others Can be displayed |Can be displayed |Cannot be dis- Cannot be dis- and changed and changed played and moving to other levels is not possible played and moving to other levels is not possible Adjustment Level Can be displayed and changed Cannot be dis- played and moving to other levels is not possible Cannot be dis- played and moving to other levels is not possible Cannot be dis- played and moving to other levels is not possible + Parameters are not protected when the set value is set to O. H Initial Setting/Communications Protect This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting level, communica- tions setting level, and advanced function setting level. Set Initial setting level Communications Advanced function value setting level setting level 0 Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach 1 Possible to reach Possible to reach Not possible to reach 2 Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Not possible to reach

Protect Level Section 5-2 PRLP Password to Move to Protect Level This parameter is used to set the password to move to the protect level. / + To prevent setting the password incorrectly, the [A] and Keys or 1 and Keys must be pressed simultaneously to set the password. Function : Setting range Default @ 1999 to 9999 0 Setting + Set this parameter to O when no password is to be set. EH Related Parameters See Move to protect level (protect level): Page 160 Note Protection cannot be cleared or changed without the password. Be careful not to forget it. If you forget the password, contact your OMRON sales representa- tive.

5-3 Operation Level Display this level to perform control operations on the ESLIN. You can set alarm values, monitor the manipulated variable, and perform other operations in this level. In the advanced function setting level, you can set a parameter to hide or show the set points. Operation — Adjustment Level Level Press the O] Key less than 1 s. Press the [©] Key for at least 1 s; display will flash Press the [0] Key E for at least 1 s. [sl Æ

F Press the [©] Key for at least 3 s. 86] Control stop: Initial Setting Level

cations Setting Level C2) Control in progress Communi- | Press the O1Key for less than 1 s. Control stopped This level is displayed immediately after the power is turned ON. To move to other levels, press the [0] Key or the [0] and FE Keys.

Note Operation Level E SKA =] 0]

E R-5 fs RU Process Value Process Value/Set Point (See note.) Auto/Manual Switch Multi-SP Set Point Setting Set Point During SP Ramp Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Heater Current 2 Value Monitor ]Leakage Current 1 Monitor Leakage Current 2 Monitor Program Start Soak Time Remain RUN/STOP Page

For details on the displays of Controllers with a No. 3 display (E5AN/EN), refer to Process Value/Set Point on page 165.

Operation Level Section 5-3 The Additional PV Display parameter Process Value must be set to ON. The process value is displayed on the No. 1 display, and nothing is displayed | on the No. 2 and No. 3 (E5AN/EN only) displays. Function Monitor range Unit L, ] Process value Temperature: According to indication range for |EU each sensor. Analog: Scaling lower limit -5% FS to Scaling Monitor upper limit +5% FS (Refer to page 303.) During temperature input, the decimal point position depends on the currently selected sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting. The default setting is for a K thermocouple (5). An S.£FF error will be displayed if the input type setting is incorrect. To clear the 5.EFF error, correct the input type or wiring, and then cycle the power. EH Related Parameters See Input type: Page 200, Set point upper limit, Set point lower limit: Page 208 (ini- — tial setting level) Process Value/Set Point (Display 1) Process Value/Set Point (Display 2) (ESAN/EN only) The process value is displayed on the No. 1 display, and the set point is dis- l played on the No. 2 display. Function LL | Monitor range Unit Process value Temperature: According to indication range for |EU Monitor each sensor. Analog: Scaling lower limit -5% FS to Scaling upper limit +5% FS (Refer to page 303.) Setting range Unit Set point SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU During temperature input, the decimal point position depends on the currently selected sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting.

See No. 3 Display (E5AN/EN) The following table shows the contents of the No. 3 display, according to the setting of the PV/SP Display Screen Selection parameter. Set value Display contents 0 Only the PV and SP are displayed. (The No. 3 display is not shown.) PV/SP/Muiti-SP and PV/SP/MV are displayed in order. PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Multi-SP are displayed in order. Only PV/SP/Multi-SP are displayed. PV/SP/MV are displayed PV/SP/Muiti-SP and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order. 6 PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order. 7 Only PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed. GIEODE A 2-level display is set when shipped from the factory. A 3-level display is activated if parameters are initialized. When 1, 2, 5, or 6 is selected, press the ©#] Key to display PV/SP (Display 2). Example: When the PV/SP Display Screen Selection Parameter Is Set to 2 Operation Level PV/SP (Display 1) PV/SP (Display 2) % Press the [ca BC BC 7 = 25 key. =] 25 on —+ En Inn OÙ 100 Dom 697 DD GpQ ESS 529 Be 577 PV/SP/MV PV/SP/Multi-SP EH Related Parameters Input type: Page 200, Set point upper limit, Set point lower limit: Page 208 (ini- tial setting level) PV/SP display screen selection (advanced function setting level): Page 249 A-M The Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 parameters must not be set to Auto/ Manual and the Auto/Manual Select Auto/Manual Switch Addition parameter must be set to ON. The control must be set to 2-PID control. Operation See

Operation Level Section 5-3 M-GP Multi-SP Set Point Setting The Multi-SP Uses parameter must " (Set Points 0 to 3) be setio ON. To use the multi-SP function, preset the four set points (SP 0 to 3) in the l adjustment level, and then switch the set point either by operating the keys or by using external input signals (event inputs). Function This parameter is used to select set points O to 3. The SP Ramp Set Value parameter -M ï : must not be set to OFF. SP-M Set Point During SP Ramp The ST parameter must be set to OFF. This parameter monitors the set point during SP ramp operation. | A ramp is used to restrict the change width of the set point as a rate of change. Function This parameter is displayed when a set value is input for the SP Ramp Set Value parameter (adjustment level). When not in ramp operation, the set point will be the same as the one dis- played for the Process Value/Set Point parameter. L, ] Monitor range Unit SP: SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU Monitor EH Related Parameters See Process value/set point (operation level): Page 165 — SP ramp set value (adjustment level): Page 193 Set point upper limit, Set point lower limit (initial setting level): Page 203

Operation Level Section 5-3 Heater burnout, HS alarm, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. CE! Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Burnout Detection or Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON. This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for | detecting heater burnout. Function This parameter measures and displays the heater current value. + Heater burnouts and heater overcurrent are not detected if the control output (heating) ON time is 100 ms or less. L, ] Monitor range Unit

Monit ‘onfor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded.

• If a heater burnout detection 1 or heater overcurrent detection 1 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the heater cur- rent 1 value monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters See Heater burnout detection 1, Heater burnout detection 2 (adjustment level): — Pages 181, and 183 HB ON/OFF (advanced function setting level): Page 222 Heater overcurrent detection 1, Heater overcurrent detection 2 (adjustment level): Pages 181, and 183 Heater overcurrent use (advanced function setting level): Page 246 Error Displays CE |: Page 283

Operation Level Section 5-3 Heater burnout, HS alarm, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported (two CTs). CEte Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Burnout Detection or Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON. This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for | detecting heater burnout. Function This parameter measures and displays the heater current value. + Heater burnouts and heater overcurrent are not detected if the control output (heating) ON time is 100 ms or less. L, ] Monitor range Unit

Monit ‘onfor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded.

• If a heater burnout detection 2 or heater overcurrent detection 2 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the heater cur- rent 2 value monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters See Heater burnout detection 1, Heater burnout detection 2 (adjustment level): — Pages 181, and 183 HB ON/OFF (advanced function setting level): Page 222 Heater overcurrent detection 1, Heater overcurrent detection 2 (adjustment level): Pages 181, and 183 Heater overcurrent use (advanced function setting level): Page 246 Error Displays CE 2: Page 283

Operation Level Section 5-3 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON. LCR! Leakage Current 1 Monitor This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for [ detecting SSR short-circuits. The heater current is measured and the leakage current 1 monitor is dis- played. + HS alarms are not detected if the control output (heating) OFF time is 100 ms or less. L, ] Monitor range Unit

Function Monitor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded. + lfan HS alarm 1 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the leakage current 1 monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters See HS alarm 1, HS alarm 2 (adjustment level): Page 184 — Failure detection (advanced function setting level): Page 235 Error Displays L ER !: Page 283 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be LERE Leakage Current 2 Monitor supported (lo GTS). g Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON. This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for | detecting SSR short-circuits. This parameter measures and displays the heater current value. Function + HS alarms are not detected if the control output (heating) OFF time is 100 ms or less. L, | Monitor range Unit

Monit ‘onfor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded. + If an HS alarm 2 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the leakage current 2 monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters See HS alarm 1, HS alarm 2 (adjustment level): Page 184 — HS alarm use (advanced function setting level): Page 235 Error Displays L [R2: Page 283

Operation Level Section 5-3 The Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 R-5 RUN/STOP parameters must not be set to “RUN/ STOP” This parameter starts and stops the control operation. When FUN (RUN) is selected, control is started. When 5£aP (STOP) is selected, control is stopped. The STOP indicator will light when control. Operation The default is FUN. This parameter will not be displayed if an event input is set to “RUN/STOP” See Alarm 1 must be assigned. AL- 1! Alarm Value 1 The alarm 1 type must not be 0, 1,4, 5, or 12. This parameter is set to one of the input values “X” in the alarm type list. + This parameter sets the alarm value for alarm 1. | + During temperature input, the decimal point position depends on the cur- rently selected sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Function : : Point parameter setting. Setting range Unit Default @ 1999109999 [EU 0 Setting EH Related Parameters See Input type: Page 200, Scaling upper limit, Scaling lower limit, Decimal point — (initial setting level): Page 202 (initial setting level) Alarm 1 type (initial setting level): Page 207 Standby sequence reset: Page 221, Auxiliary output * open in alarm: Page 222, Alarm 1 hysteresis: Page 209, Alarm 1 latch: Page 227 (advanced func- tion setting level)

Operation Level Section 5-3 AL3H Alarm Value Upper Limit 3 farm 3 maire assigned. 14 Lo Ie alarm e must not be 1, 4, or AL3L Alarm Value Lower Limit 3 5. P These parameters independently set the alarm value upper and lower limits when the mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for the Alarm 8 Type parameter (initial setting level). + This parameter sets the upper and lower limit values of alarm 3. | + During temperature input, the decimal point position depends on the cur- rently selected sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Function : : Point parameter setting. Setting range Unit Default @ 1999 to 9999 JEU 0 Setting EH Related Parameters See Input type: Page 200, Scaling upper limit, Scaling lower limit, Decimal point: — Page 202, Alarm 3 type: Page 210 (initial setting level), Standby sequence reset: Page 221, Auxiliary output * open in alarm: Page 222, Alarm 3 hystere- sis: Page 209, Alarm 3 latch: Page 227 (advanced function setting level) = ï ñ The MV Display parameter must be a MV Monitor (Heating) set to ON. This parameter is used to check the manipulated variable for the heating con- trol output during operation. + This parameter cannot be set. l + During standard control, the manipulated variable is monitored. During heating/cooling control, the manipulated variables on the control output Function : : à (heating) is monitored. + The default is OFF and the manipulated variable is not displayed. L, ] Control Monitor range Unit Standard —5.0 to 105.0 % Monitor Heating/cooling 0.0 to 105.0 % EH Related Parameters See MV display (advanced function setting level): Page 227

Operation Level Section 5-3 The control system must be set to -5 ï i heating/cooling control. L-a MV Monitor (Cooling) The MV Display parameter must be set to ON. This parameter is used to check the manipulated variable for the cooling con- trol output during operation. " + This parameter cannot be set. + During heating/cooling control, the manipulated variable on the control output (cooling) is monitored. Function : : k : k + The default is OFF and the manipulated variable is not displayed. L, | Control Monitor range Unit Heating/cooling 0.0 to 105.0 % Monitor EH Related Parameters See Standard or heating/cooling (initial setting level): Page 204 MV display (advanced function setting level): Page 227

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 5-4 Adjustment Level This level is for executing AT (auto-tuning) and other operations, and for set control parameters. This level provides the basic Controller parameters for PID control (propor- tional band, integral time, derivative time) and heating/cooling control. Operation — Adjustment Level Level Press the! ©] Key less than 1 s. C2) Control in progress To move to the adjustment level from the operation level, press the [O1 Key once. + The set points 0 to 3 in the adjustment level are the set values for switch- ing the set point during multi-SP input. - The following parameters are displayed for Controllers with CT Inputs: Heater current monitors, Leakage current monitors, heater burnout detec- tions, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detections. + Adjustment level parameters can be changed after setting the Operation/ Adjustment Protect parameter to 0. Displays and changing levels are not possible if the Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter is set to 1 to 3. Protection is set in the protect level.

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 LAdu Adjustment Level Display This parameter is displayed after moving to the adjustment level. When a logic operation is set, a period “” will be displayed on the No. 2. dis- play. - This parameter indicates that the adjustment level has been entered. | (The Adjusiment Level parameter will not be displayed again even if the El Key is pressed in the adjustment level to scroll through the parame- Function ters.) The ramp must be in operation, and 2-PID control must be used. Event RE AT Execute/Cancel Input Assignments 1 and 2 parame- ters must be other than 100% or 40% AT Execute/Cancel. This parameter executes auto-tuning (AT). + The MV is forcibly increased and decreased around the set point to find | the characteristics of the control object. From the results, the PID con- stants are automatically set in the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (l), and Derivative Time (D) parameters. + Both 100% AT and 40% AT are supported for AT. + Only 100% AT can be executed for heating and cooling control. + This parameter will not be displayed when either 100% or 40% AT exe- cute/cancel is set to be executed using an event input. Function Setting rage Default OFF: AT Cancel OFF Operation AT-2: 100%AT Execute AT-1: 40%AT Execute < This parameter is normally aFF. Press the [A] Key and select AE -2 or AE - !to execute AT. AT cannot be executed when control is stopped or during ON/OFF control. + When AT execution ends, the parameter setting automatically returns to GFF. EH Related Parameters See Proportional band, Integral time, Derivative time (adjustment level): Page 188 PID ON/OFF (initial setting level): Page 204

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 Communications must be supported. CMHE Communications Writing The Event Input Assignments 1 and 2 parameters must not be set to enable communications writing. + This parameter enables/disables writing of parameters to the E5CN from | the host (personal computer) using communications. - This parameter is not displayed if communications write enable/disable is Functi j il i [ unction set for execution using an event input assignment 1 and 2. ON: Writing enabled CO OFF: Writing disabled + Default: OFF Setting EH Related Parameters See MB command logic switching (advanced function setting level): Page 229 Communications Unit No., Communications baud rate, Communications data length, Communications parity, Communications stop bits (communications setting level): Page 255 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Et! Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HB ON/OFF parameter or Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON.

This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for [T detecting heater burnout. This parameter measures and displays the heater current value. + Heater burnouts or heater overcurrent are not detected if the control out- put (heating) ON time is 100 ms or less. L, ] Monitor range Unit

Function Monit ‘onfor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded.

• If a heater burnout detection 1 or heater overcurrent detection 1 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the heater cur- rent 1 value monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters See Heater burnout detection 1, Heater burnout detection 2 (adjustment level): — Pages 181, and 183 HB ON/OFF (advanced function setting level): Page 222 Heater overcurrent detection 1, Heater overcurrent detection 2 (adjustment level): Pages 181, and 183 Heater overcurrent use (advanced function setting level): Page 246 Error displays CE !: Page 283

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HB ON/OFF parameter must be set to ON. Hb 1 Heater Burnout Detection 1 This parameter sets the current for the heater burnout alarm to be output. + The heater burnout alarm is output when the heater current value falls l below the setting of this parameter. + When the set value is 0.0, the heater burnout alarm output is turned OFF. Functi i î unelion When the set value is 50.0, the heater burnout alarm output is turned ON. @ Setting range Unit Default

Setting EH Related Parameters See Heater current 1 value monitor (adjustment level): Page 180 Heater burnout detection, Heater burnout latch, Heater burnout hysteresis (advanced function setting level): Page 222 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Overcurrent Use ON/ OFF parameter must be set to ON.

Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 Le]

This parameter sets the current value for heater overcurrent alarm outputs. + A heater overcurrent alarm is output when the heater current exceeds the | value set for this parameter. + When the set value is 50.0, the heater overcurrent alarm is turned OFF. Function When the set value is 0.0, the heater overcurrent alarm is turned ON. @ Setting range Unit Default

Setting EH Related Parameters See Heater current 1 value monitor (adjustment level): Page 180 Heater overcurrent use, Heater overcurrent latch, Heater overcurrent hystere- sis (advanced function setting level): Page 222

Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported (two CTs). Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HB ON/OFF or Heater Overcur- rent Use parameter must be set to ON.

This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting heater burnout. This parameter measures and displays the heater current value. + Heater burnouts and heater overcurrent are not detected if the control output (heating) ON time is 100 ms or less. Monitor range Unit

+ FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded.

• If a heater burnout detection 2 or heater overcurrent detection 2 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the heater cur- rent 2 value monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters Heater burnout detection 1, Heater burnout detection 2 (adjustment level): Pages 181, and 183 HB ON/OFF (advanced function setting level): Page 222 Heater overcurrent detection 1, Heater overcurrent detection 2 (adjustment level): Pages 181, and 183 Heater overcurrent use (advanced function setting level): Page 246 Error Displays CE 2: Page 283

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported (two CTs). Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HB ON/OFF parameter must be set to ON. Hbe Heater Burnout Detection 2 This parameter sets the current for the heater burnout alarm to be output. + The heater burnout alarm is output when the heater current value falls l below the setting of this parameter. + When the set value is 0.0, the heater burnout alarm output is turned OFF. Functi i î unelion When the set value is 50.0, the heater burnout alarm output is turned ON. @ Setting range Unit Default

Setting EH Related Parameters See Heater current 2 value monitor (adjustment level): Page 182 HB ON/OFF, Heater burnout latch, Heater burnout hysteresis (advanced func- tion setting level): Page 222 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported (two CTs). Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Overcurrent Use param- eter must be set to ON. ale Heater Overcurrent Detection 2 This parameter sets the current value for heater overcurrent alarm outputs. l + A heater overcurrent alarm is output when the heater current exceeds the value set for this parameter. Function + When the set value is 50.0, the heater overcurrent alarm is turned OFF. When the set value is 0.0, the heater overcurrent alarm is turned turn ON. C\ Setting range Unit Default

Setting EH Related Parameters See Heater current 2 value monitor (adjustment level): Page 180 Heater overcurrent use, Heater overcurrent latch, Heater overcurrent hystere- sis (advanced function setting level): Page 222

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be ! ñ supported. LCR I Leakage Current 1 Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON. This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short-circuits. [— This parameter measures and displays the heater current when the heater is OFF. + HS alarms are not detected if the control output (heating) OFF time is 100 ms or less. L, | Monitor range Unit

Function Monitor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded. + lfan HS alarm 1 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the leakage current 1 monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters See HS alarm 1, HS alarm 2 (adjustment level): Page 184 HS alarm use (advanced function setting level): Page 235 Error Displays L ER !: Page 283 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be ! supported. H5 1 HS Alarm 1 Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON. This parameter sets the current for the HS alarm to be output. | + An HS alarm is output when the leakage current value exceeds the set- ting of this parameter. + When the set value is 50.0, the HS alarm output is turned OFF. When the set value is 0.0, the HS alarm output is turned ON. Function Setting range Unit Default

Setting EH Related Parameters See Leakage current 1 monitor (adjustment level): Page 184 HS alarm, HS alarm latch, HS alarm hysteresis (advanced function setting level): Page 235

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be h supported (two CTs). LCRe Leakage Current 2 Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON. This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short-circuits. [— This parameter measures and displays the heater current value. + HS alarms are not detected if the control output (heating) OFF time is 100 ms or less. Function L, | Monitor range Unit

Monitor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded. + If an HS alarm 2 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the leakage current 2 monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters See HS alarm 1, HS alarm 2 (adjustment level): Page 184 + HS alarm use (advanced function setting level): Page 235 Error Displays L [R2: Page 283 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported (two CTs). H5e HS Alarm 2 Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON. This parameter sets the current for the HS alarm to be output. + An HS alarm is output when the leakage current value exceeds the set- l ting of this parameter. + When the set value is 50.0, the HS alarm output is turned OFF. When the Function set value is 0.0, the HS alarm output will turn ON. Setting range Unit Default

Setting EH Related Parameters See Leakage current 2 monitor (adjustment level): Page 185 HS alarm use, HS alarm latch, HS alarm hysteresis (advanced function set- ting level): Page 235

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 GP-0 SP 0 The Number oEMut SP uses parameter must be set to 1 or 2. SP- | SP 1 The Multi-SP Uses parameter must 5P-2 SP 2 be set to ON. SP-3 SP 3 These parameters set the set points when the multi-SP function is used. The values set in these parameters can be selected by operating the keys on l the front panel or by using event inputs. + When the set point has been changed, the set value of the set point (0 to Function 83) selected by the multi-SP inputs is also changed to the same value. + The decimal point position depends on the selected sensor. During ana- log input, it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting. C\ Setting range Unit Default SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU 0 Setting EH Related Parameters See Process value/set point (operation level): Page 165 + Input type (initial setting level): Page 200 Number of multi-SP uses: Page 213, Event input assignment 1 and 2 (initial setting level): Page 216, Multi-SP uses: Page 220 (advanced function setting level) The Input Type parameter must be . set for a thermocouple or resistance cNS Temperature Input Shift thermometer, and the Input Shift Type parameter must be set to a one-point shift. Sometimes an error occurs between the set point and the actual temperature. To offset this, a compensated value can be obtained by adding an input shift value to the input. The compensated value is displayed as the measurement value and used for control. The entire input range is shifted by a fixed rate (1-point shift). If the input shift | value is set to -1°C, control will be performed for a value 1°C lower than the measured temperature. Function C\ Setting range Unit Default —199.9 to 999.9 |°C or °F 0.0 Setting EH Related Parameters See Input type (initial setting level): Page 200 Input shift type (advanced function setting level): Page 233

CR: Proportional Band Integral Time Derivative Time The control must be set to 2-PID control.

These parameters set PID control constants. PID constants are automatically set when AT or ST is executed. P action: l'action: D action: Refers to control in which the MV is proportional to the deviation (control error). Refers to a control action that is proportional to the time integral of the deviation. With proportional control, there is normally an offset (control error). Proportional action is thus used in combination with integral action. As time passes, this control error disappears, and the control temperature (process value) comes to agree with the set point. Refers to a control action that is proportional to the time derivative of the control error. The proportional control and integral control cor- rect for errors in the control result, and thus the control system is late in responding to sudden changes in temperature. The derivative action increases the MV in proportion to the slope of the change in the temperature as a corrective action. Parameter name Models Setting range Unit Default Proportional Band Controllers with Thermocouple/ Resistance Thermometer Multi- inputs Controllers with Analog Inputs

%FS Integral Time 0 to 3999 Second Derivative Time RTis OFF. |0 to 3999 Second RTis ON. |0.0 to 999.9 Second Note (1) Set “None” as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs. (2) If the settings for RT (robust tuning) are changed, the proportional band (P), integral time (l), and derivative time (D) will be initiated. EH Related Parameters AT execute/cancel (adjustment level): Page 179

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 - f ici The control must be heating/cooling E-SC Cooling Coefficient control and 2-PID control.

If the heating characteristics and cooling characteristics of the control object are very different and good control characteristics cannot be achieved with the same PID constants, the cooling coefficient can be used to adjust the propor- tional band (P) for the control output assigned to the cooling side. + In heating/cooling control, the proportional band P for the cooling control output is calculated using the following formula to set the cooling coeffi- cient: The control system must be set to Function Cooling control output side P = Cooling coefficient x P (proportional band) + When the Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment parameter is set to ON, the cooling coefficient is set automatically when AT is executed. If there is strong non-linear gain for the cooling characteristics, however, it may not be possible to obtain the optimum cooling coefficient at the Con- troller. Setting range Unit Default @ 0.01 to 99.99 None 1.00 Setting EH Related Parameters See Proportional band (adjustment level): Page 188 — Automatic cooling coefficient adjustment (advanced function setting level): Page 245 €-db Dead Band heating/cooling control.

Setting Note This parameter sets the output dead band width for heating/cooling control. A negative setting sets an overlapping band. + This parameter sets an area in which the control output is O centering around the set point for a heating/cooling control. + During temperature input, the decimal point position depends on the cur- rently selected sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting. Model Setting range Unit Default Controllers with Thermocouple/Resis- |-199.9 to 999.9 |°C or °F 0.0 tance Thermometer Universal Inputs (See note.) Controllers with Analog Inputs —19.99 to 99.99 |%FS 0.00 Set “None” as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs.

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 The control must be standard control CT and 2-PID control. oF-R Manual Reset Value The Integral Time parameter must be set to O.

+ This parameter sets the required manipulated variable to remove offset during stabilization of P or PD control. Function @ Setting range Unit Default

Setting EH Related Parameters See Integral time (adjustment level): Page 188 PID ON/OFF (initial setting level): Page 204 Hys Hysteresis (Heating) The control must be ON/OFF control. For the Hysteresis (Cooling) parame- CHYG Hysteresis (Cooling) ter, the control must be heating/cool- ing control.

This parameter sets the hysteresis for ensuring stable operation at the ON/ OFF switching point. - For standard control, use the Hysteresis (Heating) parameter. The Hyster- esis (Cooling) parameter cannot be used. + For heating/cooling control, the hysteresis can be set independently for heating/cooling. The Hysteresis (Heating) parameter is used for the heat- ing side, and the Hysteresis (Cooling) parameter is used for the cooling side. Parameter Model Setting range Unit Default name Hysteresis Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance |0.1 to 999.9 °Cor°F 1.0 (Heating) Thermometer Universal Inputs (See note.) Controllers with Analog Inputs 0.01 to 99.99 %FS 0.10 Hysteresis Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance |0.1 to 999.9 °Cor°F 1.0 (Cooling) Thermometer Universal Inputs (See note.) Controllers with Analog Inputs 0.01 o 99.99 %FS 0.10 Note Set “None” as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inpuits. EH Related Parameters PID ON/OFF, Standard or heating/cooling (initial setting level): Page 204

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 = QI E The Program Pattern parameter SoAk Soak Time must not be set to OFF. + This parameter sets the time for the control operation when using the sim- | ple program function. Function Setting range Unit Default 1 to 9999 min orh 1 Setting EH Related Parameters Se) Program start, Soak time remain (operation level): Page 171 + Wait band (adjustment level): Page 191 Program pattern (initial setting level): Page 205 Soak time unit (advanced function setting level): Page 243 . ï The Program Pattern parameter WE-b Wait Band must not be set to OFF. + This parameter sets the stable band within which the soak time is mea- | sured for the simple program function. Function Model Setting range Unit Default CC Controllers with Thermocouple/Resis- |OFF or 0.1to |°Cor°F EL tance Thermometer Universal Inputs |999.9 (See note.) Setting Controllers with Analog Inputs OFFor0.01to |%FS

Note Set “None” as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inpuits. EH Related Parameters See Program start, Soak time remain (operation level): Page 171 + Soak time (adjustment level): Page 191 Program pattern (initial setting level): Page 205 Soak time unit (advanced function setting level): Page 243

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 The control must be set to 2-PID 1 control. M5 MV at Stop The MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter must be ON. + This parameter sets the MV to use when the RUN/STOP status changes l from RUN to STOP. Function Setting range Unit Default CC —5.0 to 105.0 for standard control % 0.0 —105.0 to 105.0 (heating/cooling control) Setting EH Related Parameters See RUN/STOP (operation level): Page 172 + MV at stop and error addition (advanced function setting level): Page 233 The control must be set to 2-PID 1 control. MY -E MV at PV Error The MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter must be ON. [— + This parameter sets the MV to use when an input error occurs. Function Setting range Unit Default —5.0 to 105.0 for standard control % 0.0 —105.0 to 105.0 (heating/cooling control) Setting EH Related Parameters See MV at stop and error addition (advanced function setting level): Page 233

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 The ST parameter must be set to SPRE SP Ramp Set Value OFF + This parameter sets the rate of change during SP ramp operation. Set the | maximum permissible change width per unit of time as the SP ramp set value. The SP ramp function is disabled if this parameter is set to OFF. + During temperature input, the decimal point position of the SP ramp set value is dependent on the currently selected sensor, and during analog input it is dependent on scaling. Function Setting range Unit Default OFF or 1 to 9999 EU/s, EU/minute, or |aFF EU/h Setting EH Related Parameters See Input type: Page 200, Scaling upper limit, Scaling lower limit, Decimal point — (initial setting level): Page 202, ST: Page 205 (initial setting level) SP ramp time unit (advanced function setting level): Page 220 al -H MV Upper Limit The control must be set to 2-PID control. al-t MV Lower Limit The ST parameter must be set to OFF. + The MV Upper Limit and MV Lower Limit parameters set the upper and | lower limits of the manipulated variable. When the calculated manipulated variable exceeds the upper or lower limit value, the upper or lower limit Function value will be the output level. + MV Upper Limit The setting ranges during standard control and heating/cooling control are different. C\ Control method Setting range Unit Default Standard MV lower limit + 0.1 to 105.0 % 105.0 Setting " Heating/cooling 0.0 to 105.0 + MV Lower Limit The setting ranges during standard control and heating/cooling control are different. The manipulated variable for the cooling control output side during heating/cooling control is expressed as a negative value. Control method Setting range Unit Default Standard —5.0 to MV upper limit — O.1 % -5.0 Heating/cooling —105.0 to 0.0 —105.0 EH Related Parameters See PID ON/OFF: Page 204, ST: Page 205 (initial setting level)

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 2-PID control must be used. ofl MV Change Rate Limit ST must be OFF + The MV Change Rate Limit parameter sets the maximum allowable varia- | tion in the MV per second. [f the change in the MV exceeds this setting, the MV will be changed by the MV change rate limit until the calculated Function value is reached. If the limit is set to 0.0, this function will be disabled. + The MV Change Rate Limit parameter will not operate in the following sit- uations. + In manual mode + During ST execution (Cannot be set when ST is ON.) + During AT execution + During ON/OFF control + While stopped (MV output during STOP) + During MV output when error occurs Setting range Unit Default

Setting EH Related Parameters See Proportional band (adjustment level): Page 188 The input type must be an analog n î » ñ input, and the Extraction of Square SGRP Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point ofEnable parameter must be set to ON. + This parameter sets the extraction of square root low-cut point used for | the inputs. The data after extracting the square root is shown below. Function + The low-cut point is used for extracting the square root for flowrate sen- sors. Operation result 100% FS root low-cut point | Extraction of square 100%FS Argument 1 (input data) Setting range Unit Default

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 EH Related Parameters See Extraction of square root enable (initial setting level): Page 216

Monitor/Setting Item Level Section 5-5 5-5 Monitor/Setting Item Level Monitor/setting items can be displayed by means of the function key when the PF Setting parameter (advanced function setting level) is set to PFDP: Moni- tor/Setting Item (for the ESAN/EN only). { Power ON | Operation Level Press the [O] Key for at least 1 s. Monitor/Setting Item Level C2 control in progress Key The PF Setting parameter must be n ï : set to PFDP, and the Monitor/Setting Monitor/Setting Item Display 1 to 5 Item 1 to 5 parameters must not be set to OFF. + When the PF Key is set to display monitor/setting items, pressing the PF l Key will display in order the contents of the Monitor/Setting ltem 1 to 5 parameters. The contents of these parameters are shown in the following Function table. For the setting (monitor) ranges, refer to the applicable parameters. Set Setting Remarks value Monitor/Setting Symbol 0 Disabled — 1 PV/SP/Multi-SP Can be set. (SP) _— 2 PV/SP/MV Can be set. (SP) _— 3 PV/SP /Soak time remain Can be set. (SP) — 4 Proportional band (P) Can be set. P 5 Integral time () Can be set. ns 6 Derivative time (D) Can be set. d 7 Alarm value 1 Can be set. fE-t 8 Alarm value upper limit 1 Can be set. LH 9 Alarm value lower limit 1 Can be set. LIL 10 Alarm value 2 Can be set. fE-e 11 Alarm value upper limit 2 Can be set. ALeH 12 Alarm value lower limit 2 Can be set. Aet 13 Alarm value 3 Can be set. L-7 14 Alarm value upper limit 3 Can be set. AU3H 15 Alarm value lower limit 3 Can be set. GET EH Related Parameters See PF setting (advanced function setting level): Page 247 Monitor/setting items 1 to 5 (advanced function setting level): Page 248

5-6 Manual Control Level The manipulated variable can be set in manual mode while the PV/MV param- eter is displayed. The final MV used in automatic mode will be used as the initial manual MV when moving from automatic mode to manual mode. In manual mode, the change value will be saved immediately and reflected in the actual MV. | Power ON

Operation Adjusiment Level Level Press the 3] Key for at least 1 s. L_ Press the [©] Key for at Press the [PF] Key for least 1 s: display will flash. at least 1 s or the [O] Key for at least 1 s. Press the [0] Key for (See note.) atleast 3. Manual Control Level Note: When the PF Setting parameter is set to A-M for a Controller that has a PF Key (ESAN/EN). To move from the operation level to the manual control level, press the [0] Key for at least three seconds with the Auto/Manual Switch parameter displayed. In addition, this operation can be performed using the PF Key by setting the PF Key parameter (advanced function setting level) to A-M (Auto/Manual). For details on the setting method, refer to 4-13 Performing Manual Control. This setting cannot be made during ON/OFF operation. + The MANU indicator will light during manual control. - Itis not possible to move to any displays except for the PV/MV parameter during manual operation. - To return to the operation level, press the manual control level for at least one second. Key or the PF Key in the PV/MV (Manual MV)

Setting range Unit MV (manual MV) Standard control —5.0 to 105.0 % (See note.) Heating/cooling control —105.0 to 105.0 (See note.) Note When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON, the setting range will be the MV lower limit to the MV upper limit. EH Related Parameters See

Standard or heating/cooling (initial setting level): Page 204

Initial Setting Level

5-7 Initial Setting Level This level is used to set up the basic Temperature Controller specifications. In this level, you can set the Input Type parameter to set the sensor input to be connected, limit the setting range of set points, set the alarm modes, and per- form other operations. Operation Level Press the [D] Key for at least 1 s. Press the a) O]Key for at least 1 s: F à Es: 108]

Press the [©] Key for at least 3 s. display will pt Control stops. Initial Setting Level Control in progress Control stopped To move from the operation level to the initial setting level, press the [O] Key for at least three seconds with any parameter displayed except for the Auto/ Manual Switch parameter. + The initial setting level is not displayed when the Initial Setting/Communi- cations Protect parameter is set to 2. It can be used when the Initial Set- ting/Communications Protect parameter is set to O or 1. - lfthe Input Type parameter is set for an analog input, the following param- eters will be set: Scaling upper limit, Scaling lower limit, and Decimal point.

Initial Setting Level Section 5-7 cN-H CNE

Initial Setting Level Section 5-7 SE -H SP Upper Limit SE -E SP Lower Limit Function

Setting See - These parameters set the upper and lower limits of the set points. À set point can be set within the range defined by the upper and lower limit set values in the SP Upper Limit and SP Lower Limit parameters. lf these parameters are reset, any set point that is outside of the new range will be forcibly changed to either the upper limit or the lower limit. + When the temperature input type and temperature unit have been changed, the set point upper limit and set point lower limit are forcibly changed to the upper and lower limits of the sensor. + During temperature input, the decimal point position depends on the cur- rently selected sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting. Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs Parameter Setting range Unit Default name Set Point Temperature | SP lower limit + 1 to Input set- | EU 1300 Upper Limit ting range upper limit Analog SP lower limit + 1 to scaling |EU 100 upper limit Set Point Temperature | Input setting range lower limit | EU —200 Lower Limit to SP upper limit — 1 Analog Scaling lower limit to SP EU 0 upper limit — 1 Controllers with Analog Inputs Parameter name Setting range Unit Default Set Point Upper Limit | SP lower limit + 1 to scaling upper | EU 100 limit Set Point Lower Limit | Scaling lower limit to SP upper EU 0 limit — 1 EH Related Parameters Input type: Page 200, Temperature unit: Page 202 (initial setting level)

Initial Setting Level Section 5-7

+ This parameter selects 2-PID control or ON/OFF control. l + The auto-tuning and self-tuning functions can be used in 2-PID control. Function Setting range Default Pid: 2-PID, oNaf: ON/OFF oùoF Setting EH Related Parameters See AT execute/cancel: Page 179, Manual reset value, Hysteresis (heating), and — Hysteresis (cooling): Page 190 (adjustment level) ST stable range (advanced function setting level): Page 224 S-HC Standard or Heating/Cooling + This parameter selects standard control or heating/cooling control. Il + When heating/cooling control is selected for the E5SCN or ESCN-U, the auxiliary output 2 terminal (SUB2) is assigned as the control output (cool- Function ing) + When heating/cooling control is selected for the E5AN or E5SEN, the auxil- iary output 3 terminal (SUB3) is assigned as the control output (cooling). + When heating/cooling control is selected for the E5GN, the auxiliary out- put 1 terminal (SUB1) is assigned as the control output (cooling). Note If standard control is selected, set the Control Output 1 Assignment to à (con- trol output (heating)) for either direct (cooling) or reverse (heating) operation. Setting range Default @ SENd: Standard, H-L: Heating/cooling SENd Setting EH Related Parameters See MV monitor (heating): Page 175, MV monitor (cooling): Page 176 (operation level) Cooling coefficient, Dead band: Page 189, Hysteresis (heating), Hysteresis (cooling): Page 190 (adjustment level) Control period (heat), Control period (cool) (initial setting level): Page 206 Control output 1 assignment: Page 238, Control output 2 assignment, Auxil- iary output 1 assignment: Page 240, Auxiliary output 2 assignment: Page 241, Auxiliary output 3 assignment: Page 242 (advanced function setting level)

Initial Setting Level Section 5-7

: The control must be set to a temper- ST (self-tuning) ature input, standard control, and 2- PID control.

+ The ST (self-tuning) function executes tuning from the start of program execution to calculate PID constants matched to the control target. When the ST function is in operation, be sure to turn ON the power supply of the Function load connected to the control output simultaneously with or before starting Controller operation. + Auto-tuning can be started during self-tuning. Z Parameter name Setting range Unit Default L | ST aFF: ST function OFF, a: ST None où function ON Setting EH Related Parameters See Input type: Page 200, PID ON/OFF: Page 204 (initial setting level), ST stable — range (advanced function setting level): Page 224 PERN Program Pattern

Setting See This parameter sets the type of control when using the simple program func- tion. + lfthe program pattern is set to aff, the simple program will not operate. + lfthe program pattern is set to EGP, the RUN/STOP status will change to STOP after the soak time has expired. If the program pattern is set to £aNE, control will continue in RUN status after the soak time has expired. Setting range Default GFF | Simple program function turned OFF GFF SEaP | Go to STOP mode at end of program. £aNE | Continue in RUN mode at end of program. EH Related Parameters Program start, Soak time remain: Page 171, RUN/STOP: Page 172 (operation level) Soak time, Wait band (adjustment level): Page 191 Soak time unit (advanced function setting level): Page 243

Initial Setting Level Section 5-7

C-CP The cooling control output and heat- ing control output must be assigned Control Period (Heating) to relay or voltage outputs (for driving SSR). The control must be set to 2-PID control. Control Period (Cooling) For the Control Period (Cooling) parameter, the control must be set to heating/cooling control.

+ These parameters set the output periods. Set the control periods taking the control characteristics and the electrical durability of the relay into consideration. Function - For standard control, use the Control Period (Heating) parameter. The Control Period (Cooling) parameter cannot be used. + When the heating control output is a current output, the Control Period (Heating) parameter cannot be used. + For heating/cooling control, the control period can be set independently for heating and cooling. The Control Period (Heating) parameter is used for the heating control output, and the Control Period (Cooling) parameter is used for the cooling control output Parameter name Setting range Unit Default C} Control Period (Heating) |0.5or1to99 |Second 20 Setting Control Period (Cooling) |0.5 or 1 to 99 Second 20 EH Related Parameters See PID ON/OFF (initial setting level): Page 204 oREY Direct/Reverse Operation

+ “Direct operation” refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased when the process value increases. Alternatively, “reverse oper- ation” refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased when the process value decreases. Setting range Default aR-F: Reverse operation, af -d: Direct operation oR-R

Initial Setting Level

ALE | Alarm 1 Type Alarm 1 must be assigned.

+ Select one of the following alarm 1 types: Deviation, deviation range, absolute value, LBA, or PV change rate alarm. Function Setting Set value Alarm type Alarm output operation Description of function When alarm value X | When alarm value X is positive is negative 0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm 1 (See note | Upper- and lower-limit See note 2. Set the deviation in the set point by

1) setting the alarm upper limit (H)

and alarm lower limit (L). 2 Upper-limit où Xe Set the upward deviation in the set OFF point by setting the alarm value 3 Lower-limit où He Set the downward deviation in the OFF set point by setting the alarm value 4 (See note | Upper- and lower-limit See note 8. Set the deviation in the set point by

1) range setting the alarm upper limit (H)

and alarm lower limit (L). 5 (See note | Upper- and lower-limit See note 4. A standby sequence is added to

1) with standby sequence the upper- and lower-limit alarm

(1). (See note 6.) 6 Upper-limit with standby Xe A standby sequence is added to sequence Es the upper-limit alarm (2). (See note 7 Lower-limit with standby où mixe A standby sequence is added to sequence OFF _ the lower-limit alarm (3). (See note 8 Absolute-value upper- où ei DE The alarm will turn ON if the pro- limit OFF — Es b cess value is larger than the alarm 9 value (X) regardiess of the set point. 9 Absolute-value lower-limit Lex! Lex The alarm will turn ON if the pro- on on d OFF —E OFF : cess value is smaller than the ° alarm value (X) regardless of the set point. 10 Absolute-value upper- où Lx! A standby sequence is added to limit with standby OFF Es ï the absolute-value upper-limit sequence alarm (8). (See note 6.) 11 Absolute-value lower-limit N A standby sequence is added to with standby sequence OFF —+ the absolute-value lower-limit alarm (9). (See note 6.) 12 LBA (alarm 1 type only) |--- Refer to page 118. (See note 7.) 13 PV change rate alarm — Refer to page 72. (See note 8.)

Initial Setting Level Section 5-7 Note (1) With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper- and lower- limit values can be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as “L’ and “H” (2) Set value: 1 (Upper- and lower-limit alarm) Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always ON) ; 11 f 1 H<0,L<0

(4) Set value: 5 (Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence) - For the lower-limit alarms in cases 1 and 2 above, the alarm is normal- ly OFF if upper- and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. + In case 3, the alarm is always OFF. (5) Set value: 5 (The alarm is always OFF if upper- and lower-limit alarm hys- teresis with standby sequence overlaps.) (6) Refer to 4-2-1 Standby Sequence for information on the operation of the standby sequence. (7) Refer to 4-12-1 Loop Burnout Alarm (LBA) (8) Refer to PV Change Rate Alarm on page 72. + Set the alarm type independently for each alarm in the Alarm 1 to 3 Type parameters in the initial setting level. The default is 2 (Upper-limit alarm). EH Related Parameters Se) Alarm value 1: Page 172, Alarm value upper limit 1, Alarm value lower limit 1: Page 174 (operation level) Standby sequence reset: Page 221, Auxiliary output 1 open in alarm: Page 222, Alarm 1 latch: Page 227 (advanced function setting level), Alarm 1 hys- teresis: Page 209 (initial setting level)

Initial Setting Level Section 5-7 Alarm 1 must be assigned. RLH 1 Alarm 1 Hysteresis The alarm 1 type must not be 0, 12, or 13. Alarm 2 must be assigned. RLHe Alarm 2 Hysteresis The alarm 2 type must not be 0, 12, or 13. Alarm 3 must be assigned. RLH3 Alarm 3 Hysteresis The alarm 3 type must not be 0, 12, or 13. - These parameters set the hysteresis for alarms 1, 2, and 3.

Function r Models Setting range Unit Default Model with thermocouple/resis- |0.1 to 999.9 °C or °F 0.2 Setting tance thermometer universal (See note.) input Model with analog Input 0.01 to 99.99 %FS 0.02 Note Set “None” as the unit for analog inputs. EH Related Parameters See Alarm value 1 to 3: Page 173, Alarm value upper limit 1 to 3, Alarm value — lower limit 1 to 3: Page 174 (operation level) Alarm 1 to 3 type (initial setting level): Pages 207 to 210 Standby sequence reset: Page 221, Auxiliary output 1 to 3 open in alarm: Page 222, Alarm 1 to 3 latch: Page 227 (advanced function setting level) ALEC Alarm 2 Type Alarm 2 must be assigned. + Select one of the following four alarm 2 types: l Deviation, deviation range, absolute value, or PV change rate alarm. Function Refer to the alarm 1 type list. The 12: LBA (Loop Burnout Alarm) setting in that list cannot be used. Setting EH Related Parameters See Alarm value 2: Page 173, Alarm value upper limit 2, Alarm value lower limit 2: — Page 174 (operation level) Standby sequence reset: Page 221, Auxiliary output * open in alarm: Page 222, Alarm 2 hysteresis: Page 209, Alarm 2 latch: Page 227 (advanced func- tion setting level)

Initial Setting Level Section 5-7 ALEI Alarm 3 Type Alarm 3 must be assigned. + Select one of the following four alarm 3 types: l Deviation, deviation range, absolute value, or PV change rate alarm. Function Refer to the alarm 1 type list. The 12: LBA (Loop Burnout Alarm) setting in f that list cannot be used. Setting EH Related Parameters See Alarm value 3: Page 173, Alarm value upper limit 3, Alarm value lower limit 3: — Page 175 (operation level) Standby sequence reset: Page 221, Auxiliary output * open in alarm: Page 222, Alarm 3 hysteresis: Page 209, Alarm 3 latch: Page 227 (advanced func- tion setting level) _ There must be a transfer output or a ER-E Transfer Output Type current output. + This parameter sets the transfer output type. + The operation is shown in the following table. # Transfer Output Destination Control output 1 Control output 2 Transfer output destination Current output No Control output 1 - Relay output + Voltage output (for driving SSR) - Relay output No No + Voltage output (for driving | ° Relay output SSR) + Voltage output (for driving SSR) & Precision and User Calibration Precision User calibration Transfer output +0.8% FS Supported (See note.) Simple transfer output |+0.3% FS Not supported. Note Refer to SECTION 6 CALIBRATION for details on the calibration procedure.

Initial Setting Level Section 5-7 @ Transfer output type Default

Setting Set point 5P Set point during SP ramp SP-M PV PF MV monitor (heating) My MV monitor (cooling) C-MY H Related Parameter See Transfer output upper limit, Transfer output lower limit (initial setting level): — Page 212

Initial Setting Level Section 5-7 ER-H Transfer Output Upper Limit There must be a transfer output or a current output. ER-L Transfer Output Lower Limit The transfer output type must not be set to OFF. " - This parameter sets the upper and lower limit values of transfer outputs. Function Transfer output Setting range Default Unit F type Transfer Transfer L output lower | output upper limit limit Setting n — " Set point SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP lower limit | SP upperlimit |EU Set point during | SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP ramp PV Temperature | Input setting range lower limit | Input setting Input setting to input setting range upper range lower range upper limit limit limit Analog Analog scaling lower limitto |Scaling lower | Scaling upper analog scaling upper limit limit limit MV monitor Standard —5.0 to 105.0 0.0 100.0 % (heating) Heating/ 0.0 to 105.0 cooling MV monitor 0.0 to 105.0 (cooling) H Related Parameter See Transfer output type (initial setting level): Page 210 at-E Linear Current Output Sante output 1 must be a current This parameter selects the output type for linear current outputs. @ Linear current Default output Setting H-eB:41020mA |1-20 8-28: 0 to 20 mA Note Even when control output 1 is used as a control output or a simple transfer output, 0 to 20 mA can be used. EH Related Parameter See Transfer output type (initial setting level): Page 210

Initial Setting Level Section 5-7 EY-N Number of Multi-SP Uses An event input must be assigned.

Function Setting + Multi-SP is a function for setting set points 0 to 3 in advance, and switch- ing between these set points using a combination of event input ON/OFF signals. + The Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter is used to switch between using two and four preset set points. Setting range Default Oto2 L + Whether the Event Input Assignments 1 and 2 parameters are displayed or hidden is determined by the Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter set- ting. Models with Two Event Inputs, 1 and 2 Event input assignment 1 Event input assignment 2 Description of EV1 and EV2 operation Number of multi- SP uses

Displayed (Multi-SP not used). EV1 and EV2 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign- ment 1 and 2 parameters. Notdisplayed{(Operation/per| Displayed (Event input 2 not |EV1 will be used for the Multi- formed with two Multi-SP used as multi-SP switch). SP function to switch between points.) set points O and 1. EV2 will per- form the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assignment 2 parameter. Notdisplayed (Operation performedwithfourMult-SPpoints-M EV1 and EV2 will be used for the Multi-SP function to switch between set points 0, 1,2, and

The following tables show the relationships between ON/OFF combinations of event inputs 1 and 2 and selected set points. Number of Multi-SP Uses: 1: Even input 1 Selected set point OFF Set point O ON Set point 1 Number of Multi-SP Uses: 2 Even input 1 Even input 2 Selected set point OFF OFF Set point O ON OFF Set point 1 OFF ON Set point 2 ON ON Set point 3

Initial Setting Level

Models with Two Event Inputs, 3 and 4 Event input assignment 3 Event input assignment 4 Description of EV3 and EV4 operation Number of multi- SP uses

Displayed (Multi-SP not used). EV3 and EV4 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign- ment 3 and 4 parameters. Not displayed (Operation per- formed with two Multi-SP points.) Displayed (Event input 4 not used as multi-SP switch). EV3 will be used for the Multi- SP function to switch between set points 0 and 1. EV4 will perform the operation com- mand assigned using the Event Input Assignment 4 parameter. Not displayed (Operation performed with four Multi-SP points.) EV3 and EV4 will be used for the Multi-SP function to switch between set points O, 1,2, and 3. The following tables show the relationships between ON/OFF combinations of event inputs 3 and 4 and selected set points. Number of Multi-SP Uses: 1: Even input 3 Selected set point OFF Set point O ON Set point 1 Number of Multi-SP Uses: 2 Even input 3 Even input 4 Selected set point OFF OFF Set point O ON OFF Set point 1 OFF ON Set point 2 ON ON Set point 3 Models with Four Event Inputs, 1 to 4 Event input | Event input | Event input | Event input Description of EV1, EV2, assignment 1 | assignment 2 assignment 3 | assignment 4 EV3, and EVA4 operation Number of Multi- SP Uses Displayed (Muiti-SP not used). EV1, EV2, EV3, and EVA will perform the operation com- mand assigned using the Event Input Assignment 1, 2, 3, and 4 parameters. Not displayed (Operation performed with two Multi- SP points.) Displayed (Event inputs 2, 3, and 4 cannot be used for multi-SP switching.) EV1 will be used for the Multi- SP function to switch between set points 0 and 1. EV2, EVS, and EV4 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign- ment 2, 3, and 4 parameters. Not displayed (Operation per- formed with four Multi-SP points.) Displayed (Event inputs 3 and 4 cannot be used for multi-SP switching.) EV1 and EV2 will be used for the Multi-SP function to switch between set points O, 1, 2, and 3. EV3 and EVA will per- form the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assignment 3 and 4 parameters.

Only event inputs 1 and 2 are used for the multi-SP function.

Initial Setting Level

The following tables show the relationships between ON/OFF combinations of event inputs 1 and 2 and selected set points. Number of Multi-SP Uses: 1: Even input 1 Selected set point OFF Set point O ON Set point 1 Number of Multi-SP Uses: 2 Even input 1 Even input 2 Selected set point OFF OFF Set point O ON OFF Set point 1 OFF ON Set point 2 ON ON Set point 3 - The following table shows the functions assigned when an Event Input Assignment (1 or 2) is displayed. Setting Function NoNE None Stop RUN/STOP MANU Auto/Manual Switch PRSE Program start (See note 1.) dRS Invert Direct/Reverse Operation RE -e 100% AT Execute/Cancel #E-t 40% AT Execute/Cancel (See note 2.) NEPE Setting Change Enable/Disable LAE Alarm Latch Cancel Note (1) PRST (Program Start) can be set even when the Program Pattern param- Note See eter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled. (2) This function can be set for heating/cooling control, but the function will be disabled. + When any of the following functions is set for an Event Input Assignment parameter, the same function cannot be set for another Event Input Assignment parameter: STOP (RUN/STOP), MANU (Auto/Manual Switch), PRST (Program Start), DRS (Invert Direct/Reverse Operation), AT-2 (100% AT Execute/Cancel), AT-1 (40% AT Execute/Cancel), WTPT (Setting Change Enable/Disable), or LAT (Alarm Laïch Cancel). Event inputs can be used on the E5SCN-LIME] (with an E53-CNLIBLIN2) or E5SAN/EN-CIMEI-N (with an E53-AKB) Controllers. Turn event inputs ON and OFF while the power is being supplied. Event input ON/OFF changes are detected for inputs of 50 ms or longer. EH Related Parameter SP0 to SP3 (adjustment level): Page 186 Event input assignment 1 and 2: Page 216 (initial setting level), Multi-SP use: Page 220 (advanced function setting level)

Initial Setting Level Section 5-7 An event input must be assigned. Multi-SP must not be used. Er -* Event Input Assignment * (*: 1 and 2) + The following functions can be assigned to event inputs 1 and 2. | RUN/STOP Auto/Manual Switch Program Start Invert Direct/Reverse Operation 100% AT Execute/Cancel 40% AT Execute/Cancel Setting Change Enable/Disable Alarm Latch Cancel + Default: Event Input Assignment 1: NaNE Event Input Assignment 2: SEGP Function Setting Function NoNE None Stop RUN/STOP Setting MANU Auto/Manual PRSE Program start (See note 1.) dRS Invert Direct/Reverse Operation RE -e 100% AT Execute/Cancel BE-t 40% AT Execute/Cancel (See note 2.) NEPE Setting Change Enable/Disable LAE Alarm Latch Cancel Note (1) PRST (Program Start) can be set even when the Program Pattern param- eter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled. (2) This function can be set for heating/cooling control, but the function will be disabled. EH Related Parameter See SP0 to SP3 (adjustment level): Page 186 + Number of multi-SP uses (initial setting level): Page 213 SER Extraction of Square Root Enable An analog input must be supported. This parameter enables and disables square root extraction. Function Setting range Default aN: Enabled, aFF: Disabled OFF Setting

Initial Setting Level Section 5-7 EH Related Parameter See Extraction of square root low-cut point (adjustment level): Page 194 =t7 : ï The Initial Setting/Communications Roi Move to Advanced Function Setting Level ct parameter must be set 10 0. + Set the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter set value to | “169 Function e to the advanced function setting level either by pressing | Key or Key or by waiting or two seconds to elapse. EH Related Parameter See Initial setting/communication protect (protect level): Page 160

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 5-8 Advanced Function Setting Level

The advanced function setting level is used for optimizing Controller perfor- mance. To move to this level, input the password (“169”) from the initial set- ting level. To be able to enter the password, the Initial Setting/Communications Protect parameter in the protect level must be set to O. + The parameters in this level can be used when the Initial Setting/Commu- nications Protect parameter is set to 0. + To switch between setting levels, press the [0] Key. + To change set values, press the Al and F1 Keys. Operation — Adjustment Level Level Press the 2] Key less than 1 s. Pressthe | PressthelO)Key JlCIKey [ET 0] press the [0] Key for at for at least 1 s fra B. f leastss. J least3s. [En ‘100 . | Control stops. Communi- cations Initial Setting —> Level Seting Press the Leval CI Key for less than 1 s Press the [0] Key Password input for at least 1 s. Ÿ st value -169 Acer Aniton Control in progress Setting Level C2 Control stopped

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 [ Advanced Function Setting Level ]

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 cNCE Parameter Initialization + This parameter returns all parameter settings to their defaults. l - After the initialization, the set value automatically turns aFF. Function Setting range Default aFF: Initialization is not executed. oFF FACE: Initializes to the factory settings described in the manual. Setting . The model must not support event MSPU Multi-SP Uses inputs, or the number of multi-SP uses must be O. This parameter enables switching between set points 0 to 3 by operating the l keys on the front panel. Function Prerequisites + À model without event inputs + The Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter set to 0 on a model with event inputs aN: Set points 0 to 3 can be selected. C\ 5FF: Set points 0 to 3 cannot be selected. + Default: OFF Setting EH Related Parameters See Multi-SP set point setting (operation level): Page 167 Number of multi-SP uses (Initial setting level): Page 213 SPRL SP Ramp Time Unit QT parameter must be set to + This parameter sets the time unit for the rate of change during SP ramp | operation. Function Setting range Default OC) 5: EU/s, #: EU/min, H#: EU/h # Setting EH Related Parameters See Ramp SP monitor (operation level): Page 167 SP ramp set value (adjustment level): Page 193

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 RESE Alarm 1 to 3 type must be 5, 6, 7, 10, or 11. Standby Sequence Reset

Setting See + This parameter selects the conditions for enabling reset after the standby sequence of the alarm has been canceled. + Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level, communi- cations setting level, advanced function setting level, or calibration level. + Condition A Control started (including power ON), and set point, alarm value (alarm value upper/lower limit), or input shift value (upper/lower-limit temperature input shift value) changed. + Condition B Power ON + The following example shows the reset action when the alarm type is lower-limit alarm with standby sequence. Condition A only SP change Y Alarm j after change) Alarm hysteresis ion À | O: Standby sequence canceled Alarm À - = = k 1 1 ! @:Standby sequence reset Port ï noi Alarm output: ri ï _— Condition A Alarm output: LT Condition B Setting range Default A: Condition A, &: Condition B A EH Related Parameters Alarm 1 to 3 type (initial setting level): Page 207 to 209 Alarm 1 to 3 latch (advanced function setting level): Page 227

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 Auxiliary Output * Open in Alarm Auxiliary output 1, 2, or 8 must be SE*N (: 1 to 3) assigned. - This parameter sets the output status of auxiliary outputs 1 to 3. l + When Close in Alarm is set, the status of the auxiliary output function is output unchanged. When Open in Alarm is set, the status of the auxiliary Function output function is reversed before being output. The following table shows the relationship between the auxiliary output function, auxiliary output, and operation displays (SUB1 to SUB3). Auxiliary output | Auxiliary output | Operation display @ function (SUB1 to SUB3) Close in Alarm |ON ON Lit Setting OFF OFF Not lit Open in Alarm |ON OFF Lit OFF ON Not lit Setting range Default -a: Close in alarm, #-£: Open in alarm N-a EH Related Parameters See Auxiliary output 1 to 3 assignment (advanced function setting level): Pages — 240 to 242 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be HBU HB ON/OFF supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned. + Set to use the heater burnout alarm.

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8

Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Burnout Detection parameter must be set to ON. Heater Burnout Latch

+ When this parameter is set to ON, the heater burnout alarm is held until either of the following conditions is satisfied. a Heater burnout detection is set to 0.0 A. Function b The power is cycled. c The latch is cancelled by the PF Key. (PF Setting = LAT: Alarm Laich Cancel) d The latch is cancelled by an event input. (Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 = LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel) + Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level, communi- cations setting level, advanced function setting level, or calibration level. Setting range Default C\ aN: Enabled, af F: Disabled oFF Setting EH Related Parameters See Event input assignment 1 and 2 (initial setting level): Page 216 HB ON/OFF: Page 222, PF setting: Page 247 (advanced function setting level) The Heater Burnout parameter must be set to ON. The Heater Burnout Latch parameter HbH Heater Burnout Hysteresis must be set to OFF. Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned.

EH Related Parameters HB ON/OFF (advanced function setting level): Page 222

SE-b ST Stable Range ST must be ON and temperature input, standard control, 2-PID control must be set.

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 AT Calculated Gain Control must be set to 2-PID control. AT Hysteresis Limit Cycle MV Amplitude Function

Limit Cycle MV 5.0 to 50.0 % 20.0 Amplitude Note When the temperature unit is °F, the default is 1.4. EH Related Parameters AT execute/cancel (adjustment level): Page 179

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 NF Input Digital Filter + This parameter sets the time constant for the input digital filter. The follow- l ing diagram shows the effect on data after passing through the digital fil- ter: Function PV before passing through filter Al----. PV after passing through filter

Cratant À Time Input digital filter @ Setting range Unit Default

0.0 to 999.9 Second 0.0

Setting YAd Additional PV Display This parameter adds a display at the beginning of the operation level for the | process value (PV). If there is no need to display the set point, use this to dis- play only the present temperature. Function Set to ON to display, and OFF to not display. Setting range Default C\ aN: Displayed, aFF: Not displayed GFF Setting

This parameter is used to display the manipulated variable (MV). The manipulated variable is displayed when the MV Monitor (Heating) and MV Monitor (Cooling) parameters are set to ON, and not displayed when these parameters are set to OFF. Function Setting range Default C) a%: Displayed, af F: Not displayed GFF Setting EH Related Parameters See MV monitor (heating): Page 175, MV monitor (cooling): Page 176 (operation — level) REE Automatic Display Return Time

+ In the operation level, adjustment level, or monitor/setting item level, the display automatically returns to the PV/SP if there are no key operations for the time set for this parameter. Functi se : se A : eneton + The automatic display return time is disabled when the parameter is set to OFF. (In that case, the display will not be automatically switched.) Setting range Unit Default (( OFF, 1 to 99 Second oFF Setting ml Alarm 1 must be assigned, and the RIL Alarm 1 Latch alarm 1 type must not be 0. fl Alarm 2 must be assigned, and the ROLE Alarm 2 Latch alarm 2 type must not be O or 12. AILE Alarm 3 Latch Alarm 3 must be assigned, and the alarm 3 type must not be 0 or 12. Function + When this parameter is set to ON, the alarm function is held until one of the following conditions is satisfied. a The poweris cycled. b The latch is cancelled by the PF Key. (PF Setting = LAT: Alarm Laich Cancel) c The latch is cancelled by an event input. (Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 = LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel)

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 + The output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level, com- munications setting level, advanced function setting level, or calibration level. - If an auxiliary output is set to close in alarm, the output is kept closed. If it is set to open in alarm, it is kept open. Setting range Default @ aN: Enabled, af F: Disabled oFF Setting EH Related Parameters See Alarm value 1 to 3: Page 172 to 173, Alarm value upper limit 1 to 3: Page 174 — to 175, Alarm value lower limit 1 to 3: Page 174 to 175 (operation level) Alarm 1 to 3 type (initial setting level): Page 207 to 210 Standby sequence reset: Page 221, Auxiliary output 1 to 3 open in alarm: Page 222 (advanced function setting level), Alarm 1 to 3 hysteresis: Page 209 (initial setting level) Event input assignment 1 and 2 (initial setting level): Page 216 HB ON/OFF: Page 222, PF setting: Page 247 (advanced function setting level) PRLE Move to Protect Level Time

+ This parameter sets the key pressing time required to move to the protect level from the operation level, the adjustment level, or monitor/setting item level. Function Setting range Unit Default 1 to 30 Second 3 Setting EH Related Parameters See Operation/adjustment protect, Initial setting/communications protect, Setting — change protect (protect level): Page 160 GERG Input Error Output Alarm 1 must be assigned, but not to a work bit output.

+ When this parameter is set to ON, the output assigned for alarm 1 turns ON for input errors. Note For details on input errors, refer to Error Displays on page 281. - The alarm 1 output is an OR output of alarm 1, HB alarm/HS alarm, heater overcurrent alarm, and input error. + Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level, communi- cations setting level, advanced function setting level, or calibration level.

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 Setting range Default aN: Enabled, af F: Disabled oFF alt T af î ñ Input type must be thermocouple or Luc Cold Junction Compensation Method infrared temperature sensor - This parameter specifies whether cold junction compensation is to be per- | formed internally by the Controller or to be performed externally when the input type setting is 5 to 22, 24, or 25. Function + The cold junction compensation external setting is enabled when the tem- peraiure difference is measured using two thermocouples or two ES1B Sensors. Setting range Default @ ke Internally, af F: Externally ET Setting EH Related Parameters See Input type (initial setting level): Page 200 Communications must be supported. RLRY MB Command Logic Switching CompoWay/F must be selected as the protocol. + This parameter switches the logic of the MB command (communications | writing switch) for the SYSWAY communications protocol Function + The MB command (communications writing switch) is the equivalent of the MB command (remote/local switch) of the E5L 1. + The setting indicated by the shaded cell indicates the default (same logic @ as E5LU). Set Text data of MB command Setting value 0000 0001 OFF Communications writing enabled | Communications writing disabled (remote mode selection) (local mode selection) ON Communications writing disabled | Communications writing enabled (local mode selection) (remote mode selection) (Terms in parentheses () are the terms used on the ESL NW.) EH Related Parameters See Communications writing (adjustment level): Page 180 Protocol setting (communications setting level): Page 255

Function Use the PV color change function to change the color of the PV display (No. 1 display). There are three display colors, orange, red, and green, and you can select from the following three modes and eight types. + Constant: This mode displays orange, red, or green all the time. + Linked to Alarm 1: This mode switches the PV display color from red to green when alarm 1 turns ON or from green to red when alarm 1 turns ON. + Linked to PV stable band: This mode switches the PV display color between red outside the PV stable band and green within PV stable band, or between green outside the PV stable band and red within PV stable band. Set the PV stable band in the PV Stable Band parameter in the advanced function setting level. + The default is FEd (red). The following table shows the display functions that can be set using the PV color change function. Setting

Mode Setting | Function PV change color Application example Constant |af£ Orange Constant: Orange To match the display color with other Controller models REd Red Constant: Red To match the display color with other Controller models CRN Green Constant: Green To match the display color with other Controller models Linked to Alarm alarm 1 value

ALM1 ON ALM1 Application example OFF R-G Red to Red Green To display the PV reached Green signal G-R Green to Green Red To display error signals Red

Mode Setting | Function PV change color Application example Linked to Within Within PV stable PV stable PV stable band band band Lie: Low i Within High

Low PV stable band |High Application example R-LR Red to Red Green Red To display stable status Green to Red G-aR Green to Green |Orange Red To display stable status Orange to Red auf Orange to |Orange | Green Red To display stable status Green to Red EH Related Parameters See PV stable band (advanced function setting level): Page 231 PY-b PV Stable Band This parameter sets the PV stable band width within which the PV display color is changed. + When the mode to link to the PV stable band is selected with the PV Function Change Color parameter, the PV display color will change according to whether the present value (PV) is lower than, within, or higher than the PV stable band, as shown in the following figure. - There is a hysteresis of 0.2 (°C or °F). PV stable , PV stable ; band band : Low (| Within | High : ! > PV F À f

0.2 (°C or °F) SP 0.2 (°C or °F)

When analog inputs are used: 0.02 (%FS) @ Models Setting range Unit Default Controllers with Thermocouple/Resis- |0.1 to 999.9 °Cor°F 5.0 Setting tance Thermometer Universal Inputs (See note.) Controllers with Analog Inputs 0.01 to 99.99 %FS 5.00 Note Set “None” as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inpuits. EH Related Parameters See PV change color (advanced function setting level): Page 230

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 Alarm 1 must be assigned, and the Alarm 1 ON Delay alarm 1 type must not be 0, 12, or

Alarm 2 must be assigned, and the Alarm 2 ON Delay alarm 2 type must not be 0, 12, or

Alarm 3 must be assigned, and the Alarm 3 ON Delay alarm 3 type must not be 0, 12, or

Alarm 1, 2, or 3 outpuis are prevented from turning ON until after the delay times set in these parameters have elapsed. + Set the time for which the ON delay is to be enabled. Function + To disable the ON delay, set O. Setting Setting range Unit Default 0 to 999 Second 0 EH Related Parameters See Alarm 1 to 3 type (initial setting level): Pages 207 to 210 . Alarm 1 must be assigned, and the A loF Alarm 1 OFF Delay alarm 1 type must not be 0, 12, or L Alarm 2 must be assigned, and the ReoF Alarm 2 OFF Delay alarm 2 type must not be 0, 12, or L Alarm 3 must be assigned, and the R3oF Alarm 3 OFF Delay alarm 3 type must not be 0, 12, or

Alarm 1, 2, or 3 outputs are prevented from turning OFF until after the delay times set in these parameters have elapsed. + Set the time for which the OFF delay is to be enabled. + To disable the OFF delay, set O. Setting range Unit Default 0 to 999 Second 0 EH Related Parameters Alarm 1 to 3 type (initial setting level): Pages 207 to 210

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 RMAd Auto/Manual Select Addition The control must be set to 2-PID control.

This parameter executes robust tuning (RT). + When AT or ST is executed with RT selected, PID constants are automat- ically set which make it hard for control performance to degenerate even when control object characteristics are changed. + Even when hunting occurs for PID constants when AT or ST is executed in normal mode, it is less likely to occur when AT or ST is executed in RT mode. Setting range Default aN: RT function OFF, oFF: RT function ON oFF EH Related Parameters AT execute/cancel: Page 179, Proportional band, Integral time, Derivative time: Page 188 (adjustment level) PID ON/OFF: Page 204, ST: Page 205 (initial setting level)

HS Alarm Use Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned.

Function Setting See + When this parameter is set to ON, the HS alarm is held until any of the fol- lowing conditions is satisfied.

The HS alarm current is set to 50.0 A. The power is cycled. The latch is cancelled by the PF Key. (PF Setting = LAT: Alarm Laich Cancel) The latch is cancelled by an event input. (Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 = LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel) + Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level, communi- cations setting level, advanced function setting level, or calibration level. Setting range Default aN: Enabled, aFF: Disabled OFF EH Related Parameters HS alarm use (advanced function setting level): Page 235 Event input assignment 1 and 2 (initial setting level): Page 216 HB ON/OFF: Page 222, PF setting: Page 247 (advanced function setting level)

H5H HS Alarm Hysteresis Heater burnout and HS alarms must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON. The HS Alarm Latch parameter must be set to OFF.

- This parameter sets the hysteresis for HS alarms. Function Setting range Unit Default C\ 0.1 to 50.0 A 0.1 Setting EH Related Parameters See HS alarm use (advanced function setting level): Page 235 Alarm 1 must be assigned. LEA LBA Detection Time The alarm type must be set to 12 (LBA). Function

LBA Level Alarm 1 must be assigned. The alarm type must be set to 12 (LBA). The LBA detection time must not be 0. - This parameter sets the LBA level. - If the deviation between the SP and PV exceeds the LBA level, a loop burnout is detected. Function Models Setting range Unit Default CC) Controllers with Thermocouple/Resis- | 0.1 to 999.9 °C or °F 8.0 tance Thermometer Universal Inputs (See note.) Setting Controllers with Analog Inputs 0.01 to 99.99 %FS 10.00 Note Set “None” as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inpuits. EH Related Parameters See Process value/set point (operation level): Page 165 Alarm 1 type (initial setting level): Page 207 LBA detection time: Page 236, LBA band: Page 237 (advanced function set- ting level) Alarm 1 must be assigned. The alarm type must be set to 12 LbAb LBA Band (LBA). The LBA detection time must not be

• If a control deviation greater than the LBA band is not reduced when the LBA level is exceeded, an loop burnout is detected. Models Setting range Unit Default Controllers with Thermocouple/Resis- | 0.0 to 999.9 °Cor°F 3.0 tance Thermometer Universal Inputs (See note.) Controllers with Analog Inputs 0.00 to 99.99 %FS 0.20 Set “None” as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs. EH Related Parameters Process value/set point (operation level): Page 165 Alarm 1 type (initial setting level): Page 207 LBA detection time, LBA level (advanced function setting level): Page 236

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 = : The transfer output type must be set CTH Control Output 1 Assignment to OFF when the control output is a current output. + This parameter sets the function to be assigned to control output 1.

Function Setting range Default OC ñoNE: No function is assigned to control output 1. a CH Heating control output is output. Settng £-a: Cooling control output is output. (See note 1.) AL" !: Alarm 1 is output. (See note 2.) ALME: Alarm 2 is output. (See note 2.) ALM3: Alarm 8 is output. (See note 2.) PÆNd: Program end is output. (See notes 2 and 3.) RALM: Control output ON/OFF count alarm (See note 2.) WAR 1: Work bit 1 (See notes 2 and 4.) HR: Work bit 2 (See notes 2 and 4.) WA: Work bit 3 (See notes 2 and 4.) WR4: Work bit 4 (See notes 2 and 4.) WARS: Work bit 5 (See notes 2 and 4.) WRG: Work bit 6 (See notes 2 and 4.) HR: Work bit 7 (See notes 2 and 4.) WRE: Work bit 8 (See notes 2 and 4.) Note (1) If£-0 is assigned for standard control, a value equivalent to 0% is output. (2) Can be selected for relay and voltage outputs (for driving SSR) only. (3) Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled. (4) WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used. EH Related Parameters See Standard or heating/cooling: Page 204, Program pattern: Page 205, Transfer output type: Page 210 (initial setting level)

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 oùte Control Output 2 Assignment Control output 2 must be assigned. [— + This parameter sets the function to be assigned to control output 2. Function Setting range Default @ NaNE: No function is assigned to control output 2. Nan! ë: Heating control output is output. (See note Setting £-8: Cooling control output is output. (See note 1.) 3) AL !: Alarm 1 is output. ALME: Alarm 2 is output. ALM3: Alarm 8 is output. PÆNd: Program end is output. (See note 2.) RALM: Control output ON/OFF count alarm WAR 1: Work bit 1 (See note 4.) WA: Work bit 2 (See note 4.) WAR: Work bit 3 (See note 4.) WR4: Work bit 4 (See note 4.) WARS: Work bit 5 (See note 4.) WRG: Work bit 6 (See note 4.) WA: Work bit 7 (See note 4.) WRE:_ Work bit 8 (See note 4.) Note (1) If £-0 is assigned for standard control, a value equivalent to 0% will be output. (2) Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled. (3) If the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter is set to heating/cooling control, control automatically switches to £ -a. (4) WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used. EH Related Parameters See Standard or heating/cooling: Page 204, Program pattern: Page 205, (initial — setting level)

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 Süb ! Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Auxiliary output 1 must be assigned.

+ This parameter sets the function to be assigned to auxiliary output 1. Setting range Default NGNE: No function is assigned to auxiliary output 1. CET ë: Heating control output is output. Si note £-5:_ Cooling control output is output. (See note 1.) (See note ALM ! Alarm 1 is output. 5) ALME: Alarm 2 is output. ALM3: Alarm 8 is output. PÆNd: Program end is output. (See note 2.) RALM: Control output ON/OFF count alarm

Wi Work bit 1 (See note 4.) WA: Work bit 2 (See note 4.) WAR: Work bit 3 (See note 4.) WR4: Work bit 4 (See note 4.) WARS: Work bit 5 (See note 4.) WRG: Work bit 6 (See note 4.) WA: Work bit 7 (See note 4.) WRE:_ Work bit 8 (See note 4.) (1) If £-0 is assigned for standard control, a value equivalent to 0% will be output. (2) Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled. (3) If a setting is changed when the Program Pattern parameter is not set to OFF, control automatically switches to P.ENd. (4) WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used. (5) If the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter is set to heating/cooling control, this parameter will automatically be set to £ -&. EH Related Parameters Program pattern (initial setting level): Page 205

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 SUbe Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary output 2 must be assigned. [— + This parameter sets the function to be assigned to auxiliary output 2. Function Setting range Default NGNE: No function is assigned to auxiliary output 2. ALNE ë: Heating control output is output. Si note £-8: Cooling control output is output. (See note 1.) ° AL !: Alarm 1 is output. ALME: Alarm 2 is output. ALM3: Alarm 8 is output. PÆNd: Program end is output. (See note 2.) RALM: Control output ON/OFF count alarm WAR 1: Work bit 1 (See note 4.) WA: Work bit 2 (See note 4.) WAR: Work bit 3 (See note 4.) WR4: Work bit 4 (See note 4.) WARS: Work bit 5 (See note 4.) WRG: Work bit 6 (See note 4.) WA: Work bit 7 (See note 4.) WRE:_ Work bit 8 (See note 4.) Note (1) If £-0 is assigned for standard control, a value equivalent to 0% will be output. (2) Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled. (3) If the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter is set to heating/cooling control when there is no control output 2 (E5CN/CN-U), control automat- ically switches to £ -a. (4) WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used. EH Related Parameters See Standard or heating/cooling: Page 204, Program pattern: Page 205, (initial — setting level)

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 mn n Auxiliary output 3 must be assigned Süb3 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment (ESAN and ÉSEN oniy). Pa + This parameter sets the function to be assigned to Auxiliary output 3. Function Setting range Default a NGNE: No function is assigned to auxiliary output 3. ALA3 E Heating control output is output. (See note Setting £-6: Cooling control output is output. (See note 1.) 3) AL !: Alarm 1 is output. ALME: Alarm 2 is output. ALM3: Alarm 8 is output. PÆNd: Program end is output. (See note 2.) RALM: Control output ON/Off count alarm WAR 1: Work bit 1 (See note 4.) WA: Work bit 2 (See note 4.) WA: Work bit 3 (See note 4.) WR4: Work bit 4 (See note 4.) WARS: Work bit 5 (See note 4.) WRG:_ Work bit 6 (See note 4.) WA: Work bit 7 (See note 4.) WRE: Work bit 8 (See note 4.) Note (1) If £-0 is assigned for standard control, a value equivalent to 0% will be output. (2) Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled. (3) If the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter is set to heating/cooling control when there is no control output 2 (E5AN/EN), control automatical- ly switches to L-. (4) WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used. EH Related Parameters See Standard or heating/cooling: Page 204, Program pattern: Page 205, (initial — setting level)

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 CSEL Character Select + This parameter switches the characters to be displayed. l The following two types of characters can be displayed. 11-segment display Function 7-segment display Setting range Default A: 11-segment display, FF: 7-segment display ET Setting When set to a\, an 11-segment display is used. . ï ï The Program Pattern parameter E-Ù Soak Time Unit must not be set to OFF. + Set the soak time unit for the simple program function.

Function Setting range Default M: Minutes, H: Hours M Setting EH Related Parameters See Program start, Soak time remain (operation level): Page 171 + Soak time, Wait band (adjustment level): Page 191 Program pattern (initial setting level): Page 205

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 ALSP Alarm 1, 2, and 3 functions must be assigned. The SP Ramp Set Value parameter must not be set to OFF. The ST parameter must be set to OFF. The alarm type must be set to 1, 2,3, 4,5,6, or 7. Alarm SP Selection

Function This parameter sets whether the set point that triggers a deviation alarm dur- ing SP ramp operation is to be the ramp SP or target SP. + Set whether the set point that triggers a deviation alarm is the ramp SP or target SP. Setting range Default SP-M: Ramp SP, 5P: SP SP EH Related Parameters See SP ramp set value (adjustment level): Page 193 — ST (initial setting level): Page 205 MON imi The control must be set to 2-PID MANL Manual MV Limit Enable control. Function Setting See

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 PYRP ï ï Alarms 1, 2, and 3 must be assigned. PV Rate of Change Calculation Period The alarm type must be set to 13.

Function + The change width can be found for PV input values in any set period. Dif- ferences with previous values in each set period are calculated, and an alarm is output if the results exceed the alarm value. + The PV rate of change calculation period can be set in units of 250 ms (sampling period). Setting range Unit Default 1 to 999 Sampling period 4a(ts) Setting EH Related Parameters See Present value, Process value/set point (operation level): Page 165 Alarm 1 to 3 type, (Initial setting level): Pages 207 to 210 CSCR Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjust- The control must be set to heating/ Lac ment cooling control and 2-PID control. Function

[L_] Setting See + By setting the Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment parameter to ON, autotuning can be executed during heating/cooling control to auto- matically calculate the cooling coefficient at the same time as the PID parameters. |f there is strong non-linear gain for the cooling characteris- tics, such as when cooling water boils for cooling control, it may not be possible to obtain the optimum cooling coefficient at the Controller, and control may take the form of oscillating waves. If that occurs, increase the proportional band or the cooling coefficient to improve control. Setting range Default aN: Enabled, afF: Disabled [OFF EH Related Parameters Cooling coefficient (adjustment level): Page 189

Function Setting range Default aN: Enabled, aFF: Disabled [ON Setting Heater burnout, HS alarms, and _ heat t detecti t bé ac Heater Overcurrent Latch Supported (wo CT) Alarm 1 must be assigned. + When this parameter is set to ON, the heater overcurrent alarm is held l until any of the following conditions is satisfied. a Heater overcurrent detection is set to 50.0 A. b The power is cycled. c The latch is cancelled by the PF Key. (PF Setting = LAT: Alarm Laich Cancel) d The latch is cancelled by an event input. (Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 = LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel) + Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level, communi- cations setting level, advanced function setting level, or calibration level. Function Setting range Default aN: Enabled, afF: Disabled [OFF Setting EH Related Parameters See Heater overcurrent detection 1, Heater overcurrent detection 2 (adjustment — level): Pages 181, and 183 Heater overcurrent use (advanced function setting level): Page 246 Heater overcurrent hysteresis (advanced function setting level): Page 247 Event input assignment 1 and 2 (initial setting level): Page 216 HB ON/OFF: Page 222, PF setting: Page 247 (advanced function setting level)

acH Heater Overcurrent Hysteresis Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported, and alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON, and the Heater Overcurrent Latch parameter must be set to OFF.

- This parameter sets the hysteresis for heater overcurrent detection. Function = Setting range Unit Default @ 0.1 to 50.0 A 01 Setting EH Related Parameters See Heater overcurrent use (advanced function setting level): Page 246 PF PF Setting The PF Key must be supported (ESAN/EN).

Setting + This parameter sets the function of the PF Key. + The default is A-M. Set value Setting Function OFF: aff Disabled Does not operate as a function key.

Specifies RUN status. STOP: 5taP |STOP Specifies STOP status. R-S: R-5 operation Reversing RUN/STOP Specifies reversing RUN/STOP opera- tion status. AT-2: RE -0 100%AT Specifies reversing 100% AT Execute/ Execute/Cancel Cancel status. (See note 1.) AT-1:8E- 1 40%AT Specifies reversing 40% AT Execute/ Execute/Cancel Cancel status. (See note 1.) LAT: LAE Alarm Latch Cancel Specifies canceling alarm latches. (See note 2.) A-M: AH Auto/Manual Specifies reversing Auto/Manual status (See note 3.) PFDP: PFdP_ | Monitor/Setting Item Specifies the monitor/setting item dis- play. Select the monitor/setting item using the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters (advanced function setting level). Note (1) When AT cancel is specified, it means that AT is cancelled regardless of whether the AT currenily being executed is 100% AT or 40% AT.

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 (2) Alarms 1 to 3, heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent latches are cancelled. (3) For details on auto/manual operations using the PF Key, refer to 4-13 Per- forming Manual Control. EH Related Parameters See Monitor/setting item 1 to 5 (advanced function setting level): Page 248 PFd* Monitor/Setting Item * (*: 1 to 5) qe PR pen parameter must be + Set the PF Key parameter to Monitor/Setting ltem to enable using the l function key to display monitor/setting items. The items that will be dis- played are set using the Monitor/Setting ltem 1 to 5 parameters. The set- Function tings are listed in the following table. Set value Setting Remarks CF Monitor/Setting Symbol 0 Disabled Setting 1 PV/SP/Multi-SP Can be set. (SP) _— 2 PV/SP/MV (See note.) Can be set. (SP) — 3 PV/SP/Soak time remain Can be set. (SP) — 4 Proportional band (P) Can be set. P 5 Integral time (1) Can be set. D 6 Derivative time (D) Can be set. d 7 Alarm value 1 Can be set. Ai- 8 Alarm value upper limit 1 Can be set. ACIH 9 Alarm value lower limit 1 Can be set. ALL 10 Alarm value 2 Can be set. Al-e 11 Alarm value upper limit 2 Can be set. ALEH 12 Alarm value lower limit 2 Can be set. filet 13 Alarm value 3 Can be set. AL -3 14 Alarm value upper limit 3 Can be set. AUIH 15 Alarm value lower limit 3 Can be set. ALL Note The MV for heating and cooling control is set in the MV Display Selection parameter. EH Related Parameters See PF setting: Page 247, MV display selection: Page 249 (advanced function set- ting level)

SPdP PV/SP Display Screen Selection The No. 3 display must be supported (ESAN/EN).

- This parameter sets the PV/SP Screen No. 3 display and order of display. + The default is 4.% %* A 2-level display is set at the time of shipping from the factory. (set val- Function ue: 0) A 3-level display is activated if parameters are initialized. (set value: 4) Set value Display contents C) 0 Only PV/SP is displayed (with no No. 3 display). Setting 1 PV/SP/Multi-SP and PV/SP/MV are displayed in order. (See note.) 2 PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Multi-SP are displayed in order. (See note.) 3 Only PV/SP/Multi-SP is displayed. 4 PV/SP/MV is displayed (See note.) 5 PV/SP/Multi-SP and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order. (See note.) 6 PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order. (See note.) 7 Only PV/SP/Soak time remain is displayed. Note The MV for heating and cooling control is set in the MV Display Selection parameter. EH Related Parameters See Process value/set point (operation level): Page 165 MV display selection (advanced function setting level): Page 249 The No. 3 display must be supported (ESANÆEN). Heating and cooling control must be od5£ MY Display Selection used. The PV/SP Display Screen Selection parameter must be set to 1,2, 4, or 6, or the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameter must be set to 2.

Setting + This parameter selects the MV display for PV/SP/MV during heating and cooling control. Either heating MV or cooling MV can be selected. Setting range Default : MV (heating)

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 PF dP PV Decimal Point Display a ne must be setto tem- The display below the decimal point in the PV can be hidden for temperature [ inputs. + The PV decimals below the decimal point can be hidden by setting the PV Function Decimal Point Display parameter to OFF. When this parameter is set to ON, the display below the decimal point will appear according to the input type setting. Setting range Default @ aN: ON, 0FF: OFF ON Setting EH Related Parameters Se) Input type (initial setting level): Page 200 PYSE PV Status Display Function - The PVinthe No. 1 display for the PV/SP, PV, or PV/Manual MV Screen is [ alternately displayed in 0.5-s cycles with the control and alarm status specified for the PV status display function. Function D | Monitor range Default FF: No PV status display ET MANU: MANU is alternately displayed during manual control. Monitor SEaP: STOP is alternately displayed while operation is stopped. AL" 1: ALM is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status. L Me: ALM is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status. ALM3: ALMB is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status. LM: ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1, 2, or 3 is set to ON. HA: HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is ON. EH Related Parameters See Process value/set point, PV (operation level): Page 165 PV/MV (manual MV) (manual control level): Page 197

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 SYSE SV Status Display Function - The SP, Blank, or Manual MV in the No. 2 display for the PV/SP, PV, or [Re PV/Manual MV Screen is alternately displayed in 0.5-s cycles with the control and alarm status specified for the SV status display function. Function D ] Monitor range Default FF: No SV status display GFF MANU: MANU is alternately displayed during manual control. Monitor SEaP: STOP is alternately displayed while operation is stopped. LM !: ALMI is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status. ALME: ALML is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status.

M1: ALMB is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status. LM: ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1, 2, or 3 is set to ON. HA: HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is ON. EH Related Parameters See Process value/set point, PV (operation level): Page 165 PV/MV (manual MV) (manual control level): Page 197 REF Display Refresh Period + This parameter delays the display refresh period for monitor values. Only lan display refreshing is delayed, and the refresh period for process values used in control is not changed. Function + This function is disabled by setting the parameter to OFF. D ] Setting range Unit Default OFF, 0.25, 0.5, 1.0 |Second 0.25 Monitor

RAM Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Monitor Control output 1 must be supported. Relay or voltage outputs (for driving SSR) must be used. The Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Alarm Set Value parameter must not be set to 0.

Monitor - This parameter monitors the number of times that control output 1 is turned ON and OFF. - This function is not displayed when the set value is 0, or when the control output is a linear output. Monitor range Unit 0 to 9999 100 times RROM Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Monitor Control output 2 must be supported. Relay or voltage outputs (for driving SSR) must be used. The Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Alarm Set Value parameter must not be set to 0.

- This parameter monitors the number of times that control output 2 is turned ON and OFF. - This function is not displayed when the set value is 0, or when the control output is a linear output. Monitor range Unit 0 to 9999 100 times

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-8 RAR! Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Alarm ©°""0!cuiput 1 mustbe supported. Set Value Relay or voltage outputs (for driving SSR) must be used. Function + An ON/OFF count alarm occurs when the ON/OFF counter exceeds the value set for this parameter. - Itis possible to assign ON/OFF count alarms to auxiliary outputs and to have them displayed on the screen. - This function is disabled when the set value is 0. D | Setting range Unit Default 0 to 9999 100 times 0 Monitor EH Related Parameters See Control output 1 ON/OFF count monitor (advanced function setting level): — Page 252 Pre Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Alarm C0! output 2 must be supported. Relay or voltage outputs (for driving Set Value SSR) must be used.

Monitor See + An ON/OFF count alarm occurs when the ON/OFF counter exceeds the value set for this parameter.

• Itis possible to assign ON/OFF count alarms to auxiliary outputs and to have them displayed on the screen. - This function is disabled when the set value is 0. Setting range Unit Default 0 to 9999 100 times 0 EH Related Parameters Control output 2 ON/OFF count monitor (advanced function setting level): Page 252

Function Setting range Default à 0: Disable the counter reset function. 0 eset the control output 1 ON/OFF counter. Setting 2: Reset the control output 2 ON/OFF counter. Note After the counter has been reset, the set value will be automatically returned to 0. EH Related Parameters See Control output 1 ON/OFF count monitor, Control output 2 ON/OFF count mon- itor (advanced function setting level): Page 252 CMoY Move to Calibration Level Initial seting/communications protect This parameter sets the password to move to the calibration level. + Set the password to move to the calibration level. The password is 1201. / + Move to the calibration level either by pressing the 2] Key or [O] Key or by Function waiting for two seconds to elapse. EH Related Parameter See Initial setting/communications protect (protect level): Page 160

Communications Setting Level

5-9 Communications Setting Level PSEL Protocol Setting Communications must be supported. U-Na Communications Unit No. bP5 Communications Baud Rate LEN Communications Data Length CompoWay/F must be selected as the protocol. Sbct Communications Stop Bits CompoWay/F must be selected as the protocol. PRE Communications Parity Sdh Send Data Wait Time + Each parameter is enabled when the power is reset. + Match the communications specifications of the ESLIN and the host com- puter. If multiple devices are connected, ensure that the communications specifications for all devices in the system (except the Communications unit number) are the same. Item Symbol Set values Settings Default Protocol setting PSEL CKF, Mod CompoWay/F ONF (SYSWAY), Modbus Communications Ü-Na 0 to 99 0 to 99 ! Unit No. Communications BP 1.2, 2.4,4.8,96, 12, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 96 baud rate 19.2, 38.4, or 57.6 19.2, 38.4, or 57.6 (kbps) (kbps) Communications LEN 7 or 8 bits 7 or 8 bits 7 data length Stop bits SbCE 1 or2 bits À or 2 bits ë Communications PREY NGNE, EVEN, dd None, Even, Odd EYEN parity Send data waittime |SdME 0 to 99 0 to 99 (ms) En EH Related Parameter See Communications writing (adjustment level): Page 180

Communications Setting Level Section 5-9

Parameter Structure Section 6-1 6-1 Parameter Structure + To execute user calibration, enter the password “1201” at the Move to Cal- ibration Level parameter in the advanced function setting level. The mode will be changed to the calibration mode, and Ad! will be displayed. + The Move to Calibration Level parameter may not be displayed when the user is doing the calibration for the first time. If this happens, set the Initial Setting/Communications Protect parameter in the protect level to O before moving to the advanced function setting level. + The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF. - The parameter calibrations in the calibration mode are structured as shown below. Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs Advanced Function Setting Level

E GER Ess No When calibration has been performed after purchase, the user calibration information shown in the following illustration will be displayed when moving to the calibration level. A dot is displayed.

User Calibration Section 6-2 6-2 User Calibration The E5CN/CN-U/AN/EN/GN is correctly calibrated before it is shipped from the factory, and normally need not be calibrated by the user. 1f, however, it must be calibrated by the user, use the parameters for calibrat- ing temperature input and analog input. OMRON, however, cannot ensure the results of calibration by the user. Also, calibration data is overwritten with the latest calibration results. The default calibration settings cannot be restored after user calibration. Perform user calibration with care. 6-2-1 Calibrating Inputs The input type selected in the parameter is used for calibration. The input types are as follows: Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs + Thermocouple: 16 types + Infrared temperature sensor: 4 types + Analog input: 1 type + Platinum resistance thermometer: 5 types Controllers with Analog Inputs + Current input: 2 types + Voltage input: 3 types 6-2-2 Registering Calibration Data The new calibration data for each item is temporarily registered. lt can be offi- cially registered as calibration data only when all items have been calibrated to new values. Therefore, be sure to temporarily register all items when you perform the calibration. When the data is registered, it is also recorded that user calibration has been performed. Prepare separate measuring devices and equipment for calibration. For details on how to handle measuring devices and equipment, refer to the respective instruction manuals. 6-3 Thermocouple Calibration (Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Input) + Calibrate according to the type of thermocouple: thermocouple 1 group (input types 5, 7, 11, 12, 15) and thermocouple 2 group (input types 6, 8, 9,10, 13, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25). + When calibrating, do not cover the bottom of the Controller. Also, do not touch input terminals/pins (terminals 4 and 5 on the E5CN, pins 1 and 2 on the ESCN-U, pins 19 and 20 on the ESAN/E5EN, or pins 11 and 12 on the E5GN) or compensating conductors.

Cold junction 0°C/32°F Compensating conductor 6-3-1 Preparations mr) E5CN Input power supply E5AN/EN

EH Connecting the Cold Junction Compensator Cold junction compensator 0°C/32°F Compensating conductor compensator

Cold junction compensator 0°C/32°F Compensating conductor Input power supply Les Cold junction compensator 0°C/32°F Compensating conductor + Set the cold junction compensator designed for compensation of internal thermocouples to 0°C. Make sure that internal thermocouples are dis- abled (i.e., that tips are open). + In the above figure, STV indicates a standard DC current/voltage source. + Use the compensating conductor designed for the selected thermocou- ple. When thermocouples R, S, E, B, W, or PLII or an infrared temperature sensor is used, the cold junction compensator and the compensating con- ductor can be substituted with the cold junction compensator and the compensating conductor for thermocouple K. Correct process values cannot be obtained if you touch the contact ends of the compensating conductor during calibration of a thermocouple. Accord- ingly, short-circuit (enable) or open (disable) the tip of the thermocouple inside the cold junction compensator as shown in the figure below to create a con- tact or non-contact state for the cold junction compensator. Cold junction compensator Cold junction compensator Short-circuit ESON 0°C/322F ESCN DCE — | Open ESCN-U o o ESCN-U

ESEN ESGN Compensating conductor ESQN Compensating conductor

Thermocouple Calibration (Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Input) Section 6-3 In this example, calibration is shown for a Controller with a Thermocouple/ Resistance Thermometer Universal Input, with thermocouple/infrared temper- ature sensor set as the input type. 1,2,3... 1. Connect the power supply.

2. Connect a standard DC current/voltage source (STV), precision digital

multimeter (DMM), and contact junction compensator (e.g., a zero con- troller as in the figure) to the thermocouple input terminals, as shown in the figure below. STV DMM ER Leave open. N [z —{_controller OUTPUT INPUT x Compensating conductor of currently selected thermocouple. Use K thermocouple compensating conductor for E, R, S, B, W, and PLII thermocouples and for an infrared temperature sensor

3. Turn the power ON.

4. Move to the calibration level.

a] Hdi This starts the 30-minute aging timer. This timer provides an approximate Eu [nl timer for aging. After 30 minutes have elapsed, the No. 2 display changes 1 to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if O is not displayed. Input types 5, 7, 11, 12, 15: 5. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. =] The No. 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in E E £ u hexadecimal. Set the STV as follows: BE b9AS Input types 5, 7, 11, 12, 15: Set to 54 mV. Input types 6, 8, 9, 10, 13. 14, 16 Input types 6, 8, 9, 10, 13, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25: mput types 6, 8, 9, 10, 13, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25: Set to 24 mV. Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the E E c4 M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. = c32n If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will ED E cou flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered. a] 6. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. DE -£ Set the STV to -6 mV. Be 2988 Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the ===) : : Les à M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered. a] 7. Press the F2 Key. The display changes as shown on the left. Set the STV Se FAN D L ILILI to 700 mV. De b8 !3 Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered.

Thermocouple Calibration (Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Input) Section 6-3 Fun 8. Press the F2 Key. The display changes as shown on the left. CHE Set the STV to 400 mV. en ÊQhE Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered.

9. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left.

10. Change the wiring as follows:

Open in non-connected state STV DMM Short-circuit N [ze

controller * OUTPUT INPUT Compensating conductor of currently selected thermocouple. Use K thermocouple compensating conductor for E, R, S, B, W, and PLII thermocouples and for an infrared temperature sensor. Disconnect the STV to enable the thermocouple of the cold junction com- pensator. When doing this, be sure to disconnect the wiring on the STV side.

11. Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the

M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. [=] LO 12. When the ES Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. E £ LI The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete. [mi NG Press the [A] Key. The No. 2 display changes to 4E 5. Release the key and wait two seconds or press the Key. This stores the temporarily regis- tered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EEPROM, press the Fe] Key (while Na is dis- played in the No. 2 display) without pressing the [A] Key.

13. The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF.

Use connecting wires of the same thickness. 1,2,3... 1.

Connect the power supply. Connect a precision resistance box (called a “6-dial” in this manual) to the platinum resistance thermometer input terminals, as shown in the follow- ing diagram. E5CN Input power supply — AG B@) 6-dial

E5GN Input power supply —@ A(Ô 8" 6-dial Turn the power ON. Move to the calibration level. This starts the 30-minute aging timer. This timer provides an approximate timer for aging. After 30 minutes have elapsed, the No. 2 display changes to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if O is not displayed. Execute calibration for the main input. Press the € Key to display the count value for each input type. The No. 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal. Set the 6-dial as follows: + Input type 0: 390 Q + Input type 1,2,30or4: 280 Q Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered.

Press the Fe] Key to display the count value for each input type. The No. 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexa- decimal. Set the 6-dial as follows: + Input type 0: 200 Q + Input type 1,2,80or4: 140Q Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered. When the ] Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. Set the 6-dial to 10 Q. Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered. When the ] Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete. Press the [A] Key. The No. 2 display changes to 4E 5. Release the key and wait two seconds or press the Key. This stores the temporarily regis- tered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE- PROM, press the €] Key (while Na is displayed in the No. 2 display) with- out pressing the Key. The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF. 6-5 Analog Input Calibration (Thermocoubple/Resistance Thermometer Input) In this example, calibration is shown for a Controller with a Thermocouple/ Resistance Thermometer Universal Input, with an analog input (0 to 50 mV) set as the input type. ESCN-U Input power supply STV STV DMM DMM

Input power supply Input power supply STV STV DMM DMM

1,2,3... Connect the power supply. Connect an STV and DMM to the analog input terminals (same as ther- mocouple inputs), as shown in the figure above. Turn the power ON. Move to the calibration level. This starts the 30-minute aging timer. This timer provides an approximate timer for aging. After 30 minutes have elapsed, the No. 2 display changes to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if O is not displayed. When the ] Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. The No. 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal. Set the STV to 54 mV. Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered. When the ] Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. Set the STV to -6 mV. Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered. When the ] Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete. Press the [A] Key. The No. 2 display changes to 4E 5. Release the key and wait two seconds or press the Key. This stores the temporarily regis- tered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE- PROM, press the FI Key (while Na is displayed in the No. 2 display) with- out pressing the Key. The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF.

Calibrating Analog Input (Analog Input) Section 6-6 6-6 Calibrating Analog Input (Analog Input) 6-6-1 Calibrating a Current Input In this example, calibration is shown for a Controller with an Analog Input, with a current input set as the input type. 1,2,3... 1. Connect the power supply.

2. Connect an STV and DMM to the current input terminals, as shown in the

Input power supply Input power supply STV STV DMM DMM

Input power supply Input power supply STV STV DMM DMM

3. Turn the power ON.

[a] 4. Move to the calibration level. (=. A L This starts the 30-minute aging timer. This timer provides an approximate Een 20 timer for aging. After 30 minutes have elapsed, the No. 2 display changes = to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if O is not displayed. [a] 5. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. (a A UH The No. 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in One CHEN hexadecimal. Set the STV to 20 mA.

Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered.

6. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left.

Set the STV to 1 mA.

Eu 497 Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered.

7. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left.

The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete. Press the [A] Key. The No. 2 display changes to 4E 5. Release the key and wait two seconds or press the 2 Key. This stores the temporarily regis- tered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE- PROM, press the €] Key (while Na is displayed in the No. 2 display) with- out pressing the Key.

8. The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF.

In this example, calibration is shown for a Controller with an Analog Input, with a voltage input set as the input type. Connect the power supply.

2. Connect an STV and DMM to the voltage input terminals, as shown in the

4. Move to the calibration level.

This starts the 30-minute aging timer. This timer provides an approximate timer for aging. After 30 minutes have elapsed, the No. 2 display changes to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if O is not displayed.

5. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left.

The No. 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal. Set the STV as follows: + Input type 2 or 8: 5V + Input type 4: 10V Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered.

Calibrating Analog Input (Analog Input) Section 6-6 Input type 2 or 3: 6. When the) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. En n Set the STV to 1 V. Ë [12 0 Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the ex SALE M Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. | | If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will Input type 4: flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered. [m] 14 ! G cÿ Ees “Ad9 a] 1 7. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. Ë £ E F The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete. De NG Press the [A] Key. The No. 2 display changes to 4E 5. Release the key and wait two seconds or press the Key. This stores the temporarily regis- tered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE- PROM, press the FI Key (while Na is displayed in the No. 2 display) with- out pressing the Key.

8. The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF.

Checking Indication Accuracy Section 6-7 6-7 Checking Indication Accuracy - After calibrating the input, be sure to check the indication accuracy to make sure that the calibration has been executed correctily. + Operate the E5CN/CN-U/AN/EN in the process value/set point monitor mode. + Check the indication accuracy at the following three values: upper limit, lower limit, and mid-point. 6-7-1 Thermocoubple or Infrared Temperature Sensor + Preparations The diagram below shows the required device connections. Make sure that the E5SCN/CN-U/AN/EN/GN and cold junction compensator are con- nected by a compensating conductor for the thermocouple that is to be used during actual operation. E5CN Input ! NPULPoWEr EUPPY Cold junction compensator … ms STV

Compensating conductor ESCN-U Input 1 NPULPoWEr LUPPY Cold junction compensator STV

Compensating conductor E5AN/EN Input power suppl put p pply à Cold junction compensator . (see STV

Compensating conductor E5GN Input ! MPUL Power EUPPY A Cold junction compensator - ns: STV

Compensating conductor Operation Make sure that the cold junction compensator is at 0°C, and set the STV output to the voltage equivalent of the starting power of the check value. The cold junction compensator and compensation conductor are not required when an external cold junction compensation method is used.

Checking Indication Accuracy

6-7-2 Platinum Resistance Thermometer + Preparations The diagram below shows the required device connections. E5CN Input power supply —+ AG B@ 6-dial E5CN-U Input power supply —@ A@ B' 6-dial ESAN/EN Input power supply 1 @ À B' 6-dial E5GN Input power supply 1 @ À 6-dial + Operation Set the 6-dial to the resistance equivalent to the check value.

Checking Indication Accuracy

+ Preparations The diagram below shows the required device connections. (The connection terminals depend on the model and input type.) Controller with a Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Universal Input (Analog Input) E5CN Input power supply tee STV ESCN-U

STV ESAN/EN Input power supply

Checking Indication Accuracy

Current Input for a Controller with an Analog Input

STV STV STV STV Set the STV output to the voltage or current equivalent to the check value.

Checking Indication Accuracy Section 6-7

Appendix Auxiliary output E5CN SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000 E5CN-U operations Min. applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA E5AN SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000 E5EN operations Min. applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA E5GN SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000 operations, Min. applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA Control method 2-PID or ON/OFF control Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys Indication method 11-segment/7-segment digital display and single-lighting indicator Other functions Depend on the model Ambient temperature —10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing); with 3-year guarantee: -10 to 50°C Ambient humidity 25% to 85% Storage temperature —25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Altitude 2,000 m or less Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time lag, low shut-off capacity Installation environment Installation Category Il, Pollution Class 2 (IEC 61010-1 compliant) Note (1) For the setting ranges for each sensor input, see page 303. (2) When connecting the ES2-THB, connect it 1:1. (3) Always connect an AC load to a long-life relay output. The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected, because a triac is used for switching when closing and opening the circuit. HB, HS, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms (for E5CN/AN/EN/GN Controllers with Heater Burnout, HS, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms) Max. heater current 50 À AC Input current readout accuracy +5% FS #1 digit max. Heater burnout alarm setting 0.1 to 49.9 A (0.1 A units) range 0.0 A: Heater burnout alarm output turns OFF.

50.0 A: Heater burnout alarm output turns ON.

Min. detection ON time: 100 ms (See note 1.) HS alarm setting range 0.1 to 49.9 A (0.1 A units)

0.0 A: HS alarm output turns ON.

50.0 A: HS alarm output turns OFF.

Min. detection OFF time: 100 ms (See note 2.) Heater overcurrent alarm setting |0.1 to 49.9 A (0.1 A units) range 0.0 A: Heater overcurrent alarm output turns ON.

50.0 A: Heater overcurrent alarm output turns OFF.

Min. detection OFF time: 100 ms Note (1) When the control output 1 ON time is less than 100 ms, heater burnout detection, heater overcurrent detection, and heater current measurement are not performed. (2) When the control output 1 OFF time is less than 100 ms, HS alarm, and leakage current measure- ment are not performed. External Power Supply for ES1B Output voltage 12 VDC +10% Output current 20 mA max. Note Contact your OMRON representative for information on using the external power supply for ES1B for other applications.

Appendix Characteristics of 23°C) Indication accuracy (ambient temperature Thermocouple (See note 1.): E5SCN/AN/EN/GN: (+0.3% of PV or +1°C, whichever is greater) +1 digit max. E5CN-U: (1% of PV or +2°C, whichever is greater) +1 digit max. Platinum resistance thermometer: (+0.2% of PV or +0.8°C, whichever is greater) +1 digit max. Analog input: +0.2% FS +1 digit max. CT input: +5% FS +1 digit max. Temperature variation influence (See note 2.) Voltage variation influ- ence (See note 2.) Thermocouple (R, S, B, W, PLII) E5SCN/AN/EN/GN: (+1% of PV or +10°C, whichever is greater) +1 digit max. E5CN-U: (+2% of PV or +10°C, whichever is greater) +1 digit max. Other thermocouples: E5SCN/AN/EN/GN: (+1% of PV or +4°C, whichever is greater) +1 digit max. E5CN-U: (+2% of PV or +4°C, whichever is greater) +1 digit max. *K thermocouple at -100°C max: +10°C max. Platinum resistance thermometer: (41% of PV or +2°C, whichever is greater) +1 digit max. Analog input: +1% FS +1 digit max. CT input: +5% FS +1 digit max. Hysteresis Controllers with Thermocouple/ | 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F Resistance Thermometer Uni- | (in units of 0.1°C or °F) (See note 3.) versal Inputs Controllers with Analog Inputs | 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS) Proportional band (P) Controllers with Thermocouple/ | 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F Resistance Thermometer Uni- | (in units of 0.1 EU) (See note 3.) versal Inputs Controllers with Analog Inputs | 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS) Integral time (l) 0 to 3,999 s (in units of 1 s) Derivative time (D) 0 to 3,999 s (in units of 1 s) When RT is ON: 0.0 to 999.9 (in units of 0.1 s) Control Period 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s) Manual reset value 0.0% to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%) Alarm setting range —1,999 to 9,999 (decimal point position depends on input type) Sampling period 250 ms Insulation resistance 20 MQ min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 2,300 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge Malfunction vibration 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s? for 10 min each in X, Y and Z directions Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s? for 2 hr each in X, Y, and Z directions Malfunction shock 100 m/s?, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Shock resistance 300 m/s?, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Weight E5CN Approx. 150 g Adapter: approx. 10 g Terminal cover: approx. 10 g E5SCN-U | Approx. 110 g — E5AN Approx. 310 g Adapter: approx. 100 g Terminal cover: approx. 1.6 g ESEN | Approx. 260 g per cover E5GN Approx. 90 g Adapter: approx. 10 g — Degree of E5CN Front panel: IP66 protection E5AN Rear case: IP20 E5EN Terminals: IPOO E5GN E5CN-U | Front panel: IP50, rear case: IP20, terminals: IPOO Memory protection EEPROM (non-volatile memory) (number of writes: 1,000,000)

Appendix Note (1) The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the -200 to 1,300°C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of -100°C or less, and U and L thermocouples at any temperature is +2°C +1 digit maximum. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400°C to 800+3°C or less is not specified. The indication accuracy of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200°C or less is +3°C +1 digit maximum. The indication accuracy of W thermocouples is (the larger of +0.3% or +8°C) +1 digit maximum and the indication accuracy of PLII thermocouples is (the larger of +0.3% or +2°C) +1 digit maximum. (2) Ambient temperature: -10°C to 23°C to 55°C Voltage range: -15 to +10% of rated voltage (3) Set “None” as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs. Rating and Characteristics of Options Event inputs Contact Input ON: 1 kQ max., OFF: 100 kQ min. Non-contact Input ON: Residual voltage 1.5 V max.; OFF: Leakage current 0.1 mA max. Communications Transmission path: RS-485/232C Communications method: RS-485 (2-wire, half duplex) or RS-232C Synchronization: Start-stop Baud rate: 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, or 57.6 kbps Transfer output 4to 20 mA DC, Load: 600 Q max., Resolution: 10,000, Accuracy: +0.3% Waterproof Packing If the Waterproof Packing is lost or damage, order one of the following models. Y925-29 (for DIN 48 x 48) Y92S-P4 (for DIN 96 x 96) Y92S-32 (for DIN 48 x 24) Y92S-P4 (for DIN 48 x 96)

Appendix Current Transformer (CT) Item Specifications Model number E54-CT1 E54-CT3 Max. continuous current |50 À 120 A (See note.) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC (for 1 min) Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s? Weight Approx. 11.5g Approx. 50 g Accessories None Armature (2), Plug (2) Note The maximum continuous current of the E5l IN is 50 A. External Dimensions E54-CT1

Appendix E58-CIFQ1 USB-Serial Conversion Cable Item Specifications Applicable OS Windows 2000/XP/Vista Applicable software CX-Thermo Applicable models OMRON E5AN/EN/CN/CN-U/GN Digital Temperature Control- ers USB interface rating Conforms to USB Specification 1.1 DTE speed 38,400 bps Connector specifications Computer end: USB (type A plug) Temperature Controller end: Serial Power supply Bus power (5 VDC supplied from USB host controller) Current consumption 70 mA Ambient operating temperature | 0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing) Ambient operating humidity 10% to 80% Storage temperature —20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing) Storage humidity 10% to 80% Altitude 2,000 m max. Weight Approx. 100 g Compatible Operating Environment A personal computer that includes the following specifications is required. + USB port + CD-ROM drive + Windows 2000/XP/Vista Appearance and Nomenclature Appearance ; (2,100 mm) 250 mm LED (SD) 1,765 mm J A > me (1) USB connector (type A plug) Serial connector LED Indicator Display Indicator Color Status Meaning SD Yellow Lit Sending data from USB-Serial Conversion Cable Not lit Not sending data from USB-Serial Conversion Cable RD Yellow Lit Receiving data from the USB-Serial Conversion Cable Not lit Not receiving data from the USB-Serial Conversion Cable

Appendix Error Displays When an error occurs, the error contents are shown on the No. 1 or the No. 2 display. This section describes how to check error codes on the display, and the actions to be taken to remedy the problems. ( GERR Input Error Meaning The input value has exceeded the control range. (See note.) The input type setting is not correct. The sensor is disconnected or shorted. The sensor wiring is not correct. The sensor is not wired. Note Control Range Resistance thermometer, thermocouple input: Temperature setting lower limit -20°C to temperature setting upper limit +20°C (Temperature setting lower limit -40°F to temperature setting upper limit +40°F) ES1B input: Same as input indication range Analog input —5% to +105% of scaling range Action Check the wiring of inputs for miswiring, disconnections, and short-circuits and check the input type. If no abnormality is found in the wiring and input type, turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the Controller must be replaced. If the display is restored, then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system. Check for electrical noise. Note With resistance thermometer input, a break in the A, B, or B' line is regarded as a disconnection. Operation at Error After an error occurs, the error is displayed and the alarm outputs function as if the upper limit has been exceeded. When the Input Error Output parameter in the advanced function setting level is set to ON, the output assigned to the alarm 1 function turns ON whenever an input error occurs. An error message is displayed when the PV, PV/SP, or PV/MV is displayed. Note The control output turns OFF. When the manual MV, MV at stop, or MV at PV error is set, however the control output corresponds to the set value. Display Range Exceeded

Meaning Though this is not an error, it is displayed if the process value exceeds the display range when the control range is larger than the display range. The display ranges are shown below (with decimal points omitted). + When less than —-1,999 cccc + When more than 9,999 3223

Appendix Action Control continues, allowing normal operation. The message is displayed when the PV, PV/SP, or PV/MV is dis- played. Resistance thermometer input (Except for models with a Resistance thermometer input (Except for models with a setting range of -199.9 to 500.0°C) setting range of -1999. to 500.0°C) Thermocouple input (Except for models with a setting range of Thermocouple input (Except for models with a setting range of

Meaning There is an error in internal circuits. Action First, turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the Controller must be repaired. If the display is restored, then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system. Check for electrical noise. Operation Control output and alarm output turn OFF. [ Eli Memory Error ) Meaning Internal memory operation is in error. Action First, turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the Controller must be repaired. If the display is restored, then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system. Check for electrical noise. Operation at Error Control output and alarm output turn OFF. (Current output is approx. 0 mA). [ FFFEF Current Value Exceeds ) Meaning This error is displayed when the heater current value exceeds 55.0 A.

Appendix Action Control continues, allowing normal operation. An error message is displayed when the following items are dis- played. Heater current 1 value monitor Heater current 2 value monitor Leakage current 1 monitor Leakage current 2 monitor FL I == Heater B t FL eater Burnou LLE HS Alarm LEA! Heater Overcurrent

LERe Meaning When heater burnout, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent occurs, the No. 1 display in the applicable setting level flashes. Action When a heater burnout, HS error, or heater overcurrent is detected, the HA indicator lights and the No. 1 dis- play flashes for the applicable Heater Current 1 Value Monitor, Heater Current 2 Value Monitor, Leakage Cur- rent 1 Monitor, or Leakage current 2 Monitor parameters in the operation level and adjustment level. Control continues, allowing normal operation.

Appendix Troubleshooting Checking Problems If the Temperature Controller is not operating normally, check the following points before requesting repairs. If the problem persists, contact your OMRON representative for details on returning the product. Timing Status Meaning Countermeasures Page Turning ON the |Temperature unit ST (self-tuning) is in |This is not a product fault. The temperature |64 power for the (C/°F) is flashing. progress (default unit (°C/°F) flashes while ST (self-tuning) is first time setting: ON). being performed Temperature error is | Input type mismatch | Check the sensor type and reset the input |52 large. type correctly. mp error (S.Err dis- [Thermometer is not_| Check the thermometer installation location |31 play) installed properly. and polarity and install correctly. Communications are | Non-recommended | Make sure that the connected device is not | Section 1 of not possible. adapter is being faulty. Communi- used. cations Manual Communications are | Non-recommended | Make sure that the connected device is not |(See note.) not possible. adapter is being faulty. used. During opera- Overshooting ON/OFF control is Select PID control and execute either ST 62 tion Undershooting enabled (default: (self-tuning) or AT (auto-tuning). Hunting ON/OFF control When using self-tuning, turn ON the power selected). supply to the Temperature Controller and load (heater, etc.) at the same time, or turn ON the load power supply first. Accurate self-tuning and optimum control will not be possible if the power supply to the load is turned ON after turning ON the power sup- ply to the Temperature Controller. Control cycle is Shorten the control cycle. A shorter control |54 longer compared cycle improves control performance, but a with the speed of cycle of 20 ms minimum is recommended in rise and fall in tem- | consideration of the service life of the perature relays. Unsuitable PID con- | Set appropriate PID constants using either |62 stant of the following methods. + Execute AT (autotuning). + Set PID constants individually using man- ual settings. HS alarm operation | Use breeder resistance if the problem is 54 fault due to leakage current. Also investigate the errors detected by the HS alarm function. Temperature is not | Specified operation | Select either forward or reverse operation |54 rising is unsuitable for depending on the required control. Reverse required control operation is used for heating operations. (default: Reverse operation) Heater is burnt out or | Check whether heater burnout or deteriora- | 54 deteriorated. tion have occurred. Also investigate the errors detected by the heater burnout alarm. Insufficient heater Check whether the heater's heating capac- |-— capacity ity is sufficient. Cooling system in Check whether a cooling system is operat- |--- operation. ing. Peripheral devices | Set the heating prevention temperature set- | --- have heat preven- ting to a value higher than the set tempera- tion device operat- |ture of the Temperature Controller. ing. Note Refer to the ESCN/ESAN/ESEN/E5SGN Digital Temperature Controller Communications Manual (Cat. No. H158) for details.

Appendix Timing Status Meaning Countermeasures Page During opera- Output will not turn | Set to STOP Set the RUN/STOP mode to RUN. If STOP |172 tion (continued) | ON (default: RUN) is lit on the display, control is stopped. Specified operation | Select either forward or reverse operation |54 is unsuitable for depending on the required control. Reverse required control operation is used for heating operations. (default: Reverse operation) A high hysteresis is | Set a suitable value for the hysteresis. 60 set for ON/OFF oper- ation (default: 1.0°C) Temperature Con- Set to STOP Set the RUN/STOP mode to RUN. If STOP |172 troller will not oper- | (default: RUN) is lit on the display, control is stopped. ate Temperature error is | Thermometer has Check whether the thermometer has burnt |--- large burnt out or short-cir- | out or short-circuited Input error (S.err dis- | cuited. play) Thermometer lead | Wire the lead wires and power lines in sep- |-—- wires and power arate conduits, or wiring using a more direct lines are in the same | path. conduit, causing noise from the power lines (generally, dis- play values will be unstable). Connection between | Connect the thermocouple's lead wires — the Temperature directly, or connect a compensating conduc- Controller and ther-_ | tor suitable for the thermocouple. mocouple is using copper wires. Installation location | Check whether the location of the thermom- | --- of thermometer is eter is suitable. unsuitable. Input shift is not set | Set a suitable input shift. If input shift is not |89 correctly (default: required, set the input shift value to 0.0. 0°C) Keys will not operate | Setting change pro- |Turn OFF setting change protect. 110 tect is ON. Cannot shift levels Operations limited Set the operation/adjustment protect, initial |110 due to protection. setting/communications protect, and set- ting change protect values as required. After long ser- |Control is unstable | Terminal screws may | Retighten terminal screws to a torque of 33 vice life be loose. 0.74 to 0.90 N-m (see note). The internal compo- |The Temperature Controller's internal elec- |--- nents have reached |trolytic capacitor depends on the ambient the end of their ser- |temperature, and load rate. The structural vice life. life depends on the ambient environment (shock, vibration). The life expectancy of the output relays varies greatly with the switch- ing capacity and other switching conditions. Always use the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy. If an output relay is used beyond its life expectancy, its contacts may become welded or burned. Replace the Temperature Controller and all other Temperature Con- trollers purchased in the same time period. Note The tightening torque is 0.5 N-m for the E5SCN-U and 0.43 to 0.58 N-m for the E5SGN. The terminal torque is 0.5 to 0.6 N-m for auxiliary output 2 on the E5GN.

Appendix Symptom: Cannot Communicate or a Communications Error Occurs Meaning Countermeasures The communications wiring is not correct. Correct the wiring. The communications line has become dis- connected. Connect the communications line securely and tighten the screws. The communications cable is broken. Replace the cable. The communications cable is too long. The total cable length is 500 m maximum for RS-485 and 15 m maximum for RS-232C communications. To extend the communications distance for RS-232C communications, use OMROM's Z3R Optical Interface. The wrong communications cable has been used. E5CN, E5EN, or E5AN: Use a shielded, AWG24 to AWG14 (cross-sec- tional area of 0.205 to 2.081 mm?) twisted-pair cable for the communica- tions cable. E5GN: Use a shielded, AWG24 to AWG18 (cross-sectional area of 0.205 to 0.823 mm?) twisted-pair cable for the communications cable. More than the specified number of communi- cations devices are connected to the same communications path for RS-485 communi- cations. When 1:N RS-485 communications are used, a maximum of 32 nodes (including the host node) can be connected. An end node has not been set at each end of the communications line for RS-485 commu- nications. Set or connect terminating resistance at each end of the line. lfthe E5SCN, E5AN, ESEN, or E5GN is the end node, use 120-Q (1/2-W) terminating resistance. The combined terminating resistance with the host device must be at least 54 Q. The specified power supply voltage is not being supplied to the Controller. Supply the specified power supply voltage. The specified power supply voltage is not being supplied to an Interface Converter (such as the K3SC). Supply the specified power supply voltage. The same baud rate and communications method are not being used by all of the Con- trollers, host devices, and other devices on the same communications line. Set the same values for the baud rate, protocol, data length, stop bits, and parity on all nodes. The unit number specified in the command frame is different from the unit number set by the Controller. Use the same unit number. The same unit number as the Controller is being used for another node on the same communications line for RS-485 communica- tions. Set each unit number for only one node. There is a mistake in programming the host device. Use a line monitor to check the commands. Check operation using a sam- ple program. The host device is detecting the absence of a response as an error before it receives the response from the Controller. Shorten the send data wait time in the Controller or increase the response wait time in the host device. The host device is detecting the absence of a response as an error after broadcasting a command (except for SYSWAY). The Controller does not return responses for broadcast commandés. The host device sent another command before receiving a response from the Control- ler. The response must always be read after sending a command (except for broadcast commandés). The host device sent the next command too soon after receiving a response from the Controller. After receiving a response, wait at least 2 ms before sending the next command.

Appendix Meaning Countermeasures The communications line became unstable | Initialize the reception buffer in the host device before sending the first when Controller power was turned ON or command and after turning OFF the power to the Controller. interrupted, and the host device read the unstable status as data. The communications data was corrupted Try using a slower baud rate. from noise from the environment. Separate the communications cable from the source of noise. Use a shielded, twisted-pair cable for the communications cable. Use as short a communications cable as possible, and do not lay or loop extra cable. To prevent inductive noise, do not run the communications cable parallel to a power line. If noise countermeasures are difficult to implement, use an Optical Inter- face. Note For details on errors, refer to ESCN/E5AN/ESEN/ESGN Digital Temperature Controllers Communica- tions Manual Basic Type (Cat. No. H158).

Appendix Adjustment Level Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Adjustment Level LAdu Display AT Execute/Cancel |fE OFF, AT Cancel oFF, OFF None AT-2: 100%AT Execute RE, AT-1: 40%AT Execute RE- Communications | EMHE OFF, ON GFF,6N OFF None Writing Heater Current 1 CET 0.0 to 55.0 A Value Monitor Heater Burnout Hb 1 0.0 to 50.0 0.0 A Detection 1 Heater Overcurrent |G£ ! 0.0 to 50.0 50.0 A Detection 1 Heater Current 2 CEe 0.0 to 55.0 A Value Monitor Heater Burnout Hbe 0.0 to 50.0 0.0 A Detection 2 Heater Overcurrent |G£e2 0.0 to 50.0 50.0 A Detection 2 Leakage Current 1 LER! 0.0 to 55.0 A Monitor HS Alarm 1 HS 0.0 to 50.0 50.0 A Leakage Current2 |LCRe 0.0 to 55.0 A Monitor HS Alarm 2 LENS 0.0 to 50.0 50.0 A SP 0 SP-8 SP lower limit to SP upper 0 EU limit sP1 SP- 1 SP lower limit to SP upper 0 EU limit SP2 SP-2 SP lower limit to SP upper 0 EU limit SP 3 SP-3 SP lower limit to SP upper 0 EU limit Temperature Input CNS —199.9 to 999.9 0.0 °Cor°F Shift Upper Limit Temper- | CNGH —199.9 to 999.9 0.0 °C or°F ature Input Shift Value Lower Limit Temper- | [NS —199.9 to 999.9 0.0 °Cor°F ature Input Shift Value Proportional Band |? Universal input: 0.1 to 999.9 8.0 °C or °F (See note Analog input: 0.1 to 999.9 10.0 %FS Integral Time Ê 0 to 3,999 233 Second Derivative Time d RT OFF: 0 to 3,999 40 Second RT ON: 0.0 to 999.9 40.0 Second Cooling Coefficient |£-5€ 0.01 to 99.99 1.00 None Dead Band C-db Universal input: -199.9 to 0.0 °Cor°F

999.9 999.9 (See note

Analog input: OFF, 0.01to |aFF, BU to [OFF %FS MV at Stop My-S —5.0 to 105.0 (standard) 0.0 % —105.0 to 105.0 (heating/cool- ing) MV at PV Error MY -E —5.0 to 105.0 (standard) 0.0 % —105.0 to 105.0 (heating/cool- ing) SP Ramp Set Value | 5PFE OFF or 1 to 9,999 FF, fto OFF EU/s, EU/ 3993 min, EU/h MV Upper Limit ot-H MV lower limit +0.1 to 105.0 105.0 % (standard)

0.0 to 105.0 (heating/cooling)

MV Lower Limit ob-t —5.0 to MV upper limit -0.1 -5.0 (stan- |% (standard) dard) —105.0 to 0.0 (heating/cool- —105.0 ing) (heating/ cooling) MV Change Rate oRt 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 %ls Limit (0.0: MV Change Rate Limit Disabled) Extraction of Square | SGRP 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 % Root Low-cut Point

Appendix Initial Setting Level ing) Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Input Type HE Multi 0: Pt100 5 None input 1: Pt100 2: Pt100 3: JPt100 4: JPt100 5 K 6 K 8& J a T 10: T it E 12: L 13: U 14 U 15: N 16: R 17: S 18: B 19: 10 to 70°C 20: 60 to 120°C 21: 115to 165°C 22: 160 to 260°C 23: O to 50 mV 24: W 25: PLII Analog |0: 4to20 mA 0 None input 1: Oto20 mA 2: 1t05V 3 Oto5V 4 Oto10V Scaling Upper Limit | £N-H Scaling lower limit + 1 to 100 None 9,999 Scaling Lower Limit _|EN-L 1,999 to scaling upper limit 0 None Decimal Point dP Universal input: 0 to 1 0 None Analog input: 0 to 3 0 None Temperature Unit [d-U °C, °F DF ec None SP Upper Limit SE-H SP lower limit + 1 / input 1300 EU range lower limit (tempera- ture) SP lower limit + 1 / scaling 100 upper limit (analog) SP Lower Limit SE-t Input range lower limit to SP —200 EU upper limit — 1 (temperature) Scaling lower limit to SP 0 upper limit — 1 (analog) PID ON/OFF CNEL ON/OFF 2-PID oNaF,Pid |ON/OFF None Standard or Heating/ | 5-H Standard or heating/coolng [SENd,H-C [Standard [None Cooling ST SE OFF, ON oFF, a ON None Program Pattern PERN OFF, STOP, CONT oFF, SEoP, |OFF None Can! Control Period CP 0.5 or 1 to 99 85, {to 99 |20 Second (Heating) Control Period (Cool- | -EP 0.5 or 1 to 99 85, {to 99 |20 Second

Appendix Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Linear Current Out- |a1-E 4-20: 4 to 20 mA 4-28, 0-20 |4-20 None put 0-20: 0 to 20 mA Multi-SP Use EN Oto2 1 None Event Input Assign- |E#-1 None: None NaNE NONE None ment 1 STOP: RUN/STOP SEaP MANU: Auto/Manual MANU PRST: Program Start (See |PRGE note 3.) DRS: Invert Direct/Reverse |dRS Operation AT-2: 100% AT Execute/Can- |fAE-2 cel AT-1: 40% AT Execute/Cancel | AE - | WTPT: Setting Change NEPE Enable/Disable LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel LAE Event Input Assign- |E}-2 None: None NGNE STOP None ment 2 STOP: RUN/STOP Ska? MANU: Auto/Manual MANU PRST: Program Start (See |PRGE note 3.) DRS: Invert Direct/Reverse |dRS Operation AT-2: 100% AT Execute/Can- |fAE-2 cel AT-1: 40% AT Execute/Cancel | AE - | WTPT: Setting Change NEPE Enable/Disable LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel LAE Extraction of Square | 50F OFF, ON GFF, OFF None Root Enable oN Move to Advanced [AMG —1999 to 9,999 0 None function Setting Level Note (1) Set “None” as the unit for analog inputs (23: 0 to 50 mV). Transfer output Setting (monitor) range Default (transfer output Unit type upper/lower limits) (See note 2.1.) Set Point SP lower limit to SP upper limit | SP upper limit/lower limit EU Set Point During SP |SP lower limit to SP upper limit | SP upper limit/lower limit EU Ramp Pv Temperature: Input setting Input setting range upper/ EU range lower limit to input setting | lower limit range upper limit Analog: Scaling lower limit to Scaling upper/lower limit EU scaling upper limit MV Monitor (Heat- | Standard: -5.0 to 105.0 100.0/0.0 % ing) Heating/cooling: 0.0 to 105.0 MV Monitor (Cool- 0.0 to 105.0 100.0/0.0 % ing) (2.1) Initialized when the transfer output type is changed. Initialized if the input type, temperature unit, scaling upper/lower limit, or SP upper/ lower limit is changed when the transfer output type is SP, ramp SP, or PV. (When initialized by the initializing settings, it is initialized to 100.0/0.0.) (3) PRST (Program Start) can be set even when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled.

Note When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON, the setting range will be the MV lower limit to the MV upper limit. Monitor/Settin Item Level The contents displayed vary depending on the Monitor/Setting 1 to 5 (advanced function setting level) setting. Advanced Function Setting Level Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Parameter Initializa- | CN OFF, FACT oFF, FACE [OFF None tion Multi-SP Uses MSPU OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None SP Ramp Time Unit | SPF S: EU/second 5 M None M: EU/minute " H: EU/hour H Standby Sequence |FESE Condition A, condition B f,b Condition A | None Reset HB ON/OFF Hbt OFF, ON oFF, a ON None Auxiliary Output 1 SE IN N-O: Close in alarm N-a,N-C N-O None Open in Alarm N-C: Open in alarm Auxiliary Output 2 SEON N-O: Close in alarm N-a,N-C N-O None Open in Alarm N-C: Open in alarm Auxiliary Output 3 SbIN N-O: Close in alarm N-a,N-C N-O None Open in Alarm N-C: Open in alarm Heater Burnout HbE OFF, ON oFF, où OFF None Latch Heater Burnout Hys- | HbH 0.1 to 50.0 0.1 A teresis ST Stable Range SE-b 0.1 to 999.9 15.0 °Cor°F œ ALFA 0.00 to 1.00 0.65 None AT Calculated Gain |AE-0 0.1 to 10.0 0.8 None AT Hysteresis RE -H Universal input: 0.1 to 999.9 0.8 °Cor°F (See note

Appendix Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Cold junction Com- |£ut OFF, ON oFF, a ON None pensation Method MB Command Logic | LR} OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None Switching PV Change Color Catr Orange, Red, Green oRG,REd, |RED None CAN GRN Red to Green: When ALM1 is |P-& lit, Green to Red: When ALMA is |G-R lit Red to Green to Red R-LR Within PV stable band: Green Outside stable band: Red Green to Orange to Red G-af Within PV stable band: Green Outside stable band: Green, Red Orange to Green to Red o-0R Within PV stable band: Green Outside stable band: Green, Red PV Stable Band PY-E Universal input: 0.1 to 999.9 5.0 °Cor°F (See note Analog input: 0.01 to 99.99 5.00 %FS Alarm 1 ON Delay |F/8N 0 to 999 (0: ON delay dis- 0 Second abled) Alarm 2 ON Delay |A2aN 0 to 999 (0: ON delay dis- 0 Second abled) Alarm 3 ON Delay _|F36N 0 to 999 (0: ON delay dis- 0 Second abled) Alarm 1 OFF Delay |FiaF 0 to 999 (0: OFF delay dis- 0 Second abled) Alarm 2 OFF Delay |FeaF 0 to 999 (0: OFF delay dis- 0 Second abled) Alarm 3 OFF Delay |F30F 0 to 999 (0: OFF delay dis- 0 Second abled) Input Shift Type CSEP INST: Temperature input 1 [CAS f, ASE |INST None point shift INS2: Temperature input 2- point shift MV at Stop and Error |} 5E OFF, ON oFF, où OFF None Addition Auto/Manual Select |RMAd OFF, ON GFF,6N OFF None Addition AT RE OFF, ON FF, [OFF None HS Alarm Use HS OFF, ON oFF, où ON None HS Alarm Latch HSE OFF, ON FF, [OFF None HS Alarm Hysteresis | H5H 0.1 to 50.0 0.1 A LBA Detection Time |LbA 0 to 9999 (0: LBA function dis- 0 Second abled) LBA Level LERL Universal input: 0.1 to 999.9 8.0 °C or °F (See note Analog input: 0.01 to 99.99 10.00 %FS

Appendix Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Auxiliary Output 1 Sübt NONE: No assignment Nan! ALM1 None Assignment O: Control output (heat- |a ing) C-O: Control output (cool- |£-a ing) ALM1: Alarm 1 AEN ALM2: Alarm 2 ALNe ALM3: Alarm 3 ALNI PEND: Program end output |PÆENd (See note 3.) RALM: Control output ON/ RALN OFF count alarm (See note 4.) WR1: Work bit 1 (See note 5.) | HP ! WR2: Work bit 2 (See note 5.) | HP WR3: Work bit 3 (See note 5.) |HP3 WR4: Work bit 4 (See note 5.) | HP4 WR5: Work bit 5 (See note 5.) | MPG WR6: Work bit 6 (See note 5.) | HPE WR7: Work bit 7 (See note 5.) | 47 WR8: Work bit 8 (See note 5.) | HP Auxiliary Output 2 Ube Same as for control output 1. ALM2 None Assignment Auxiliary Output 3 SUb3 Same as for control output 1. ALM3 None Assignment (E5AN/ E5EN only) Character Select CSEL OFF, ON oFF, où ON None Soak Time Unit E-U M: Minutes; H: Hours M, 4H M None Alarm SP Selection |AL5P SP-M: Ramp set point SP-M, SP |SP-M None SP: Set point Manual MV Limit MANE OFF, ON oFF, a ON None Enable PV Rate of Change |PFFP 1 10 999 4 Sampling Calculation Period period Automatic Cooling |ES5EA OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None Coefficient Adjust- ment Heater Overcurrent |a£u OFF, ON oFF, où ON None Use Heater Overcurrent |a£t OFF, ON oFF, où OFF None Latch Heater Overcurrent |aCH 0.1 to 50.0 0.1 A Hysteresis PF Setting PF OFF: OFF oFF A-M None

PFde 0 to 15: Same as for Monitor/ Setting Item 1. None Monitor/Setting ltem

PFd3 0 to 15: Same as for Monitor/ Setting Item 1. None Monitor/Setting Item

PFdT 0 to 15: Same as for Monitor/ Setting Item 1. None Monitor/Setting Item

PFdS 0 to 15: Same as for Monitor/ Setting Item 1. None PV/SP Display Screen Selection SPdP 0: PV/SP : PV/SP/Multi-SP, PV/SP/MV 2: PV/SP/MV, PV/SP/Multi-SP 3: PV/SP/Multi-SP V/SP/MV 5: PV/SP/Multi-SP, PV/SP/ Soak Time Remain 6: PV/SP/MV, PV/SP/Soak Time Remain 7: PV/SP/Soak Time Remain None MV Display Selec- tion od5t O: MV (Heating) None PV Decimal Point Display PF dP

Second Control Output 1 ON/ OFF Count Monitor 0 to 9999 100 times Control Output 2 ON/ OFF Count Monitor 0 to 9999 100 times

Appendix Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Control Output 1 ON/|FA ! 0 to 9999 0 100 times OFF Count Alarm Set Value Control Output 2 ON/|FA2 0 to 9999 0 100 times OFF Count Alarm Set Value ON/OFF Counter RAC 0: Disable the counter reset 0 None Reset function. 1: Reset the control output 1 ON/OFF counter. 2: Reset the control output 2 ON/OFF counter. Move to Calibration | £Ma# —1999 to 9,999 0 None Level Note (1) Set “None” as the unit for analog inputs (23: 0 to 50 mV). (2) The setting range depends on whether control output 1 is a current output or voltage output (for driv- ing SSR). (3) PEND (program end output) can be set even when the program pattern is set to OFF, but the func- tion will be disabled. (4) Turns ON when either the control output 1 or 2 ON/OFF count alarm is ON. (5) Displayed when logic operations are used. For detail, refer to 4-22 Logic Operations. Protect Level Parameters Characters | Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Move to Protect level Phos —1999 to 9,999 0 None Operation/Adjusiment Protect |aAPE 0103 0 None Initial Setting/Communica- CEPE Oto2 1 None tions Protect Setting Change Protect HEPE OFF, ON OFF, où OFF None PF Key Protect PFPE OFF, ON OFF, où OFF None Parameter Mask Enable PMSK OFF, ON oFF, on ON None Password to Move to Protect |PRLP —1999 to 9,999 0 None Level Communications Setting Level Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Protocol Setting PSEL CompoWay/F (SYSWAY), ENF,Mod [Compo- |None Modbus (See note.) Way/F (SYSWAY) Communications Unit No. | £-Na 0 to 99 1 None Communications Baud |bPS 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 388.4, | le,e1, 9.6 kbps Rate or 57.6 48,96, 132, 384

Communications Data LE: 7,8 7 Bit Length Communications Stop SbcE 1,2 2 Bit Bits Communications Parity | PRES None, Even, Odd NaNE, Even None EVEN, add Send Data Wait Time Sd 0 to 99 20 ms Note When setting CWF, either CompoWay/F or SYSWAY can be used as the communications protocol. (CompoWay/F and SYSWAY are automatically identified by the command frames.)

Lower Limit Upper Limit Stan- dard or Heat- ing/ Cooling Pro- gram Pattern Trans- fer Out- put Type Num- ber of Multi- Uses

SP0 to SP3 Set Point Related param- eter initializa- tion execution condition Tem- pera- ture input Analog input SP Upper Limit SP Lower Limit © (See note 1.) © (See note 1.) © (See note 1.) Set Point © (See note 2.) © (See note 2.) © (See note 2.) SPO to SP3 © (See note 2.) © (See note 2.) © (See note 2.)

© (See note 3.) Proportional Band (See note 10.) © (See note 3.) © (See note 9.) Integral Time (See note 10.) © (See note 3.) © (See note 9.) Derivative Time (See note 10.) © (See note 3.) © (See note 9.) MV Upper Limit, MV Lower Limit MV at Stop MV at PV Error Manual MV Transfer Output Upper Limit, Transfer Output Lower Limit (See note 4.) © (See note 4-

Control Output 1 Assignment Control Output 2 Assignment © (See note 6.) © (See note 6.) Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment © (See note 7.) © (See note 7.) Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment © (See note 6.) © (See note 6.) Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment © (See note 6.) © (See note 6.) Event Input Assignment 1 © (See note 8.) Event Input Assignment 2 © (See note 8.)

Lower Limit Upper Limit Stan- dard or Heat- ing/ Cooling Pro- gram Pattern Trans- fer Out- put Type Num- ber of Multi- Uses

SP0 to SP3 Set Point Related param- eter initializa- tion execution condition Tem- pera- ture input Analog input Move to Protect Level MV Display Selection Temperature Input Shift Upper Limit Temperature Input Shift, Lower Limit Temperature Input Shift Dead Band Hysteresis (Heating) Hysteresis (Cooling) Wait Band Alarm 1 to 3 Hysteresis ST Stable Range AT Hysteresis PV Stable Band LBA Level LBA Band Note (1) Initialized to input setting range upper and lower limits, or scaling upper and lower limits. (2) Clamped by SP upper and lower limits. (3) Initialized only when the input type is changed to analog input when RT turns ON. The defaults are as follows: RT: OFF Proportional band: 8.0 Integral time: 233 Derivative time: 40 (4) Initialization is performed as shown below according to the transfer output type setting. The initial- ization differs depending on the changed parameter and the output type setting. SP: SP upper and lower limits Ramp SP: SP upper and lower limits PV: Input setting range upper and lower limits or scaling upper and lower limits MV (Heating): 100.0/0.0 MV (Cooling): 100.0/0.0 Initialized only when the transfer output type is set to SP, Ramp SP or PV. (4-2) Initialized only when the transfer output type is set to MV (Heating) or MV (Cooling). (4-1)

(4-3) Initialized to the above default values regardless of the settings for changing the transfer out- put type. (5) Initialized as follows according to the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter setting. MV Upper Limit: 105.0 MV Lower Limit: Standard -5.0, heating/cooling -105.0 (6) Initialized to control output (cooling) for heating and cooling control, according to the following. (The defaults for standard control are the defaults in the parameter list.) With control output 2: The Control Output 2 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output (cooling). Without control output 2 and E5SAN/EN: The Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output (cooling). Without control output 2 and ESCN: The Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output (cooling). E5GN: The Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output (cooling). (7) When the program pattern is OFF, the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is initialized to alarm output 1. When the program pattern is not OFF, the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is initialized to program end output. The Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is not initialized for the E5SGN, however, if it is set for heating/cooling control. (8) If the Program Start parameter is assigned when the program pattern is changed to OFF, the Pro- gram Start parameter will be initialized to “not assigned/” (9) Initialized when temperature inputs are used and RT is changed. The defaulis are as follows: Proportional band: 8.0 Integral time: 233 Derivative time: 40 when RT is OFF, and 40.0 when RT is ON. (10) The proportional band, integral time, and derivative time are initialized as follows by RT and input type changes. + When RT is turned from ON to OFF by a change from temperature input to analog input. + When ON is turned to OFF or OFF is turned to ON by an RT change. (11) Write to both so that the SP and the currently selected Multi-SP SPO to SP3 match. (12) Initializes event input assignments used for Multi-SP to NONE. (13) Initialized to 0.8 when the temperature unit is °C, and to 1.4 when the temperature unit is °F.

Appendix Input type Specifications | Set value Input setting range Input indication range Control-_ | Current input 4 to 20 mA 0 Any of the following ranges, |-5% to 105% of setting lers with Oto 20 mA 1 by scaling: range. The display shows Analog - —1,999 to 9,999 —1999 to 9999 (numeric Inputs | Voltageinput |1to5V 2 199.9 to 999.9 range with decimal point Oto5V 3 —19.99 to 99.99 omitted). Oto10V 4 —1.999 to 9.999 + The default is 5 (°C/°F) for Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs and 0 for Controllers with Analog Inputs. + The applicable standards for each of the above input ranges are as follows: K, JT, E, N,R,S, B: JIS C1602-1995, IEC 584-1

According to Platinel Il Electromotive Force Table by Engelhard Corp. Temperature lower limit -20°C to temperature upper limit +20°C, or temperature lower limit -40°% to temperature upper limit +40°F + ES1B input: Same as input indication range + Analog input —5% to +105% of scaling range

Appendix Setting Levels Diagram This diagram shows all of the setting levels. To move to the advanced function setting level and calibration level, you must enter passwords. Some parameters are not displayed depending on the protect level setting and the conditions of use. Control stops when you move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Manual mode Note

Power ON | Start in manual mode. / Start in automatic mode. Press the [2] Key or the PF Key for at least 1 s \ (See note 4.) Press the Operation Adjustment OH £a Level Level Press the Keys for at 5e ee least 1 s. Press the Keys for at = least3s. p— Key less than 1 s. ) (Dipay EC will iash Ë, atertst E (Éosnte 5) Ÿ Second) PF Key # is displayed. (See note 5) will flash after cond.) Monitor/Setting Item Level (See note 4) Press the PF Key Press the [O] Key for at least 3 s. (Display will flash for atleast 1 s, (See after 1st second.) Press the note 1) O1 Key for Control stops. Protect Level atleast 1 s. _— Note The time taken to move (Communica to the protect level can “ be adjusted by chang- Den d nn ing the Move 10 pros Prse we tect level time" setting. @y for less than 1. (Refer to page 228.) Input password while AMF is displayed. (Set value -169) Press the [O] Key for at least 1 s. Advanced Function Setting Level Input password. C2 control in progress C2 contro! stopped Caïibration Level 2) (M) Not displayed for some models La change (1) You can return to the operation level by executing a software reset. (2) ltis not possible to move to other levels from the calibration level by operating the keys on the front panel. lt can be done only by first turning OFF the power. (3) From the manual control level, key operations can be used to move to the operation level only. (4) When the PF Setting parameter is set to A-M for a Controller with a PF Key (E5AN/EN). (5) When the PF Setting parameter is set to PFDP for a Controller with a PF Key (E5AN/EN)

set to A-M for a Controller with a PF Key (ESAN/EN).

2. When the PF Setting parameter is

set to PFDP for a Controller with a PF Key (ESAN/EN).

Appendix Monitor/Setting Item Level | (E5ANEN ons) Mani [ecre BE

Tpnunae Couing RE aa Dr

dead band, 97 setting, 98 derivative time, 68 detection current, 75 dimensions, 22 ESAN, 22 ESCN, 22

Index ESCN-U, 22 settings, 82 ESEN, 22 HS Alarm (error display), 283 ESGN, 23 hysteresis, 60, 62 direct operation, 55, 206 Display Range Exceeded (error display), 281 down key, 5 1/0 configuration, 6 E basic model ESAN, 9 error displays, 281 ESCN, 6 Current Value Exceeds, 282 ESCN-U, 7 Display Range Exceeded, 281 ESEN, 9 Heater Burnout, 283 ESGN, 11 Heater Overcurrent, 283 main functions, 12 HS Alarm, 283 indication accuracy, 270 Input Error, 281 indicators Memory Error, 282 explanation, 4 event inputs, 13, 41, 99, 101 operation, 4 wiring, 41 infrared temperature sensor, 270 external dimensions initial setting level, 17, 199 Current Transformer (CT), 279 parameter operation list, 291 external power supply for ESIB, 14, 44, 90, 276 initial setting/communications protect, 110 initial settings, 50 F examples, 50, 51 initialization, 220 front panel Input Error (error display), 281 ESAN, 2 input sensor types, 12, 200 ESCN, 2 input shift, 89 ESCN-U, 2 one-point shift, 89 ESEN, 3 two-point shift, 90 ESGN, 3 calculating, 90 input types, 52, 303 H default values, 200 list, 53 HB alarm (heater burnout alarm), 73 setting, 52 settings, 80 inputs Heater Burnout (error display), 283 wiring, 36 heater burnout alarm, 13, 276 installation, 22, 25 heater burnout hysteresis, 223 ESAN/ESEN mounting the terminal cover, 26 mounting to the panel, 26 ESCN/ESCN-U mounting the terminal cover, 26 mounting to the panel, 25 ESGN mounting to the panel, 27 panel cutout ESAN, 24 HS alarm, 13, 73, 276 ESCN, 24 heater burnout latch, 223 heater overcurrent hysteresis, 247 latch, 246 heating/cooling control, 95, 189, 193, 204 cooling coefficient, 97, 189 dead band, 97, 189 setting, 98

Index ESCN-U, 24 ESEN, 24 ESGN, 25 removing from case ESAN, 29 ESCN, 28 ESEN, 29 removing the terminal block E5GN, 30 integral time, 68, 188

keys down key, 5 key operations, 15 level key, 5 mode key, 5 operations, 5 up key, 5

No. 1 display, 4 No. 2 display, 4

ONVOFF control, 54, 204 setting, 61 one-point shift, 91 operation level, 16, 163 parameter operation list, 288 operation/adjustment protect, 110 output functions assignments, 56 output limits, 136 output periods, 206 output specifications setting, 54

removing from case ESAN/ESEN, 29 ESCN, 28 removing the terminal block ESGN, 30 reverse operation, 55, 206 RT (robust tuning), 66, 234 run/stop control, 103

scaling upper and lower limits for analog inputs, 94 screwless clamp terminals, 34 self-tuning (ST), 64, 205 sensor input control range, 303 indication range, 303 setting range, 303 sensor types, 200 set point (SP), 59 limiter, 104 limiting change rate, 106 lower limit, 106 ramp, 106 setting, 59, 61 setting upper and lower limits, 104 switching between SP, 102 upper limit, 105 setting change protect, 110 setting level configuration, 15 setting levels diagram, 305 settings cooling coefficient, 98 dead band, 98 event input, 99 HB alarm (heater burnout alarm), 80 moving to advanced function setting level, 80 heating/cooling control, 98 HS alarm, 82 moving to advanced function setting level, 81, 82 hysteresis, 62 LBA detection time, 119 password, 112

saving, 18 SP lower limit, 106 SP upper limit, 105 switching between SPs, 102 shifting input values, 89 simple program function, 129, 135 controlling start, 103 starting, 131 soak time, 131 SP ramp, 106 alarm operations, 108 operation at startup, 107 restrictions, 107 specifications, 275 Current Transformer (CT), 278, 279 external power supply for ESIB, 45 output, 54 USB-Serial Conversion Cable, 280 ST (self-tuning), 64 ST stable range, 65 Startup conditions, 65 standard control, 204 standby sequence, 93 startup conditions, 65 operation, 107 support software port, 45

Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual. Cat. No. H156-E1-03 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the previous version. Revision code Date Revised content 01 January 2008 | Original production o1A March 2008 | Page 9: Added case color information to the model number legend. 02 March 2009 | Pages xii and xiv: Added information on shipping standards and corrected mis- takes. Pages 26, 96,236, 246, 255, 263, and 277: Made minor corrections. Pages 62 to 67: Made minor corrections to graphics. Page 80: Replaced graphic and changed step 2. 03 September 2009 | Added the E5GN.

Authorized Distributor: